JP2024091826A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.
[Solution] When a special role is won, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd small role is won and a process that makes it easier to win the lottery for switching to the AT mode is executed, whereas if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the second operation mode, the 1st to 6th small roles are won and a process that makes it harder to win the lottery for switching to the AT mode is executed. In the CZ mode, where the probability of winning the lottery for switching to the AT mode is high, if the lottery for switching to the AT mode is won, the number of premonition games is set to 0 games and the AT mode is started from the next game. If a special role is won during the CZ mode, the result of the lottery for switching to the AT mode is notified after the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the game.
[Selected Figure] Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, in slot machines, when the start lever is operated with medals as gaming media bets, an internal lottery is conducted and the reels begin to spin, and if the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop in response to the results of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the gaming machines mentioned above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention 1 is
A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means for executing a start drive control to start rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means for holding a lottery for awarding a special prize to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
an awarding means for awarding a number of game values corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a first symbol combination can be stopped at a predetermined position that is visible through the display unit, and a first number of game values is awarded by the awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a specific result is set in which a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at a predetermined position visible through the display unit, and a second number of game values greater than the first number is awarded by the awarding means;
A mode notifying means capable of notifying a mode of an operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notifying means;
A specific processing means capable of executing a specific process related to the function of the status notification means;
a means for performing a process for making the specific process executable when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a specific game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and for performing a process for making the specific process unexecutable when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the specific game;
a means for executing a notification corresponding to the specific process at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means is executed in the specific game;
a means for notifying a player of a predetermined content of the specific process at a timing prior to the specific timing in the specific game and at a timing subsequent to a branch timing in which the operation of each of the stop operation means is performed to determine whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:
The present invention 2 is
A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means for executing a start drive control to start rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means for holding a lottery for awarding a special prize to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
an awarding means for awarding a number of game values corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a first symbol combination can be stopped at a predetermined position that is visible through the display unit, and a first number of game values is awarded by the awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a specific result is set in which a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at a predetermined position visible through the display unit, and a second number of game values greater than the first number is awarded by the awarding means;
A mode notifying means capable of notifying a mode of an operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notifying means;
A means for executing a specific determination of whether a specific event occurs that makes it easier for the mode notification means to execute the mode notification;
a means for performing a process for making the specific determination executable when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a specific game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and for performing a process for making the specific determination inexecutable when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the specific game;
a specific notification means for executing a specific notification corresponding to the response result when the result of the specific determination is a response result corresponding to causing the specific event;
Equipped with
The specific notification means is characterized in that, when the result of the specific judgment becomes the corresponding result, the specific notification can be executed when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the specific game after the game which resulted in the corresponding result, and the specific notification can also be executed when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door closed. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device; 5 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when three bets are made; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when two bets are made; 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. An explanatory diagram for explaining the operation mode when a special role is won. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a bonus state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery result handling process. 13 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for transition to a favorable zone. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of various transition lottery tables. 13 is a flowchart showing the start time AT lottery processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a continuation determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT addition process. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an indication monitor and a section display. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification presentation performed on the auxiliary display unit. 13A is a flowchart showing the lottery result command setting process, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the lottery result command and the push order notification command. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for AT lottery at the time of stop. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of a ceiling subtraction value table and a stop-time transition lottery table. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the trigger for winning the AT or CZ. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for the number of premonition games. A figure showing an example of the selection rate of the continuation rate of the AT mode. A flowchart showing processing for the number of CZ games. A flowchart showing processing for the number of AT games. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process by a sub-side display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all stops are performed. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. A flowchart showing the start-time CZ performance setting processing. A flowchart showing the CZ performance setting process at stop. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which effects of each game occur during the CZ mode. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the relationship between the timing of execution of the stop-time CZ effect setting process and the occurrence rate of explosion effects. FIG. 13 shows an example of a premonition game number table. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-time premonition effect setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a premonition effect at the time of stopping. 13 is a flowchart showing a game number management process. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the difference between the displayed number of games and the actual number of games to reach the ceiling. 13 is a flowchart showing the first stop ON effect setting process in variant example 1. A flowchart showing the start-time AT lottery processing in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT addition process. This is a diagram to explain how AT winning notification is made in a special role winning game. In the third modified example, (a) is a flowchart showing the processing for setting the effect when the first stop is ON, and (b) and (c) are figures for explaining how the final effect is performed. A flowchart showing a part of the start-time AT lottery processing in variant example 4. 13 is a flowchart showing a pre-determination process. A flowchart showing the start-time CZ performance setting processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a navigation mode process in Modification Example 5. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific notification process. A diagram for explaining an overview of a specific notification performance. In variant example 6, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the processing for the number of AT games, and (b) is a flowchart showing the processing for adding to the AT when stopped. A figure showing an example of each add-on lottery table. A flowchart showing part of the process for the start-time AT addition lottery. 13 is a flowchart showing an add-on advance judgment process. (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the start-time performance setting process, and (b) and (c) are figures for explaining the outline of specific notification performance during AT. In the seventh modified example, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery result response processing, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification small role lottery table. In variant example 8, (a) is a flowchart showing the lottery for transition to a favorable zone, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification small win lottery table. A figure for explaining the outline of the notification small prize lottery in variant example 9. 23 is a flowchart showing a second section display process in Modification Example 10. 13 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for transition to advantageous zones. A flowchart showing processing when transitioning to a favorable zone. A diagram to explain the relationship between the operation mode and the degree of advantage when a special role is won in the normal area. An explanatory diagram for explaining each special role in variant example 11. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the relationship between the push order notification performance when the push order bell is won and the push order notification performance when a special role is won. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of a lottery result response process. An explanatory diagram for explaining the processing related to the instruction function of each special role in variant example 12. A figure showing an example of an add-on lottery table.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of a slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 closed, Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 open, Fig. 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Fig. 5 is a front view of a cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installing it in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a, 14b at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is supported rotatably around an opening and closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b with respect to the housing 11, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its back side. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided at the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 is provided with a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be rotated individually, i.e., independently, by driving each stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 500 pulses, and the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel, is controlled by this excitation pulse. In addition, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reel unit 31. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has rotated once. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input.

On the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, multiple symbols are drawn in the long side direction (rotation direction) as identification information. More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a specified position, it is necessary to output 25 excitation pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Furthermore, the main control device 101 can determine which symbols are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R and stop a specified symbol at a position visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from 0 to 19 are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are ten types of symbols: "bell" symbol (e.g., the first on the left reel 32L), "replay" symbol (e.g., the zeroth on the left reel 32L), "red 7" symbol (e.g., the fourteenth on the left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (e.g., the second on the left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (e.g., the eighth on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., the ninth on the left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (e.g., the third on the left reel 32L), "young man" symbol (e.g., the eighteenth on the left reel 32L), "red shell" symbol (e.g., the fourth on the left reel 32L), and "white shell" symbol (e.g., the nineteenth on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three combinations of symbols, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the symbols that can be seen. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as combinations of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, there are combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a downward-right line L4 that connects the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on an upward-right line L5 that connects the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6 that connects the middle pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on lines that bend, other than the curved line L6, but we will not explain them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated by betting on medals, and some are not. When symbols stop in a specified combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in which a specified number of medals, which serve as gaming media, are paid out, or a bonus is awarded in which the gaming state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a specified combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, among the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as the active line. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, there are cases where the game is started by betting three medals and cases where the game is started by betting two medals. When the game is started by betting three or two medals, only the bent line L6 is set as the active line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as active lines. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as the active line ML. In the following, a game that is started by betting three medals is also referred to as a three-bet game, a game that is started by betting two medals is also referred to as a two-bet game, and a game that is started by betting one medal is also referred to as a one-bet game. In this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

Figures 8 to 10 show the correspondence between winning combinations of symbols and the benefits that will be awarded if a winning combination is achieved.

The small prize winnings that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize winning to the 32nd small prize winning.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, 8 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbol corresponding to the first minor win stops on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbols stop in a line sloping to the right L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to a bell has been achieved.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the second small win is won. When the second small win is won, 8 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbol corresponding to the second small win stops on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbols stop in a line on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and can also understand that a small win different from the first small win described above has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbols are aligned.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the third minor win is achieved. When the third minor win is achieved, eight medals are paid out in a three bet game, and five medals are paid out in a two bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbol corresponding to the third small win stops on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbols stop in a line on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and also understand that a small win different from the first and second small wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbols are aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the fourth minor win is achieved. When the fourth minor win is achieved, eight medals are paid out in a three bet game, and five medals are paid out in a two bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbol corresponding to the 4th minor win stops on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbols stop in a line slanting to the right L5. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and also allows the player to understand that a minor win different from the 1st to 3rd minor wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbols are aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 5th minor win is achieved. When the 5th minor win is achieved, 8 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbol corresponding to the 5th minor win stops on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbols stop in a line on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and can also understand that a minor win different from the 1st to 4th minor wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbols are aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the 6th minor win is achieved. When the 6th minor win is achieved, 8 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small win stops on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbol stops (in a small hill shape) on the bottom of the left reel 32L, the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the bottom of the right reel 32R. This allows the player to easily understand that a small win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and also allows the player to understand that a small win different from the first to fifth small wins has been achieved due to the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 7th small prize is won. When the 7th small prize is won, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbol corresponding to the seventh minor win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop in a line sloping to the right L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the 8th small win is achieved. When the 8th small win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th minor win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops in line on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor win corresponding to watermelon has been achieved, and can also understand that a minor win different from the 7th minor win described above has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "watermelon" symbols are aligned.

The 9th to 32nd minor prizes are so-called missed prizes, which are awarded when the 1st to 6th minor prizes are missed. When the 9th to 32nd minor prizes are awarded, one medal is paid out in a 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in a 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd minor winning symbols are awarded when the corresponding combination of the "replay", "red 7", "BAR", "red shell", "white shell", "young man" or "bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "white 7", "cherry", "red shell", "young man" or "red 7", "watermelon", "replay", "BAR", "bell" or "white shell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7", "white 7", "white shell", "young man" or "watermelon", "red shell", "BAR" or "replay" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the symbol combinations corresponding to the 9th to 32nd minor wins are all set so that the "bell" symbols do not all stop on a straight line (L1 to L5), making it easy to understand that the minor win corresponding to the bell has not been achieved.

When the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BELL" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BELL" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the 33rd minor win is achieved. When the 33rd minor win is achieved, one medal is paid out in a 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 33rd minor win stops on the active line ML, the "BAR" symbol may stop aligned on the middle line L2.

Incidentally, in the configuration where medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned 1st to 33rd minor wins, the paid out minor wins are a type of bonus (game value) that is awarded depending on the outcome of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as "out balls," and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (out balls) to the number of medals inserted (bet) may also be referred to as "out ball rate."

The winning combinations that can be awarded with a replay bonus (play value) that allows a player to play the next game without inserting a medal include the 1st replay winning combination to the 12th replay winning combination. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the 1st replay to the 12th replay.

A first replay win is achieved when the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Red 7", "White 7", "White Shell" or "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbol corresponding to the first replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "Replay" symbols stop in line on the center line L2. This allows the player to easily understand that a replay win corresponding to a replay has been achieved.

A second replay wins when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. When the symbol corresponding to the second replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "white 7" symbols stop in a line on the center line L2, as shown in Figure 13(e).

The third replay wins when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. When the symbols corresponding to the third replay win stop on the pay line ML, as shown in FIG. 13(f), the "white 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R.

The fourth and fifth replays are adjustment replays in case multiple replays result in overlapping wins.

In the sixth replay, a win is achieved when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7", "white 7", "BAR", "cherry", "white shell" or "young man" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbols corresponding to the sixth replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bottom row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a miss of the upper row watermelon tenpai. Furthermore, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the left reel 32L and the bottom of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the middle of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a so-called right-downward watermelon tenpai miss stopping pattern.

In the seventh replay, a win is achieved when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or the "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a stop pattern that is so-called "upper row watermelon tenpai miss." In addition, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the left reel 32L and the middle of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the bottom of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called right-downward watermelon tenpai miss.

The 8th replay wins when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7", "cherry" symbol, "red shell" or "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop in a line on the middle line L2.

The 9th replay wins when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbol corresponding to the 9th replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "replay" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, but the "replay" symbol does not stop on the middle row of the right reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops on the middle row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a middle row replay tenpai miss.

In the tenth replay, a win is achieved when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. In the twelfth replay, a win is achieved when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 13(c) and FIG. 13(d), when a symbol corresponding to the 10th replay or 12th replay win stops on the pay line ML, a "cherry" symbol stops on the lower row of the left reel 32L. If the 10th replay or 12th replay is won, and a stop operation is performed aiming for the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper row in the case of the 10th replay win, and the "cherry" symbol stops on the middle or lower row in the case of the 12th replay win, so it is possible to distinguish between the 10th replay win and the 12th replay win. The 11th replay wins when the 10th replay or 12th replay cannot be won, i.e., when there is a possibility of a miss.

State transition winnings, which only result in a transition of the game state, include the 1st BB winning and the 2nd BB winning.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a 1st BB win is achieved. When a 1st BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st BB state. When the symbols corresponding to a 1st BB win stop on the pay line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the "BAR" symbols stop in a line sloping to the right L5, or as shown in FIG. 14(b), the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop on the sloping to the right line L5 in order from left to right.

When the "red shell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a 2nd BB win is achieved. When a 2nd BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the 2nd BB state. When the symbols corresponding to a 2nd BB win stop on the pay line ML, as shown in Figure 14(c), the "white 7" symbols stop in a line on the lower line L3, or as shown in Figure 14(d), the "white 7", "white 7", and "red 7" symbols stop on the lower line L3 in order from left to right.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of the patterns. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate.

Button-shaped stop switches 42-44 are provided to the right of the start lever 41 and are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, and 26R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to the main control device 101, which will be described later. The main control device 101 then determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output a detection signal of a LOW signal, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the detection signal switches from a LOW signal to a HIGH signal. The main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated by determining this signal switch. When the main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Stop lamps 42b to 44b are built into the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively. The light from the stop lamps 42b to 44b passes partially through the operation surfaces of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the light from the stop lamps 42b to 44b is visible through the stop switches 42 to 44. When the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is valid, the corresponding stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled to be turned on, and when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is invalid, the corresponding stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled to be turned off.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. In addition, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal insertion port 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means provided on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 from a medal discharge port 49 provided on the lower front surface of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48, and pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. In addition, a reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent medals from being stored in the storage tank 52 by more than a predetermined amount. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a is provided to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion port 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion port 45 is stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection port 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as game media at one time out of the specified number of the game. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, when the specified number is set to 2 and the specific number is set to 2, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 2 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, when the specified number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, when the specified number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 2, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 2 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. In addition, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56, 57, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitute an input means for inputting game media. Also, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting a medal, the credit insertion switches 56, 57 only involve the action of inserting a virtual medal based on the stored memory. Considering this, they can also be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media. Note that in this slot machine 10, a credit insertion switch is not provided because one virtual medal is inserted.

The first credit insertion switch 56 is set to have a larger operating surface for operation by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. Therefore, it is expected that normally the player will operate the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, normally the player will insert a specific number of coins out of the specified number to play the game.

To the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 is a performance switch 66 that is operated when a performance occurs.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores as virtual medals any surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) or medals paid out when a prize is won, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display section 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display sections 60 to 62 are made up of seven-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display unit 62, there is provided an instruction monitor 68 having a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an area indicator that indicates an advantageous area in which the player can play in an advantageous situation by changing the winning rate of minor roles by notifying the operation order. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there are provided an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that gives the player various information. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. At the back of the auxiliary display unit 65, there is provided a display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65.

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the gaming machine is written and which constitutes a specified display screen. The lower display section 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display section, or the lower display section 69 may be provided with operation buttons for presentation purposes, or the entire lower display section 69 may be configured to be operable.

Inside the housing 11, a power supply box 70 is provided to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hall manager or the like to adjust the medal output. In other words, the hall manager or the like can insert the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turn it ON to set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a hand ratio monitor 77 for indicating the ratio between advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player. The hand ratio monitor 77 is installed on the side of the main control device 101 facing the front of the gaming machine so that it is visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is in an open state, and is not visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is in a closed state. More specifically, it is housed in a board box so that the display surface of the hand ratio monitor 77 is visible through the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in a closed state, the hand ratio monitor 77 is not visible through the gaps of the display windows 26L to 26R, and the hand ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21 and the front door 12 is in an open state. The hand ratio monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 15 and 16.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. This main control device 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main control device 101, various sensors are connected, such as the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that detects when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. Signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

The power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and each electronic device of the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply cut-off state and generates a power failure signal not only during a power failure but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off and output a power failure signal when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example. The power failure signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal and executes the power failure processing described below. The power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts to be used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

The output side of the main control device 101 is connected via an input/output port 104 to the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid out display unit 61, the number of coins to be paid out display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the role ratio monitor 77, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, a RAM 106 that secures a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105, and various counters, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, and other processing circuits required for the slot machine 10, as well known in the art (not shown). The ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control programs.

The RAM 106 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 is provided with a backup area in addition to memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery results of winning combinations, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a setting value information storage area 106c for storing setting values.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed by the power outage processing (see Figure 17) when power is interrupted, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed during main processing when power is turned on.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a power outage flag generation process.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 for securing a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the stop lamps 42b-44b, upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the stop lamps 42b-44b, upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for indirect sound, lamps, and displays related to the game, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected to the effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) and the like. Note that the display control device 81 may also be configured to drive and control the various display units 60 to 62, 68.

In addition, all or part of the components 42b to 44b, 63 to 65 connected to the display control device 81 may be directly connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 may directly control all or part of these components 42b to 44b, 63 to 65.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processes of the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processes that are started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game among these processes, i.e., timer interrupt processes, and normal processes performed in the main processes.

Figure 17 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 that are used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to a backup area in the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here is an overview of how power outages are handled.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes an NMI interrupt process and sets a power outage flag in a power outage flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure process, first, it is determined whether the transmission of the command has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the transmission of the command is terminated. If the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power failure is resolved is calculated and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent access to the RAM. After the above process is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed. Note that, in consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, the power failure signal is checked to see if it is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not being output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power failure signal continues to be output, the infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main process.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are carried out.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that are the reel drive motors for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 (see FIG. 15), and to monitor whether the read results are normal or not. In step S108, a timer update process is performed to subtract and add the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as a lottery result command, to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60 to 62, 68 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing that performs the main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 18.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, a pre-start process is performed to enable play. In the pre-start process, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have finished initializing. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has finished, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data (e.g., random number values used in the previous game) stored in the RAM 106 are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any replay winning was achieved in the previous game. If any replay winning was achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, for example, if a replay winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, a process to automatically insert 3 virtual medals is performed, and if a replay winning is achieved in a 2-bet game, a process to automatically insert 2 virtual medals is performed.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay winning was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If no replay winning was achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether there is an abnormality in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switch 56, 57 has been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, and if either has been performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Also, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switch 56, 57 has been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends as is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the bonus state (BB state) is set to "3", and the specified numbers in the game states other than the bonus state are set to "2" and "3". In other words, in the bonus state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "3", and in the game states other than the bonus state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "2" or "3". In other words, in the game states other than the bonus state, if no medals have been bet, or if the number of medals is bet but is "1", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals bet has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets that was determined to be positive in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which serves as a sub-control device, in step S206. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that receives the bet command executes processing for notifications based on betting operations (for example, notifications that a game start condition has been met, or notifications of lottery results from a previous game), and controls the speaker 64 and auxiliary display unit 65.

After executing the process of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, it means that a start command has been issued to start the game, since the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals have been bet. In such a case, in step S208, a valid line setting process is performed to set the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the valid line. In other words, only the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process in step S210, the reel control process in step S211, and the medal payout process in step S212 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers between 0 and 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, the game states are broadly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, the specified number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, so the lottery table for the normal game state is set to a lottery table for a 3-bet game and a lottery table for a 2-bet game.

That is, in step S302, a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the game state is selected. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and any bonus state flag is not set, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and a lottery table for the normal game state is selected. If the current game is a 3-bet game, a lottery table for the normal game state for 3-bet games (FIG. 20) is selected, and if the current game is a 2-bet game, a lottery table for the normal game state for 2-bet games (FIG. 21) is selected. In addition, in this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probability from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it ON and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the internal processing. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", a lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", a lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here we provide additional information about the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is started after the initialization process of the RAM 106 when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated as a predetermined operation, and for example, the setting value is updated so that "setting 1" → "setting 2" → "setting 3" → "setting 4" → "setting 5" → "setting 6" → "setting 1" each time the start lever 41 is operated once. Note that each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 with the setting key detection sensor 73a turned OFF is regarded as a setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 is also terminated. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table selection process is performed based on the stored setting value.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. FIG. 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and has a point value PV set.

After the lottery table is selected, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when judging whether the hand is a hit or a miss. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set the new judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, a win/loss judgment is made for the combination corresponding to the index value IV. In the win/loss judgment for the combination, it is judged whether the judgment value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process is executed to set the win flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV judged as positive in step S305 in the win flag storage area 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh small win flag and the eighth small win flag are set in step S306. Also, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB win flag is set in step S306, and if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, the second BB win flag is set in step S306.

Incidentally, if the winning flag that has been set is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (second BB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag was set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on the condition that the corresponding winning has been achieved. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

In addition, in step S306 when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if a combination other than the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. Also, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, for example, the 1st small win flag, the 9th small win flag, the 10th small win flag, and the 13th small win flag are set.

It is also possible to prepare a separate lottery table for when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, and perform lottery processing using the separately prepared lottery table when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over. In this case, it is preferable to set each index value IV and point value PV in the separately prepared lottery table so that the first BB and the second BB are not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In this case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether or not there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the hand continues. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the hand is judged to be a win/loss based on the judgment value DV.

Incidentally, when using the lottery table shown in Figure 20 to determine whether a winning combination is a success or failure, that is, when playing a 3-bet game in normal game mode, the probability of winning normal lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is approximately 1 in 27.3 with setting 1, approximately 1 in 27.5 with setting 3, and approximately 1 in 28.3 with setting 6, and the higher the setting value, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both approximately 1 in 26.2 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning chance eye A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1 in 164 regardless of the setting value, the probability of winning chance eye B (probability of winning when IV=5) is about 1 in 262 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning chance eye C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 1 in 16,400 regardless of the setting value, and it is set so that chance eye B is easier to win than chance eye C, and chance eye A is easier to win than chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1 in 107 with setting 1, about 1 in 104 with setting 3, and about 1 in 93.6 with setting 6, and it is set so that it becomes easier to win as the setting value increases. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV=8) is approximately 1 in 215 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV=9) is approximately 1 in 13,100 regardless of the set value, so it is set so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is approximately 1 in 504 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle forward push bell 1, middle forward push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse pinch bell 2, reverse push bell 1, reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is about 1 in 18.4 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the push order bell is about 1 in 1.56 in total. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1 in 107 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning the first BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1 in 6.22 regardless of the setting value, which is set higher than the winning probability of other roles (replay and small roles, IV = 1 to 24). In a 3-bet game, it is set so that duplicate 1-coin roles (IV=24) and 2nd BB (IV=26) cannot be won (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0).

In addition, when playing a 3-bet game in normal game mode, a special role (IV = 27) is set that allows any of the 1st to 6th minor roles and the 33rd minor role to be won. The probability of winning a special role (probability of winning when IV = 27) is approximately 1 in 20 regardless of the setting value. Special roles will be explained in detail later.

In a 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any role, including 1st BB, is 0. And if you have won 1st BB, the probability of not winning any role in a 3-bet game is about 1 in 6.22 (for 1st BB) regardless of the setting value.

In contrast, when the lottery table shown in FIG. 21 is used to determine whether the winning combination is a success or failure, that is, when a 2-bet game is played in the normal game state, the probability of winning the normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 1 to 9) is the same as the probability when playing the above 3-bet game. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1 in 9.64 regardless of the setting value, and is set to be easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. The push order bell (IV = 11 to 22) is set not to be won in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the setting value, and is set to be harder to win than when playing a 3-bet game. In a 2-bet game, the system is set so that a player can win a duplicate 1-coin role (IV=24), and the probability of this is approximately 1 in 1.81 regardless of the setting value. In addition, in a 2-bet game, the system is set so that a player cannot win a 1st BB (IV=25), but can win a 2nd BB (IV=26), and the probability of this is approximately 1 in 4.95 regardless of the setting value. In a 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any role, including the 2nd BB, is also 0. And when the 2nd BB has been won, the probability of not winning any role in a 2-bet game is approximately 1 in 4.95 (for the 2nd BB), regardless of the setting value.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there are no targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning or losing role has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a specified period of time.

In the next step S310, a lottery result response process is performed. In the lottery result response process, a process is performed to determine whether or not to change the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, and a process is performed to notify the player of the push order role. The lottery result response process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command setting process is executed in step S311 to set a lottery result command. The lottery result command setting process will be explained in detail later, but the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the user of the result of the winning or losing role. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery results of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, if the push order bell 1 is won (won when IV=11) and the first small role winning flag, the ninth small role winning flag, the tenth small role winning flag, and the thirteenth small role winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the first small role, the ninth small role, the tenth small role, and the thirteenth small role winning can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, when a watermelon is won (won when IV=23) and the 7th small win flag and the 8th small win flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 7th small win and the 8th small win can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, in the stop information setting process, when a special role is won (won when IV=27) and the 1st small win flag to the 6th small win flag and the 33rd small win flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st small win to the 6th small win and the 33rd small win can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the first BB is set to be a winning combination only in a three-bet game, and the second BB is set to be a winning combination only in a two-bet game. Therefore, even if the first BB winning flag is set, if the game is started with a two-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 does not set the stop symbol information that will result in the first BB winning combination (stop symbol information that will avoid the first BB winning combination is set). Also, even if the second BB winning flag is set, if the game is started with a three-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 does not set the stop symbol information that will result in the second BB winning combination (stop symbol information that will avoid the second BB winning combination is set).

In the following step S313, if multiple stoppable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. For example, if multiple roles out of the small role, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. If a small role and a bonus are won, the priority order is set so that the small role win takes priority, and if a small role win cannot be won, a bonus win takes priority. If a replay and a bonus are won, the priority order is set so that the replay win takes priority.

For example, in a situation where the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag is set and the first BB winning has been carried over), if a watermelon is also won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the first BB winning, the seventh small win, and the eighth small win is set, the priority is set so that the seventh small win and the eighth small win are given priority over the first BB winning. Also, in a situation where the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag is set and the second BB winning has been carried over), if a normal lip A is also won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the second BB winning, the first replay, the second replay, the third replay, and the fourth replay winning is set, the priority is set so that each replay winning is given priority over the second BB winning.

Here, if a replay is won, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning replays is guaranteed to win. In other words, if a replay is won, a replay win is guaranteed and there will be no missed wins. Therefore, if the stop symbol information for replays and bonuses is set, one of the set replays will always win and a bonus win will never be achieved.

Furthermore, in the priority setting process of step S313, when a special role is won and the setting of the stop pattern information corresponding to the 1st small role win through the 6th small role win and the 33rd small role win is performed, the priority is set so that the 33rd small role win is achieved with priority when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, and the 1st small role win through the 6th small role win are achieved with priority when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode.

After executing the process of step S313, the first section display process is executed in step S314, and then the lottery process is terminated. The first section display process is a process related to the display control of the indication monitor 68 and the role ratio monitor 77, and this process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 22.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309 and the result of the lottery result response process performed in step S310. In the following step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the spin start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels started spinning in the previous game, and if not, it waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process is performed to set spin start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts spinning. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start spinning immediately. After that, it waits until each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R spins at a constant speed at a predetermined speed, and the spin start process is terminated. Additionally, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 outputs a command to that effect to the display control device 81, and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 lights up the stop lamps 42b-44b built into each stop switch 42-44, thereby informing the player that it is now possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If a stop command has been generated, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command that is sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to know which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel. The display control device 81, which has received the stop command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to perform the effect of stopping the corresponding reel, and also controls the stop lamps 42b to 44b corresponding to the currently operated stop switches 42 to 44 to be turned off.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (lower in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop modes are prepared as stop modes for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated: a stop mode in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, a reel stop process is performed in step S410 to stop the rotation of the reel. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

The second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop outcome of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a win occurs when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see Figures 20 and 21), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode that is established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is achieved. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the 17th small role win, the 18th small role win, or the 21st small role win is achieved when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, and the stop information is set so that the 3rd small role win is achieved when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding win may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The arrangement of symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, when symbols of the same kind are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R with an interval of four symbols or less, when a winning symbol is formed, the winning symbol can be stopped on an active line regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that a section is formed with five symbols or more apart, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 while aiming at the symbol in order to stop it on an active line.

As an example, we will explain a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped to achieve the 17th small prize, the 18th small prize, or the 21st small prize.

The 17th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. The 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the left reel 32L, the 17th minor winning symbol, the 18th minor winning symbol, and the 21st minor winning symbol are arranged so that the distance between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, regardless of the operation timing, any one of the 17th minor winning symbol, the 18th minor winning symbol, and the 21st minor winning symbol will stop on the active line (middle row). In this slot machine 10, when multiple target symbols are operated at a timing when they can be stopped, the stop control is performed so that the symbol with the fewer slip frames is stopped on the active line. That is, for example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the bottom row, it is possible for the fourth "red shell" symbol (2-frame slip) which is the 18th minor win symbol and the fifth "replay" symbol (3-frame slip) which is the 21st minor win symbol to stop in the middle row, but the left reel 32L is controlled to stop the fourth "red shell" symbol, which has the fewest slip frames, in the middle row. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th minor win to be established, the 17th and 21st minor wins will not be established.

When the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The 18th minor symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbols are arranged so that the distance between each "replay" symbol is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the timing of the operation of the middle stop switch 43, stopping control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops on the top row of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. These symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between the "white shell" and "young man" symbols is 5 symbols or more. In other words, depending on the timing of the operation of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol, can be stopped on the top row, and cases where it cannot be stopped on the top row. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it is possible to stop it on the top row, the 18th minor winning symbol is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it is not possible to stop it on the top row, it will be a so-called miss.

Here, when the "red shell" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops in the top of the middle reel 32M, it can mean that middle push bell 1 is won, resulting in the 18th small win, as described above, or that middle push bell 2 is won, resulting in the 20th small win. In other words, the 20th small win symbol in middle push bell 2 is the same as the 18th small win symbol on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M. And on the right reel 32R, the 18th small win symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, while the 20th small win symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol, which are different. In particular, the 18th and 20th minor winning symbols on the right reel 32R are arranged so that if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on a valid line, the 20th minor winning symbol cannot be stopped on a valid line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 20th minor winning symbol can be stopped on a valid line, the 18th minor winning symbol cannot be stopped on a valid line. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle push bell 1 or the middle push bell 2 has been won, even if the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped in a stopping state that may result in the 18th and 20th minor winning symbols, it is not possible to aim for them and win.

Next, we will explain an example in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the third small prize.

On the middle reel 32M, the "replay" symbol, which is the third minor symbol, is arranged so that the distance between each "replay" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol stops on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbols, which are the third minor symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each "bell" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the third minor prize symbols, the "watermelon" and "red shell" symbols, are arranged so that the distance between these symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, if the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" or "red shell" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the third minor prize will be won regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth small prize will be won regardless of the operation timing, and if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a different operation sequence, depending on the operation timing, another small prize will be won, or none of the small prizes will be won and the winner will miss out. Incidentally, when the common bell is won, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth small prize will be won regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing.

Next, we will explain an example in which a special role is won and the left stop switch 42 of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the first small role win, the second small role win, or the 33rd small role win, as shown in FIG. 24.

The first and second small win symbols on the left reel 32L are "replay" symbols. The 33rd small win symbol on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" symbol. In this case, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol to the 9th "BAR" symbol reach the middle row, the drive control is performed to stop the 33rd small win symbol "BAR" in the middle row instead of the 1st and 2nd small win symbols "replay". The 33rd small win symbol on the middle reel 32M and the 33rd small win symbol "bell" on the right reel 32R will stop at the pay line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43-44, and the 33rd small win will be established.

On the other hand, even if a special role is won and the left stop switch 42 of the stop switches 42-44 is operated first, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "Replay" symbol (0) to the "Red Shell" symbol (4) or the "Replay" symbol (10) to the "White Shell" symbol (19) reach the middle row, the drive control is performed to stop the first and second small role symbols, "Replay" symbols, in the middle row. The first small role symbol on the middle reel 32M and the first small role symbol on the right reel 32R, "Replay", stop at the pay line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43-44, and the second small role symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "Bell" symbol, the second small role symbol on the right reel 32R, stop at the pay line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43-44, so that the first or second small role win is established.

In addition, if a special role is won and any of the stop switches 42 to 44 other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the third to sixth small role wins will be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In other words, if a special combination is won, if the left stop switch 42 is operated in the first operation mode when the number 5 "REPLAY" symbol through the number 9 "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reach the middle row, the 33rd small combination win is achieved and one medal is paid out, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode, which is different from the first operation mode, the 1st to 6th small combination wins are achieved and eight medals are paid out.

As described above, the first to sixth small wins are also won when any of the push order bells are won and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the corresponding operation sequence. In this way, if a special win is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, it is possible to clearly understand that this was a game in which the special win was won. On the other hand, if the special win is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode, the player cannot determine from the stop results or payout amount whether the first to sixth small wins were won as a result of the special win, or whether the win was won because the operation sequence at the time the push order bell was won corresponded to the first to sixth small wins.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the winning combination is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on an active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning combination is established on the active line. If a winning combination is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout number corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an error occurrence process is performed to notify the user of the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, in step S414, bonus state processing is performed. The bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After the bonus state processing is performed, in step S415, winning result response processing is performed. The winning result response processing includes processing to transition the game state based on the winning result. The winning result response processing will be described in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, the second section display processing is executed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to the display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 knows the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S212.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, it means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small winning combination was achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether any of the 1st replay winning combination to the 12th replay winning combination was achieved based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the replay winning combinations was achieved, the medal payout process is terminated as is, and if any of the replay winning combinations was achieved, a replay setting process is performed to change the play mode to the replay mode, and the medal payout process is terminated. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, if it is determined that the current play mode is the replay mode, an automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the payout number is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the credit counter count value has not reached the upper limit (the number of medals stored is 50), the payout number is added to the credit counter count value, and the added value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. When the credit counter count value has reached the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven, and medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 to the medal receiving tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. Note that the medal payout process also performs a process of changing the payout number displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. When the current game state is BB state, the payout number is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter described later, and the remaining payout number displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 25.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the current game state is a bonus state, i.e., whether the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state can be determined by the presence or absence of a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag that are set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 when transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the current state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and whether either of the BBs has been won. If neither of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing ends. If either of the BB winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process is performed in which 3 is input to the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The MAX bet counter is used to set a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation in which 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, 3 virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of medals for the game, in a situation in which the specified number of medals for the game is set to 2 or 3, it is permitted to play a 2-bet game by operating the second credit insertion switch 57. Note that if 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the MAX bet counter is input with 2 and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether a first BB win or a second BB win has occurred. If neither of the BB wins has occurred, the bonus state processing ends. If either of the BB wins has occurred, the process proceeds to step S505, where it is determined whether a first BB win has occurred.

If the first BB win has been achieved, in step S506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for determining the upper limit payout number in each BB state. That is, by inputting "15" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB win flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, a positive judgment will be made in step S501 from the next game onwards. In the following step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for making the display control device 81 know that the first BB state is starting, and the display control device 81 that receives the first BB start command controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that a first BB start effect corresponding to the start of the first BB state is performed. In addition, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can know that the first BB state will start from the next game, and controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that an effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game.

After the first BB start command is set to output in step S509, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process is terminated. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of coins for the above-mentioned game. In other words, by transitioning to the first BB state, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3 coins, and the first BB state is carried out in a 3-bet game.

The initial values of the specified number of bets are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

In step S505, it is determined that the first BB winning has not been achieved when the second BB winning has been achieved. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511, and a process of inputting "15" to the BB counter is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, a process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, a process of setting the second BB state flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the second BB state is starting. In the display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that a second BB start performance corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that a performance for the second BB state is performed. The first BB start effect and the second BB start effect differ in appearance and content to a degree that is recognizable to the player. The first BB state effect and the second BB state effect also differ in appearance and content to a degree that is recognizable to the player.

After the second BB start command is set to output in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process is terminated. In other words, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

If the result of the positive judgment in step S501 is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515, and processing during the first BB state or the second BB state is performed. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for the BB state. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, but separate lottery tables may be provided for each state, and the types of roles that can be won and the winning probability of each role may be different. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that normal lip A, common bell, and overlapping 1-piece role can be won. The probability of winning normal lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 in 61.2, the probability of winning common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1 in 5.96, and the probability of winning overlapping 1-piece role (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1 in 1.31. Additionally, in the first BB state or the second BB state, the probability of a losing result in which no winning combination is achieved is approximately 1 in 10.14. In this case, an increase of approximately 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase in medals plus or minus approximately 0.00 medals), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, although an increase in medals cannot be expected in the first BB state or the second BB state, it is possible to progress through the game without losing medals.

Here, in the normal game state in a 3-bet game and the first BB state to which a 3-bet game can be entered, the main increase in medals is caused by the first to sixth minor winnings, which all result in a payout of 13 medals, and these winnings are the push order bell in the normal game state and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor winnings, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a fixed order in the normal game state, the winning probability is about 1 in 9.36, whereas in the first BB state the winning probability is about 1 in 5.96, and in a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set to be more likely to result in a winning than the normal game state. Also, in the normal game state in a two-bet game and in the second BB state to which a two-bet game can be entered, the main medal increase is the common bell, and while in the normal game state there is a probability of about 1 in 9.64 to win, in the second BB state there is a probability of about 1 in 5.96 to win, so even in a two-bet game, it is set up so that it is easier to win in the second BB state than in the normal game state.

However, as mentioned above, you cannot expect an increase in the number of medals you have even if you complete the first or second BB state.

In the bonus state processing, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any small winning combination has been achieved in the current game as a result of the lottery processing using the BB state lottery table described above and the control of each reel. If no winning combination has been achieved, the bonus state processing ends as is. If a winning combination has been achieved, in step S516, the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination is subtracted from the BB counter in the various counter area 106e described above. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won and the first to sixth small winning combinations are achieved, a payout of 13 coins will be generated, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that the number is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number is 0 or less, in step S518, a process is performed to clear the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, a process is executed to input 2 to the MAX bet counter, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to be ended this time is set as an output target to the display control device 81. More specifically, if the first BB state is to be ended, the first BB end command is set as an output target, and if the second BB state is to be ended, the second BB end command is set as an output target. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that a performance for the first BB end or a performance for the second BB end is performed.

After that, in step S521, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and the bonus state process is terminated. In this case, in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state or the second BB state, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. In contrast, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is played. In other words, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the setting is made such that a 2-bet game is easily played. Incidentally, after the end of the first BB state or the second BB state, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 medals by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57, and it is necessary to insert 3 medals from the medal insertion slot 45 in order to play a 3-bet game.

Here, we will briefly explain the gameplay of this slot machine 10 using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game with reference to Figure 27.

The normal game state in which the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set and no BB has been won is known as a non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the specified bet number (specified number of coins for a game) is set to 2 and 3 coins, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the game is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, it becomes a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, in a 3-bet game, the first BB can be won but the second BB cannot be won, and in a 2-bet game, the second BB can be won but the first BB cannot be won. In a game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, the second BB can basically be won in a 2-bet game.

If the first BB or second BB is won but no prize is awarded in that winning game, the internal state is one in which the first BB or second BB win is carried over (carry-over state). As described above, even in this internal state, the specified bet number (specified number of coins per game) is set to 2 or 3 coins, and a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game is possible. However, if 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start playing, the game will be a 3-bet game.

As already explained, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state where the 1st BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the 1st BB winning can be achieved in the 3-bet game, but the 1st BB winning cannot be achieved in the 2-bet game. Also, in the internal state where the 2nd BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the 2nd BB winning cannot be achieved in the 3-bet game, but the 2nd BB winning can be achieved in the 2-bet game. In other words, when the 1st BB is won in the 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued, the 1st BB winning can be achieved, but if the 2-bet game is switched to after the 1st BB is won, the 1st BB winning cannot be achieved. Also, if the second BB is won in a two-bet game, the second BB can be won by continuing the two-bet game, but if the second BB is won and then the three-bet game is switched to, the second BB cannot be won. The first BB and the second BB cannot be won twice, and the first BB cannot be won again when the first BB win is carried over, and the second BB cannot be won twice. The second BB cannot be won again when the second BB win is carried over, and the first BB cannot be won twice. In other words, if the first BB is won and a two-bet game is played, the game will continue in an internal state in which the first BB win is carried over, and if the second BB is won and a three-bet game is played, the game will continue in an internal state in which the second BB win is carried over.

Here, since the first BB winning is only possible in a three-bet game and the second BB winning is only possible in a two-bet game, the second BB winning will not be achieved even if the three-bet game ends in a loss in which neither winning combination is won while the second BB winning is carried over, and the first BB winning will not be achieved even if the two-bet game ends in a loss while the first BB winning is carried over. This makes it possible to dramatically simplify the combination of combinations and the control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the internal state where the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over. For example, if a 3-bet game is configured so that a 2nd BB win can be achieved, or a 2-bet game is configured so that a 1st BB win can be achieved, if you want to continue the internal state in which the 1st BB win or 2nd BB win is carried over, you will need to have a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in the case of a combination that may result in a miss, you will need to have a different combination win when that miss occurs.

In the first BB state and the second BB state, the main role for medal increase is the common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role for medal increase in the two-bet game is the common bell, whereas the main role for medal increase in the three-bet game is the push order bell. For the common bell, any of the first to sixth small roles will be won regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, whereas for the push order bell, the winning small role differs depending on the operation sequence and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44. In other words, the fluctuation in medal increase or decrease due to the operation sequence and operation timing (mainly the operation sequence) when the push order bell is won is greater in the non-internal state and the internal state in the three-bet game than in the first BB state and the second BB state. For example, by announcing the operation sequence (Figure 23) resulting in the first to sixth small wins when the push order bell is won, it is possible to switch between an AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists in winning and a non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) that does not, creating a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on whether or not the announcement (assist) is made.

The basic flow of the game when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated is that first, in a non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2nd BB is won in that 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, the game switches to an internal state, and the game proceeds in a state in which the 2nd BB winning cannot be realized. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning has been carried over, the 1st BB is not won, and the 2nd BB is not won, and the game continues in an internal state in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over.

The following will assume that the game is played with the second BB win carried over, and will explain the gameplay that utilizes notifications (push order notifications) when the push order bell is won during that game (also referred to as normal game in the following explanation).

<Lottery result processing>
First, the lottery result response process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 28. The lottery result response process is a process performed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process for performing a lottery for transition to an AT mode in which a push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process is executed to ascertain the number of bets for the game to be started this time. That is, in step S601, it is ascertained whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. If it is not in the BB state, in step S602 it is determined whether the number of bets is 3. Also, if it is in the BB state, in step S603 it is determined whether the number of bets is 2. As already explained, in the non-internal state before the first BB or second BB is won, and in the internal state after the first BB or second BB is won, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and in the first BB state or the second BB state, the specified number of bets is set to 3. The processing in steps S602 and S603 is to determine whether the number of bets for the current game is a specific specified number (specific set number) that is specified (set) in association with the game state, and if the specific specified number is not present, the lottery result response processing ends without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) from step S604 onwards.

That is, in the non-internal state and internal state, processing for the display mode is executed in a 3-bet game, but processing for the display mode is not executed in a 2-bet game. Also, in the first BB state and second BB state, the specified number of bets is set to 3, so a 2-bet game is not executed, and processing for the display mode is not executed in the first BB state and second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a two-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing this, the internal state is set to a three-bet game, making it easier to play regular games that carry over the second BB.

If a positive judgment is made in step S602 or step S603, in step S604, it is judged whether or not an advantageous zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this slot machine 10, regarding the occurrence or non-occurrence of push order notifications, advantageous zones in which push order notifications, etc. may occur, and normal zones in which they may not occur are set. The advantageous zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the current game is in an advantageous zone, and is set when a transition to an advantageous zone occurs, and is cleared when a transition to a normal zone occurs.

If the advantageous zone flag is not set, this means that the current game is in the normal zone, in which case the advantageous zone transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result response process is terminated.

In the advantageous zone transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous zone transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the advantageous zone transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition rate to the advantageous zone (the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 30, the trigger roles for the transition lottery to the advantageous zone are set as normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, watermelon, and special role. In other words, in normal play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all possible results are set as trigger roles for the transition lottery to the advantageous zone.

After obtaining the lottery table in step S702, a process of obtaining a random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. The random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is generated using a dedicated counter in the various counter areas 106e, which is updated at a predetermined interval, and the latest updated value of the counter is obtained in step S703. Then, in step S704, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery has a 100% probability regardless of the trigger role. In this case, if it is determined that the game result grasped in step S701 is a trigger role for the transition lottery (not a losing result), it is also possible to omit the processes in steps S702 to S705.

If it is determined in step S705 that the player has won the transition lottery, then in step S706, a process is executed to set a favorable zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The favorable zone winning game flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the current game is a game in which the player has won the transition lottery to the favorable zone. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 has been executed, the favorable zone transition lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous zone flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that it is in AT mode, and is set when it is possible to transition to the AT mode. In addition, the AT mode winning flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the transition to the AT mode has been confirmed, and the situation is before the transition to the AT mode. If neither flag is set in step S606, a process for the start time AT lottery is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if either flag is set in step S606, a continuation determination process is executed in step S608, and an AT addition process is executed in step S609.

<AT lottery processing at start>
First, the start time AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S801, it is determined whether the ceiling counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 0. The ceiling counter is a counter that causes a transition to the AT mode regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is won (without winning) when the number of games after transition to the advantageous zone reaches the ceiling game number, and is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining up to the ceiling game number. The ceiling game number is set when transitioning to the advantageous zone. Incidentally, the ceiling counter is decremented when the game ends. In other words, when it is determined in step S801 that the ceiling counter is 0, it means that the ceiling game number became 0 in the previous game.

If the ceiling counter is not 0, processing for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S802 to S807.

That is, in step S802, a process is executed to obtain a random number for the AT mode transition lottery. A dedicated counter in the various counter area 106e is used for the random number for the AT mode transition lottery, and the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and in step S802, the latest updated value of the counter is obtained. In the following step S803, a process is executed to grasp the lottery result of the current game. Then, in step S804, it is determined whether or not a CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, normal mode and CZ mode, which is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than normal mode, are set as display modes with different winning probabilities in the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU to grasp that it is CZ mode.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S804, a process is executed in step S805 to obtain a lottery table for transition to normal AT mode at the start from the various table storage area 105a. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set in step S804, a process is executed in step S806 to obtain a lottery table for transition to CZ AT mode at the start.

As shown in FIG. 30, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery for normal use at the start and the AT mode transition lottery for CZ at the start are set according to the lottery results of the game. For example, in the case of an AT mode transition lottery triggered by chance eye A, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is 1% for normal use, and 3% for CZ use. In this way, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at the start is set to make it easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use at the start. Also, for normal lip A, normal lip B, and normal lip C, they are set so that they do not win the AT mode transition lottery for normal use, but can win the AT mode transition lottery for CZ use.

Incidentally, the start-time normal AT mode transition lottery table and start-time CZ AT mode transition lottery table used in this start-time AT lottery process are set up so that if the game lottery result is a special role, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won. Note that in the start-time AT lottery process, the AT mode transition lottery may not be held in response to a special role.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is acquired in step S805 or step S806, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in step S807 using the acquired transition lottery table, the lottery result of the game grasped in step S803, and the random number for AT lottery acquired in step S802. Specifically, it is determined whether the random number for AT lottery acquired in step S802 is within the winning numerical range set according to the lottery result of each game in the table acquired in step S805 or step S806, and if the random number for AT lottery is within the winning numerical range, it is determined that the AT mode transition has been won, and if the random number for AT lottery is outside the winning numerical range, it is determined that the AT mode transition has not been won. Then, in step S808, it is determined whether the AT mode transition has been won.

If it is determined in step S808 that the AT mode transition has been selected, or if it is determined in step S802 that the ceiling counter is 0, the process for the AT mode win is executed in steps S809 to S812. Also, if it is determined in step S808 that the AT mode transition has not been selected, the process for the AT mode non-win is executed in steps S813 to S816.

In the process for winning the AT mode, in step S809, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set, and whether the AT mode transition win during CZ mode is confirmed. If the win occurs during CZ mode, processing is performed in steps S810 and S811 to end the CZ mode. That is, in step S810, processing is performed to clear the CZ mode flag. Then, in step S811, processing is performed to clear the CZ game counter provided in the various counter area 106e to 0. The CZ game counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in the CZ mode, and when transitioning to the CZ mode, a value (10) equivalent to the number of continued games in the CZ mode (10 games) is input, and the counter is decremented by one each time a game is played.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S809, or after the process of step S811 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S812. As a result of this process, a positive judgment will be made in step S606 from the next game.

In the process for non-winning the AT mode, in step S813, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step S814, the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and whether or not to transition to the CZ mode is determined by lottery using the lottery result of the game grasped in step S803. As shown in FIG. 30, the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery differs depending on the lottery result of the game. More specifically, the lottery result of the game that is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery is set so that the CZ mode transition lottery is easier to win. In other words, even if the lottery result of the game that is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery was a game that is easier to win, if the AT mode transition lottery was not won, it is set so that it is easier to transition to the CZ mode.

After executing the CZ mode transition lottery process in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the CZ mode transition was selected, and if the transition was not selected, the AT lottery process ends. If the CZ mode transition was selected, in step S816, a process is executed to set a CZ mode win flag in the various flag storage area 106d.

After setting either the winning flag in step S812 or step S816, a premonition mode setting process is performed in steps S817 to S820. The premonition mode is a mode that performs a premonition effect suggesting that the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. In this embodiment, if the player wins these transition lotteries, the premonition mode of 0 to 40 games is played before the player is notified of the transition lottery that has been won.

In step S817, a lottery process for the premonition games is executed. In the lottery process for the number of premonition games, the number of premonition games is selected based on the type of transition lottery that has been won, the lottery result of the game that triggered the win, etc. For example, if the AT mode transition lottery has been won, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected than if the CZ mode transition lottery has been won, and if the transition lottery is won with Cherry A, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected than if the transition lottery is won with Cherry C.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during CZ mode, the number of premonition games is set to 0 in step S817. As described above, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during CZ mode, the CZ mode ends regardless of the number of games remaining in CZ mode, so the player can know that he or she has won the AT mode transition lottery through the end of the CZ mode. Therefore, by setting the premonition mode to 0 games when the AT mode transition lottery is won during CZ mode, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort caused by the suggestion that the transition lottery has been won being made in the premonition mode, even though the player is aware that the AT mode transition lottery has been won.

In the next step S818, the result of the lottery in step S817 is input to the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The premonition counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining premonition games, and is decremented by one each time a game in the premonition mode is completed.

Then, in step S819, a process is executed to set a premonition flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and in step S820, a process is executed to set the premonition command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. The premonition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the premonition mode is in progress, and the premonition command is a command that allows the display control device 81 to know that the premonition mode has been set, the number of games in the premonition mode, and which transition lottery has been won. Having received the premonition command, the display control device 81 knows the number of games in the premonition mode and the type of transition lottery that has been won, and performs processing to execute the effects during the premonition mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

<Continuation Determination Process>
Next, the continuation determination process executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 32. As already described, the continuation determination process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set.

Here, in the AT mode of this embodiment, a predetermined number of games (e.g. 18) constitutes one set (unit continuation number, unit state), and for example, when updating one set of AT mode (when starting or ending a set), a continuation lottery for the next set is held, and if the continuation lottery is won, the game moves to the next set after the end of that set, and if the continuation lottery is not won, the AT mode ends without moving to the next set. The continuation determination process in step S608 is a process for holding the above-mentioned continuation lottery when updating a set.

In step S901, it is determined whether the AT game counter provided in the various counter area 106e is 18. The AT game counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in one set, and is a counter into which 18 is input when the set is updated. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether the game to be started this time is the start game of one set in the AT mode. If it is not the start game, this continuation determination process is terminated as it is. If it is the start game, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether the AT set counter provided in the various counter area 106e is 0. The AT set counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of sets that can be continued to the next set even if the continuation lottery is not won or without a continuation lottery, and is a counter that is incremented by 1 when an additional win is won when the continuation lottery is not won or the game is continued to the next set without a continuation lottery being held, and is decremented by 1 when the continuation lottery is not won or the game is continued to the next set without a continuation lottery being held. If the AT set counter is 0, in step S903, the probability of winning the continuation lottery selected in the current AT mode is grasped.

In this embodiment, multiple continuation rates are set as the probability of winning the continuation lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "continuation rate"). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, the highest continuation rate of 90% is set, and lower continuation rates of 60% and 10% are set. The continuation rate is set when transitioning to the AT mode (continuation rate setting process in step S1211 described below). In step S903, the information set in the continuation rate setting process is read out, and the continuation rate of the current AT mode is determined.

After the continuation rate is determined in step S903, a continuation lottery process is executed in step S904. That is, if a continuation rate of 90% is selected, the process of step S904 results in a 90% probability of winning the continuation, and if a continuation rate of 10% is selected, the process of step S904 results in a 10% probability of winning the continuation.

In step S905, it is determined whether the processing result of step S904 was a continuation win, and if so, in step S906, a process is executed to set a continuation flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The continuation flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the continuation condition for the current set (the condition for moving to the next set) is met. Then, in step S907, a process is executed to set a continuation command as an output target to the display control device 81, and the continuation determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S902 that the AT set counter is not 0, the AT set counter is decremented by 1 in step S908, and then the process proceeds to step S906, where the continuation flag and the continuation command are set, and the continuation determination process ends. That is, in this embodiment, if the AT set counter is not 0, the continuation condition for the set is met without going through a continuation lottery. Note that a continuation lottery may be executed regardless of the value of the AT set counter, and if the continuation is not won, the continuation condition may be met if the AT set counter is 1 or greater.

As described above, in this embodiment, at the start of one set of AT mode (when the start lever 41 is operated), a continuation condition is determined to determine whether or not the AT mode will continue until the set following the currently started set, and if it is determined that the continuation condition is met, a continuation flag is set and the information is output to the display control device 81. In this case, the display control device 81 performs processing to perform a presentation for the current set that is premised on the continuation condition being met.

In contrast, if it is determined in step S905 that a continuation win has not occurred, the continuation determination process ends. In this case, the continuation condition is not met at the start of one set in AT mode, and no continuation command is output at the start of the set. The display control device 81 determines that the continuation condition is not met by not receiving a continuation command at the start of the set, and performs processing to perform a presentation for the current set that is based on the assumption that the continuation condition is not met.

<AT top-up processing>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S609 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 33. In the AT addition process, a lottery for adding an additional number of sets of the AT mode is performed separately from the continuation lottery described above, and if the additional lottery is won, the game continues until the next set regardless of the result of the continuation lottery for the next set.

First, in step S1001, a process is executed to obtain a random number for the add-on lottery. A dedicated counter in the various counter area 106e is used for the random number for the add-on lottery, and this dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined interval. In step S1001, the most recently updated value of the counter is obtained. In the following step S1002, the lottery result of this game is ascertained. Then, in step S1003, a process is executed to obtain an add-on lottery table from the various table storage area 105a.

As shown in FIG. 30, the add-on lottery table is set with an add-on winning rate according to the lottery result of the game, and is set so that an add-on winning rate is not achieved with normal roles such as normal lip A to normal lip C and push order bell, which are easy to win in the lottery process of each game, while an add-on winning rate is achieved with specific roles such as chance eye A to chance eye C, cherry A to cherry C, common bell, and watermelon, which are difficult to win in the lottery process of each game. And, among the specific roles, for example, chance eye C is easier to win an add-on winning rate than chance eye A, and cherry C is easier to win an add-on winning rate than cherry A, so that the more difficult the lottery result is to win in the lottery process of each game, the easier it is to win the add-on lottery. Note that the configuration may be such that an add-on winning rate is not achieved when the lottery result of each game is a normal role, and that an add-on lottery is not performed when the lottery result of each game is a normal role. Also, the configuration may be such that an additional win is possible even when the lottery result for each game is a normal role, and the probability of an additional win with the normal role may be lower than the probability of an additional win with a specific role.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the game lottery result is a special role, as described above, the start AT lottery process is set up so that the AT mode transition win will not be obtained, but in the AT addition process, the lottery is set up so that even if the result is a special role, the AT addition win can be obtained.

After the add-on lottery table is obtained in step S1003, the add-on lottery is executed in step S1004. Specifically, it is determined whether the random number for the add-on lottery obtained in step S1001 is within the winning numerical range set in the table obtained in step S1003 according to the lottery results of each game, and if the random number for the add-on lottery is within the winning numerical range, it is determined that the add-on lottery has been won, and if the random number for the add-on lottery is outside the winning numerical range, it is determined that the add-on lottery has not been won. After the add-on lottery is performed in step S1004, it is determined in step S1005 whether the add-on lottery has been won. If the add-on lottery has not been won, the AT add-on processing is terminated as it is. If the add-on lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1006 whether the continuation flag is set.

If the continuation flag is not set in step S1006, processing is executed to set the continuation flag in step S1007. Then, processing is executed to set the continuation command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1008, and then this AT addition processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the continuation command executes processing to perform a performance corresponding to the continuation condition being met on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

In contrast, if the continuation flag is set in step S1006, a process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed in step S1009. By adding 1 to the AT set counter in step S1009, it is determined that the AT mode will continue at least until the set after the current set. Note that in this embodiment, the AT set counter is configured to add 1 uniformly when the additional lottery is won, but it may also be configured to add a number of 2 or more. For example, the number to be added to the AT set counter may be determined by lottery depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the additional win.

In the next step S1010, a process is executed to set the set addition command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this addition process is terminated. The set addition command is a command for making the display control device 81 aware of the fact that the addition lottery has been won and the value of the AT set counter. In a configuration in which multiple sets may be added with a single addition win, it is preferable to configure the set addition command to set information on the number of sets to be added. Having received the set addition command, the display control device 81 executes a process to perform a performance corresponding to the set addition on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

In the lottery result response process (FIG. 28), after the process of step S607 or step S609 is executed, the process for notifying the pressing order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in steps S610 to S619.

＜Outline of push order notification＞
Prior to describing the process for pressing order notification executed in steps S610 to S619, an overview of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, pressing order navigation, sequence notification, or mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control unit 101, and the pressing order notification is performed by the main control unit 101. In contrast, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control unit 81, and the pressing order notification effect is performed by the display control unit 81.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 34(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode and the display content of the instruction monitor 68.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the indication monitor 68 has eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of each of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to display a specific symbol (including letters and numbers) individually. Note that each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, so the same color is displayed on each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each of the display segments N1 to N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and these first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "0" to "6" and "9". The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right part of the area in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can at least display "0" to "6" and "9", "0." to "6." and "9.", and ".".

In addition, as long as the indication monitor 68 can display multiple patterns of symbols individually, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1 to N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight segments, or nine segments, etc., may be used. In addition, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of a light source, and as long as the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8, the segment display may be configured with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying a segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as liquid crystal display devices, organic EL display devices, CRTs, and dot matrices.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation order of a push order role in which the winning result differs depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, among the operation mode roles in which the winning result differs depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44, and to notify the type of operation mode role.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 34(b), the displays "1" to "6" correspond to the notification of the operation sequence of the push order role, and for example, when the operation sequence of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is "left" → "middle" → "right" to result in a winning mode advantageous to the player, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit to display "1". Also, when the operation sequence of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is "right" → "left" → "middle" to result in a winning mode advantageous to the player, the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit to display "5". In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed on each display segment N1 to N7 correspond one-to-one to the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop based on the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), "0" and "9" correspond to notifications of the types of operation mode roles, and when the push order role in the operation mode role is the push order bell, the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, and the fourth display segment N4 to the seventh display segment N7 are lit up to display "0". In this case, the player can know that he has won the push order bell from the display mode of the instruction monitor 68, but even with the push order bell, the advantageous operation mode is not clearly indicated as in the case of FIG. 34(b) above, so the advantageous operation mode cannot be known from the display mode of the instruction monitor 68.

In addition, if the special role is selected in the operation mode role, the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3 and the fifth display segment N5 to the seventh display segment N7 are lit up to display "9". As already explained, if the special role is selected, the 33rd small role is won when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, and the first to sixth small roles are won when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode, and these first and second operation modes are predetermined operation modes. In other words, when the indication monitor 68 notifies the player of the special role as described above, the first to sixth small roles, which have a large number of payouts, can be won by operating in the second operation mode.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game in which a predetermined start condition is met, including a notification condition that transitions to a favorable zone and creates a situation in which a push order notification may occur. It is also turned off when the AT mode ends and there is a transition from the favorable zone to the normal zone.

In other words, an advantageous zone (specific game state, specific mode) is a zone in which the operation order of the push order bell and the like is more easily notified, making it easier for the player to win in an advantageous manner, and the eighth display segment N8 serves as a zone indicator (specific notification means) that lights up during specific zones in which the player can actually benefit from the push order notification, and turns off during normal zones that are not advantageous zones, and during non-specific zones that are not specific zones even if they are advantageous zones.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is disposed near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is disposed above the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. operated by the player, in other words, it is not disposed on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. are provided. Therefore, the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand etc. operating the stop switches 42 to 44 etc., and it can be said that it is disposed in a position where it is easily visible to the player. In addition, since it is disposed near the payout number display unit 62 where the player who is playing the game aiming to win medals can easily focus on it, it can be said that the player is prevented from overlooking it.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED is set so that the eighth display segment N8 in the instruction monitor 68 is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display parts (e.g., the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display parts are both controlled to emit light (when they are in a lit state), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display parts (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being overlooked when it is in a lit state.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described using as an example a case where the push order role is won when the operation order to be notified this time is center → right → left.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 in the figure) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning role (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning role in the current game and that the stop switch that should be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 35(b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 35(c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the timing of the push order notification, it is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts, through the acceleration period, until the reels reach constant speed rotation. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, it is possible for the player to recognize the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then operate the stop switches 42 to 44 as desired, allowing the game to proceed at a good tempo.

The process for notifying the push order in steps S610 to S619 will be explained.

That is, in step S610, it is determined whether the lottery result of this game is a push order bell win. If the push order bell win is a win, in step S611, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, in step S612, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that push order notifications corresponding to the first small role win to the sixth small role win are performed according to the type of push order bell this time. Then, in step S613, a process is executed to set the push order notification commands set to include information on the operation order corresponding to the first small role win to the sixth small role win as the output target to the display control device 81, and then this push order notification process is terminated. That is, in step S613, a process is executed to set one of the push order notification commands for the first small role win to the sixth small role win. The display control device 81 that receives these push order notification commands controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that push order notification performances corresponding to the first small role win to the sixth small role win are performed.

If the AT mode flag is not set in step S611, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled in step S614 to notify the group of push order bells (FIG. 34(c)). In other words, in step S614, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to notify that the operation mode role is a push order bell. Thereafter, the lottery result response process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S610 that the push order bell has not been won, it is determined in step S615 whether or not a special role has been won. If a special role has not been won, this lottery result response process is terminated. If a special role has been won, it is determined in step S616 whether or not the AT mode flag is set.

If the AT mode flag is not set in step S616, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled in step S617 to notify the player of a special role (FIG. 34(c)). In other words, in step S617, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to notify the player of a special role among the operation mode roles. After that, the lottery result response process is terminated.

If the AT mode flag is set in step S616, proceed to step S618. In step S618, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the 6th small win is performed as a predetermined operation order among the operation orders corresponding to the 1st small win to the 6th small win. Then, in step S619, a process is executed to set the push order notification command for the 6th small win, which is set to include information on the operation order corresponding to the 6th small win, as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the main push order notification process is terminated. The display control device 81, which has received this push order notification command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 so that the push order notification performance corresponding to the 1st small win to the 6th small win is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the game that wins the push order bell among the operation mode roles is in AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that enables the first small role win to the sixth small role win, and a push order notification command including information on the operation order is output to the display control device 81, and the push order notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65. On the other hand, if the game that wins the push order bell is not in AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 notifies the user that it is a push order bell, but does not notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that enables the first small role win to the sixth small role win, and the push order notification command including information on the operation order is not output to the display control device 81, so the push order notification effect is not performed by the auxiliary display unit 65.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the lottery result command setting process of step S311 in the lottery process (Figure 19), in a game in which the push order bell is won, information regarding which of the push order bell results (IV11 to 22) is won is not output to the display control device 81.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36(a), in step S1101, it is determined whether the current game is a win with index values IV = 11 to 22 and whether any of the push order bells have been won. If the push order bell has not been won, in step S1102, a process is executed to set the lottery result command corresponding to each winning result as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result command setting process ends. That is, in step S1102, for example, if the win is with index value IV = 1, a lottery result command indicating normal lip A is set, if the win is with index value IV = 8, a lottery result command indicating cherry A is set, and if the win is with index value IV = 27, a lottery result command indicating a special role is set.

In contrast, if it is determined in step S1101 that one of the push order bells has been won, a process is executed in step S1103 to set the lottery result command indicating the push order bell group as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result command setting process is terminated. The lottery result command indicating the push order bell group includes information that one of the push order bells has been won, but is set so as not to include information about which push order bell has been won, that is, for example, information that forward push bell 1 has been won (information that IV = 11 has been won) or information that middle reverse push bell 2 has been won (information that IV = 18 has been won).

That is, as shown in FIG. 36(b), in this embodiment, the information that the push order bell has been won is output to the display control device 81 as a lottery result command indicating the push order bell group, regardless of whether the AT mode is in effect or not. Then, in the AT mode, the push order notification commands for the first small prize winning to the sixth small prize winning are output together, so that the push order notification performance can be executed by the display control device 81. On the other hand, when the AT mode is not in effect, the push order notification commands for the first small prize winning to the sixth small prize winning are not output to the display control device 81, and as described above, only the lottery result command indicating the push order bell group is output, so that the display control device 81 cannot grasp the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the first small prize winning to the sixth small prize winning when the push order bell is won, even though the AT mode is not in effect. In this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally analyzing the commands output from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81 or the display control unit 81 in order to obtain the benefits of AT mode even when the AT mode is not in effect (the benefit of being able to achieve the first through sixth small wins when the push order bell is won).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a special role is won during AT mode, among the first to sixth small role wins and the 33rd small role win, the push order notification for the sixth small role win is executed on the instruction monitor 68, and a push order notification command for the sixth small role win is output. By doing this, during AT mode, it is possible to achieve the sixth small role win, among the first to sixth small role wins, which has the larger number of coins paid out, rather than the 33rd small role win, which has the smaller number of coins paid out, thereby improving the advantage of the AT mode.

Not only that, but among the first through sixth small wins that have the larger payout amount, the push order notification for the sixth small win, which is a predetermined small win (push order), is executed on the instruction monitor 68, and a push order notification command for the sixth small win is output. By doing this, it becomes unnecessary to select which of the first through sixth small wins to achieve when a special win is won, and it becomes possible to greatly simplify the process.

Furthermore, as described above, if a special role is won during the AT mode, it is subject to an additional lottery in the AT additional processing in the lottery result corresponding processing, but the winning probability of the additional lottery when the special role is won is higher than the winning probability of the additional lottery when the push order bell is won, and the additional lottery is set to be won with a 10% probability when the special role is won, while the additional lottery is not won when the push order bell is won. In this case, when a special role is won during the AT mode, the push order notification for the 6th small role is made among the push order notifications for the 1st small role to the 6th small role that are notified when the push order bell is won, and the push order notification command for the 6th small role is output among the push order notification commands for the 1st small role to the 6th small role that are output when the push order bell is won, so that it is possible to successfully mix up the special role win during the AT mode with the push order bell win, and it is possible to give the impression that the additional lottery is being held based on the push order bell win. This makes it possible to increase the attention that winning the Push Order Bell will bring, without increasing the benefits (such as the chances of winning the additional lottery) too much.

<Winning Result Processing>
Next, the winning result corresponding process performed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 37. In the winning result corresponding process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S1202 whether the number of bets is 3. If it is in the BB state, it is determined in step S1203 whether the number of bets is 2. In other words, the processing of steps S1201 to S1203 corresponds to the processing of steps S601 to S603 described above, and is processing to determine whether it is a specific specified number that is specified in association with the game state. If it is not the specific specified number, the winning result response processing ends without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) from step S1204 onwards.

If the result of step S1202 or step S1203 is positive and the number of bets is equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is not set, it is determined in step S1205 whether the AT mode winning flag is set. If neither the AT mode flag nor the AT mode winning flag is set and the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1206 and processing for the stop-time AT lottery is executed.

<AT lottery processing when stopped>
The process for the stop-time AT lottery in step S1206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1301, a process is executed to ascertain the lottery result of the current game. In the following step S1302, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is a special role. If it is a special role, in step S1303, it is determined whether the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the current game is the first operation mode.

As already explained, in a game in which a special role is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd small role win is achieved, and if they are operated in the second operation mode, the 1st to 6th small role wins are achieved. In this case, the operation timing and operation sequence of each stop switch 42 to 44 may be temporarily stored in a register or the like, and in step S1303, it may be determined whether or not the first operation mode is selected, or it may be determined that the first operation mode was selected based on the winning result, which indicates that the 33rd small role win is achieved (none of the 1st to 6th small role wins are achieved).

In particular, in the case of a configuration in which the 33rd small win cannot be achieved even in the first operation mode in the special role, resulting in a missed win, or in which the 1st to 6th small wins cannot be achieved even in the second operation mode, resulting in a missed win, it is preferable to store the operation timing and operation sequence of each stop switch 42 to 44 as in the former case, and determine which operation mode is present from that information. Conversely, as in this embodiment, in a configuration in which the 33rd small win is not missed if at least the first operation mode is used, it is preferable to determine that the operation was performed in the first operation mode because the 33rd small win is achieved, and also, if the 1st to 6th small wins are achieved and a special role is won, it may be determined that the operation was performed in the second operation mode rather than the first operation mode.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the first operation mode was used when the special role was won, or if it is determined in step S1302 that the lottery result was something other than a special role, the process of decrementing the ceiling counter is executed in steps S1304 to S1306, and then the process of AT mode transition lottery and the like is executed in steps S1307 to S1323. In contrast, if it is determined in step S1303 that the second operation mode was used instead of the first operation mode when the special role was won, the process for AT lottery at stop is terminated without performing the process of decrementing the ceiling counter or the lottery for AT mode transition, etc.

That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the 33rd minor prize is won by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the first operation mode when a special prize is won, and the 1st to 6th minor prizes, which have a larger number of medals paid out than when the 33rd minor prize is won, are won by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the second operation mode. In the first operation mode, the ceiling counter subtraction process and the AT mode transition lottery are executed, whereas in the second operation mode, the ceiling counter subtraction process and the AT mode transition lottery are not executed. In addition, in the start-time AT lottery process, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode transition lottery based on the special prize are not executed. Therefore, although the number of medals paid out is greater when the second operation mode is operated than when the first operation mode is operated when a special prize is won, the processing related to the instruction function is executed in a more restricted manner than in the first operation mode when the second operation mode is operated. In this way, the game is diversified by allowing the player to choose which benefit to enjoy.

In the process for subtracting the ceiling counter, a subtraction value lottery process is executed in step S1304. In the subtraction value lottery process, a ceiling subtraction value table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the value to be subtracted from the ceiling counter in the current game is determined by lottery based on the lottery result grasped in step S1301. As shown in FIG. 39, in this embodiment, the subtraction value is set to 1 to 100, and for lottery results other than special roles, including misses, 1 is generally likely to be selected, and when a specific role, such as a rare role, is won, a subtraction value greater than 1 may be subtracted from the ceiling counter. On the other hand, when a special role is won, the probability of a subtraction value greater than 1 being selected is higher than when a specific role is won.

After executing the subtraction value lottery process in step S1304, a process is executed in step S1305 to set the subtraction value command as an output target to the display control device 81. The subtraction value command contains information on the subtraction value of the current game. Then, in step S1306, a process is executed to subtract the subtraction value selected in step S1304 from the ceiling counter. Incidentally, when the ceiling counter becomes 0, as described above, the AT mode winning flag is set in the AT lottery process at the start of the next game. In step S1306, if the current subtraction value is greater than the remaining number of the ceiling counter, the ceiling counter is set to 0 so that it does not become a negative value. In this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of errors caused by negative values. However, if the current subtraction value is greater than the remaining number of the ceiling counter, a configuration may be adopted in which an event advantageous to the player occurs, and an advantageous event may occur or the type of advantageous event may be different depending on the difference between the remaining number and the subtraction value. Examples of advantageous events include the addition of an AT mode set, making it easier to select the advantageous second AT mode as a type of AT mode, generating a setting value suggestion effect, or displaying a rare image.

After the ceiling counter is decremented in step S1306, processing for the AT mode lottery is executed in steps S1307 to S1311. That is, in step S1307, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag or the CZ mode winning flag is set. If neither flag is set, processing is executed in step S1308 to obtain the lottery table for transition to normal AT mode when stopped from the various table storage area 105a. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag or the CZ mode winning flag is set and the state is in CZ mode or transition to CZ mode has been confirmed, processing is executed in step S1309 to obtain the lottery table for transition to CZ AT mode when stopped from the various table storage area 105a.

As shown in FIG. 39, these AT mode transition lottery tables for normal use when stopped and AT mode transition lottery tables for CZ when stopped are set so that a special role can result in an AT mode transition win, but are set so that other lottery results do not result in an AT mode transition win. This is because for lottery results other than special roles, the AT mode transition lottery is held in the start-time AT lottery process, and this prevents the payout rate from soaring due to overlapping transition lotteries being held at start and stop. Also, when comparing the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use when stopped and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ when stopped, they are set so that, like the start-time one, it is easier to win the AT mode transition for CZ than for normal use.

The relationship between the occurrence rate (winning probability) of each lottery result in the 3-bet game and the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery result will be explained with reference to Figure 40.

As already explained, in the start-time AT lottery process, the lottery result with a lower appearance rate in each game is set to be more likely to be an AT mode transition winning. For example, chance eye A, which appears with a probability of about 1 in 164, will be an AT mode transition winning in CZ mode with a probability of 3%, and chance eye B, which appears with a probability of about 1 in 262, will be an AT mode transition winning in CZ mode with a probability of 5%. In this case, in CZ mode, the probability of an AT mode transition winning triggered by chance eye A is about 1 in 5460, and the probability of an AT mode transition winning triggered by chance eye B is about 1 in 5240. In contrast, in the stop-time AT lottery process, when a special role, which appears with a probability of about 1 in 20, is won, the AT mode transition winning is about 1 in 40 by operating in the first operation mode, and in CZ mode, the probability of an AT mode transition winning triggered by a special role is about 1 in 200.

In other words, the rate at which a special role triggers a win to switch to AT mode is set to be overwhelmingly higher than other results; specifically, in CZ mode, a special role triggers a win to switch to AT mode with a probability of approximately 1 in 200, and a non-special role triggers a win to switch to AT mode with a probability of approximately 1 in 178, meaning that in CZ mode, a special role will trigger a win to switch to AT mode in roughly half of cases.

However, as mentioned above, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode in a game in which a special role has been won, the AT mode transition lottery itself will not be held. Therefore, in a game in which the aim is to win the AT mode transition, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the stop switches 42-44 in the first operation mode when a special role has been won, even if the number of medals paid out is small.

After obtaining each transition lottery table, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S1310. Then, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition has been selected.

If the AT mode transition is selected, processing for the AT mode win is executed in steps S1312 to S1315, and if the AT mode transition is not selected, processing for the CZ mode is executed in steps S1316 to S1319. After that, processing for the premonition mode is executed in steps S1320 to S1323, and then the processing for the stop-time AT lottery is terminated. The processing in steps S1312 to S1323 is the same as the processing in steps S809 to S820 in the start-time AT lottery processing.

In addition, in the stop time AT lottery process, if the AT mode transition is selected or the CZ mode transition is selected, the premonition game number is set and a premonition command is output. If the AT mode transition is selected during CZ mode, the premonition game number is set to 0. In this case, in the premonition game number process (step S1208) executed following this stop time AT lottery process, processing to start the AT mode from the next game is performed. In other words, whether the AT mode transition is selected in the start time AT lottery process during CZ mode or the AT mode transition is selected in the stop time AT lottery process, a notification that the AT mode transition has been selected in the current game is similarly issued, and the AT mode will start from the next game.

Return to the explanation of the winning result response process (Figure 37).

If it is determined in step S1205 that the AT mode transition lottery has already been won, or after the processing for the stop-time AT lottery has been executed in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, it is determined whether the premonition flag has been set. If the premonition flag has been set, in step S1208, processing for the premonition game count is executed, and then the winning result response processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the premonition flag is not set in step S1207, it is determined in step S1209 whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set and the game is in CZ mode, the CZ game count process is executed in step S1210, and the winning result process is then terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1209, the winning result process is then terminated.

If the AT mode flag is set in step S1204 and the game is in AT mode, AT game number processing is executed in step S1211, and then the winning result processing is terminated.

Below, we will explain the processing for the premonition game count, the processing for the CZ game count, and the processing for the AT game count.

<Processing for Premonition Game Number>
In the process for the number of premonition games, as shown in Fig. 41, a process is executed in step S1401 to subtract 1 from the premonition counter. Note that, in the process for setting the number of premonition games in the process for the start-time AT lottery or the process for the stop-time AT lottery, if the number of premonition games is set to 0 (if 0 is input into the premonition counter), the premonition counter is not subtracted in step S1401. Then, in step S1402, it is determined whether the premonition counter is 0, and if it is not 0, the process for the premonition mode is terminated as is. If the premonition counter is 0, a process is executed in step S1403 to clear the premonition flag.

In the next step S1404, by determining whether the AT mode winning flag is set, it is understood whether the present premonition mode was transitioned based on winning the AT mode transition lottery. If the AT mode winning flag is not set and the present premonition mode is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, a process is executed to clear the CZ mode winning flag. Then, in step S1406, the CZ mode flag is set, and in step S1407, a process is executed to input 10 as a predetermined number to the CZ game counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is a counter that is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. After that, in step S1408, a process is executed to set the CZ start command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the premonition mode process is terminated. When the display control device 81 receives the CZ start command, it controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to notify the player that they have won the CZ mode transition lottery and that CZ mode will begin.

If the AT mode winning flag is set in step S1404 and the current premonition mode is a premonition mode based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, a process to clear the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S1409. Then, in step S1410, a process to set the AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. In the following step S1411, a continuation rate setting process is executed. As described above, the AT mode in this embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a predetermined number of games is one set, and the AT mode continues until the set continuation lottery is not won in a situation where there are no remaining sets (a situation where the AT set counter is 0), and the continuation rate setting process in step S1411 is a process to set the probability of winning the continuation lottery (continuation rate).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the selection rate of the multiple continuation rates (90%, 60%, 10%) is set to be different depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, and in step S1411, a lottery is held to determine which continuation rate to select based on the setting value. Specifically, the higher the setting value (the higher the ball payout rate), the easier it is to select a high continuation rate. For example, a 60% continuation rate is selected with a 30% probability in setting 1, whereas it is selected with a 70% probability in setting 6. However, a 90% continuation rate is more likely to be selected with an odd number setting than with an even number setting, and the most likely setting value to be selected is setting 5. When a 90% continuation rate is selected, a 90% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, when a 60% continuation rate is selected, a 60% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and when a 10% continuation rate is selected, a 10% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The information indicating each of these continuation rates (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) is a flag that is cleared when the AT mode to which the player is currently being transitioned ends. In other words, once the continuation rate of the AT mode is set, the continuation lottery for each set is held at that continuation rate until the AT mode ends.

After executing the continuation rate setting process in step S1411, a process of inputting 18 into the AT game counter is executed in step S1412. As described above, the AT game counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games until one set of the AT mode is completed, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed. Then, if the continuation condition is met when the AT game counter reaches 0, the predetermined number, 18, is input into the AT game counter again, and if the continuation condition is not met when the AT game counter reaches 0, the AT mode ends.

Then, in step S1412, a process is executed to set the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81, and the process for the premonition mode is terminated. The display control device 81, which has received the AT start command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform a performance corresponding to the start of the AT mode. In this case, the AT mode will start from the game following the game that is currently ending.

<CZ game number processing>
In the CZ game number process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 43, a process of subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step S1501. In the following step S1502, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1501. If the CZ game counter has not become 0, the CZ mode process is terminated.

If the CZ game counter is 0, in step S1503, a process is executed to clear the CZ mode flag. Then, in step S1504, a process is executed to set the CZ end command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this CZ mode process is terminated. When the display control device 81 receives the CZ end command, it controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to notify the user that CZ mode has ended.

As already explained, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during CZ mode, CZ mode ends at that point and transitions to premonition mode. Therefore, when CZ mode ends by clearing the CZ mode flag in step S1503, this means that the AT mode transition lottery was not won during CZ mode.

<AT game number processing>
In the AT game number process, as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 44, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT game counter is executed in step S1601. In the following step S1602, based on the processing result of step S1601, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0. If the AT game counter has not become 0, the AT mode process is terminated.

If the AT game counter is 0, in step S1603, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set and the continuation condition is met, processing to move to the next set (steps S1604 to S1606) is executed. On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set in step S1603, processing to end the AT mode (steps S1607 to S1610) is executed.

If the continuation condition is met in step S1603, the continuation flag is cleared in step S1604. Then, in step S1604, 18 is input to the AT game counter, and in step S1606, a set update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT mode processing ends. The display control device 81, which has received the set update command, executes processing to update the presentation of the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 in response to the transition of the AT mode set.

On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not met in step S1603, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1607, and the continuation rate information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) is cleared in step S1608. Then, in step S1609, an AT mode end flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. After that, in step S1610, an AT mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT mode processing is terminated. The AT mode end flag is a flag for ending the advantageous zone when the AT mode is terminated. The display control device 81, which has received the AT mode end command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to perform an effect corresponding to the end of the AT mode.

<Management of advantageous areas>
Next, the first section display process and the second section display process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to a favorable section, and ending the favorable section will be described.

<First section display process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to Fig. 45. The first section display process is a process carried out in step S314 in the lottery process (Fig. 19), and is carried out after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode is carried out based on the lottery result (lottery result corresponding process).

In step S1701, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, when the eighth display segment N8 is being lit, it indicates when the advantageous section is a specific section in which at least the notification conditions for the push order notification to occur are met. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone winning game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to identify that it is a winning game. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, a process is executed in step S1703 to clear the advantageous zone winning game flag. Then, a process is executed in step S1704 to set the advantageous zone flag.

In step S1705, a process is performed to count the number of games in the advantageous zone, more specifically, to start measuring the advantageous zone game number AG of the various counter areas 106e. The advantageous zone game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous zone. Then, in step S1706, advantageous zone transition processing is executed. The advantageous zone transition processing is a process for setting the state and advantageous degree of the advantageous zone to be transitioned this time. Specifically, in the advantageous zone transition processing, the above-mentioned ceiling counter is set by lottery or the like, and after the advantageous zone transition, a ceiling game number that allows transition to the AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery is set. The ceiling counter may be drawn using, for example, a setting value or the lottery result of the game, so that the higher the setting, the more likely it is that a shorter ceiling game number will be selected, or the shorter the ceiling game number will be selected with an even number setting than with an odd number setting, or the less likely it is to win as a lottery result of the current game, the more likely it is that a shorter ceiling game number will be selected. A value corresponding to the ceiling game number determined by lottery may then be input to the ceiling counter. For example, a ceiling command including information corresponding to the ceiling counter may be output to the display control device 81, so that a presentation suggesting the ceiling game number is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or speaker 64.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the maximum number of ceiling games is set to 700. In other words, after moving to the advantageous zone, normally, the ceiling counter will become 0 after at least 700 games have been played, and the AT mode winning flag will be set.

However, as mentioned above, if each game is not played with a specific prescribed number of bets, the ceiling counter is not decremented, and also if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode when a special role is won, the ceiling counter is not decremented. Therefore, even if the number of games actually played is 700 or more, it is possible that the ceiling counter will not reach 0 and the AT mode winning flag will not be set. Also, the decrement value of the ceiling counter may be greater than 1 for each game, and the ceiling counter may reach 0 before the number of games equivalent to the ceiling counter value set at the time of the transition to the advantageous zone is played.

In the first section display process, after the favorable section transition process is executed in step S1706, the section indicator starts displaying by lighting the eighth display segment N8 in step S1707.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed as a section indicator, then in step S1708, processing is executed to continue the display during the favorable section. Specifically, in step S1708, processing is executed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. In other words, processing to end the display of the section indicator is not executed in this first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the advantageous zone winning game flag is not set, then after executing the display start process in step S1707 or after executing the display continuation process in step S1708, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If it is determined in step S1709 that none of the AT mode flags are set, then in step S1710, a process is executed to add 1 to the first role ratio counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The first role ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which no push order notification occurs, i.e., the number of games in the normal zone and the non-specific zone.

In contrast, if it is determined in step S1709 that any of the AT mode flags is set, in step S1711, a process is executed to add 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which a push order notification can be generated, i.e., the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the processing of step S1710 or step S1711, a role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1712. In this process, the value of the role ratio second counter is divided by the sum of the role ratio first counter and the role ratio second counter (total number of games). In other words, the role ratio calculation process is a process that calculates the proportion of the number of games in which a push order notification may occur out of the total number of games. Then, in step S1713, a process is executed to display the calculation result of step S1712 on the role ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has multiple 7-segment display sections consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as 7-segment display sections. The display segments in the first display section 77a to the fifth display section 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs, similar to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up only one display segment, and to light up any combination of display segments. As a result, each role ratio monitor 77 is designed to display a specific symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 is capable of displaying five-digit numbers.

In step S1713, the result of the calculation process in step S1712 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and the display of each display section 77a to 77e on the role ratio monitor 77 is controlled so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Specifically, a number smaller than 1 and up to four decimal places, such as "0.5012," is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 as the ratio of the number of games in which a push order notification may occur out of the total number of games. After the process of step S1713 is executed, the first section display process is terminated.

Note that the display of the role ratio monitor 77 may be controlled after rounding off the 5th decimal place in the calculation process of step S1712. In addition, since the first display unit 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display unit 77a may not be included, or the first display unit 77a may be configured to always display "0" by printing or the like. It is also preferable to configure the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b to display a decimal point by printing or the like between them.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 46. As already described, the second section display process is a process that is performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and is performed after medals are paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result (winning result response process) at the end of one game.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone flag is set. If it is not set, the second zone display process is terminated. If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S1802, a process is executed to count the number of games in the advantageous zone. Specifically, a process is executed to add 1 to the advantageous zone game count AG. In the following step S1803, a process is executed to update the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter area 106e.

In the MY update process of step S1803, provided that the result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of coins inserted (number of coins bet) is subtracted from the number of coins paid out, and the subtraction result is added to the number of coins increased or decreased in the favorable zone, MY, thereby updating the number of coins increased or decreased in the favorable zone.

After executing the MY update process in step S1803, in step S1804, the remaining game number management process is executed, and in the following step S1805, the remaining number management process is executed. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit game number (1500 games) with the current remaining game number based on the remaining game number in the AT mode, etc. In the remaining game number management process, for example, it is grasped whether or not the total of the advantageous zone game number AG (the number of games played in the advantageous zone) and the AT game counter (the remaining game number in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone. Then, if it is such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation, and a first excess command including information that the first excess flag has been set is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous zone will reach the upper limit increase (2400 coins) with the current remaining number of games based on the number of games remaining in the AT mode, etc. The remaining payout number management process, for example, determines whether or not the sum of the expected increase calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease coin number MY is greater than the increase/decrease coin number in the advantageous zone. If this is the case, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation, and a second excess command including information that the second excess flag has been set is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

After the remaining game number management process and remaining coin number management process are executed, in step S1806, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has reached the upper limit of 1500 games, or whether the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY has reached the upper limit of 2400 or more. If either of these forced termination conditions is met, in step S1807, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S1808, a process is performed to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator. Then, in step S1809, a process is executed to initialize parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous zone, and then this second zone display process is terminated.

Specifically, the initialization process for the advantageous zone information in step S1809 executes a process to reset flags and counters set at the transition to the current advantageous zone, and flags and counters set during the current advantageous zone, to their initial values. For example, if the advantageous zone flag and various AT mode flags are not cleared but are set, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the advantageous zone game count AG, the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY, the counter for the number of continuing games in AT mode, the AT preparation counter, etc. are greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, this initialization process for the advantageous zone information initializes all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification for the advantageous zone as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and is a process to clear the RAM for such variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step S1806 that the number of games in the favorable zone AG has not reached the upper limit, and the number of increase/decrease coins in the favorable zone MY has not reached the upper limit increase, the process proceeds to step S1810, where it is determined whether the AT mode end flag is set. If the AT mode end flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1807, where processing for ending the favorable zone is executed. If the AT mode end flag is not set, processing for ending the favorable zone is executed as is.

<Performance setting process>
The effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 47. The effect setting process is a process that is activated by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

In the performance setting process, first in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S1902, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. A command storage area is provided in RAM 183, and this command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1901, or after the processing of step S1902 is executed, in step S1903, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a betting command. A betting command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on a betting operation being performed, such as a betting command set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a betting command, in step S1904, a betting performance setting process is executed to set the performance based on the current betting operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1903, or after the processing of step S1904 has been executed, in step S1905, it is judged whether or not the newly received command was a start command. A start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes a lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery processing, as well as a premonition command, a continuation command, a set addition command, and a push order notification command set in the lottery result response processing (Figure 27), etc. If it is one of these start commands, in step S1906, a start performance setting process is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1905, or after the processing of step S1906 is executed, in step S1907, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a command at each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command command set in step S406 of the reel control processing (FIG. 22). If the stop command is a stop command at each stop operation, in step S1908, each stop operation effect setting processing is executed to set the effect based on the current stop operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1907, or after the processing of step S1908 is executed, in step S1909, it is judged whether the newly received command is an all stop command. An all stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and includes the winning result command set in step S419 of the reel control processing (FIG. 22), as well as the first BB start command, second BB start command, first BB end command, second BB end command, premonition command, CZ start command, AT start command, CZ end command, set update command, AT end command, etc., which are set in the bonus state processing (FIG. 24) or winning result corresponding processing (FIG. 36). If it is one of these all stop commands, in step S1910, the all stop performance setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1909, or after the processing of step S1910 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1911, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1911, the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the various effects set in each of the above effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timing. In addition, in step S1911, settings are made for effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when betting, starting, or stopping (for example, effects based on operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as an effect switch detection sensor), settings for error notification, etc.

The process for setting the effects at start and when all stops is explained below.

<Start-time performance setting process>
The start-time performance setting process of step S1906 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the lottery result command being received is a lottery result command indicating a push order bell group. As already explained, in the lottery result command setting process in this embodiment (Figure 36 (a)), if it is any of the push order bells, a lottery result command indicating a push order bell group is output, rather than a lottery result command indicating an individual result. If a lottery result command indicating a push order bell group has been received in step S2001 and it is a game in which any of the push order bells have been won, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether any push order notification command has been received. As already explained, if any of the push order bells is won during AT mode, a push order notification command corresponding to the operation sequence for achieving the first to sixth minor prize wins is output according to the type of push order bell that has been won (see FIG. 36(b)). If any of the push order notification commands has been received, settings are executed in step S2003 so that the corresponding push order notification performance is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and/or speaker 64.

If it is determined in step S2001 that a lottery result command indicating a push order bell group has not been received, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not a lottery result command indicating a special role has been received. If the determination in step S2004 is positive and the lottery result of the current game is a special role, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not a push order notification command has been received. As already explained, in a game in which a special role has been won during AT mode, a push order notification command corresponding to the operation sequence that results in the sixth small role win among the first to sixth small roles wins is output (see FIG. 36(b)). If a push order notification command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2003, and settings are executed so that the push order notification performance for the sixth small role win is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

If it is determined in step S2004 that a lottery result command indicating a special role has not been received, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not a lottery result command indicating any specific role has been received. As already explained, a specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is unlikely to appear (hard to win) as a lottery result of each game, and in this embodiment, Chance Eye A to Chance Eye C, Cherry A to Cherry C, and watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 30, in the AT mode transition lottery in the start time AT lottery process triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be higher than other lottery results. In addition, in the AT mode additional lottery, if these specific roles are won, the additional lottery can be won, while if a normal role such as normal lip A is won, the additional lottery cannot be won. If the lottery result of this game is a specific role win, in step S2007, a process for setting a specific role notification performance is executed. In the process of setting the special role notification effect, settings are made so that a special role notification that the lottery result of this game is one of the above special roles is made on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. For example, the special role notification is set to have three exclamation mark characters displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2002, step S2005, or step S2006, or after the processing of step S2003 or step S2007 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, a start premonition effect setting process is executed. In the start premonition effect setting process, a process for setting the premonition mode is executed based on the premonition command output and set in the start AT lottery process in the main control device 101, and a process for setting the premonition effects for each game in the premonition mode is executed. Such start premonition effect setting process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S2009, it is determined whether or not the sub-side CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The sub-side CZ flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that it is in CZ mode. If the sub-side CZ flag is set, the start CZ performance setting process is executed in step S2010. In the start CZ performance setting process, a process is executed to set the performance of the game that is currently starting according to the lottery results of each game in CZ mode. Such start CZ performance setting process will also be described in detail later.

When a negative judgment is made in step S2009, or after the processing of step S2010 is executed, an AT performance setting process is executed in step S2010. In the AT performance setting process, in a set management type AT mode in which 18 games are one set as a predetermined number, a process is executed to set a battle performance in one set in which, for example, an ally character faces off against an enemy character, and if the continuation condition of the set is met, the ally character wins, and if the continuation condition is not met, the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins. In this case, for example, in each of the first 10 games of one set of games, a confrontation performance in which an ally character faces off against an enemy character is executed, and in each of the last 8 games of the set, a battle performance in which an ally character faces off against an enemy character is executed.

After executing the AT effect setting process in step S2011, other start-time effect setting processes are executed in step S2012, and then this start-time effect setting process is terminated. In step S2012, for example, a process is executed to set an effect suggesting a lottery result in response to the start of the game, or to turn off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process of step S1910 in the effect setting process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. As already described, the all-stop effect setting process is a process for setting effects when a newly received command is a all-stop command such as a winning result command, a first BB start command, a second BB start command, a first BB end command, a second BB end command, a premonition command, a CZ start command, an AT start command, a CZ end command, a set update command, or an AT end command.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command has been received. If a CZ start command has been received, in step S2102, a process is executed to set the sub-side CZ flag in the various flag storage area 183a, and in step S2103, a process is executed to set the CZ start effect as a bet time effect for the next game on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. For example, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the CZ start effect displays on the auxiliary display unit 65 that the CZ mode will start from the current game and the number of games remaining in the CZ mode (10). In other words, if a CZ start command has been received as a stop time command, after the game ends, the CZ start effect will be executed based on the bet operation for the next game. By setting the sub-side CZ flag in step S2102, a positive determination is made in step S2009 in the start time effect setting process for the next game, and the start time CZ effect setting process is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2101, in step S2104, it is judged whether or not the above-mentioned sub-side CZ flag has already been set. If it has already been set and the game to be ended is a game in CZ mode, in step S2105, a stop-time CZ effect setting process is executed. The stop-time CZ effect setting process is a process for modifying the effects in CZ mode that were set in the start-time CZ effect setting process at the start of the game, when the game ends. Such stop-time CZ effect setting process will be explained in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2104, it is judged in step S2106 whether or not an AT start command has been received. If an AT start command has been received, a process of setting a sub-side AT flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step S2107, and a process for starting the AT is executed in the following step S2108. In the process for starting the AT, for example, a process of inputting the number of games of the set to be started into a game number counter for grasping the number of games played in each set of the AT mode, a process of inputting 1 into a set counter for grasping the number of continuations of the set, and a process for performing an AT start performance on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 as a bet performance for the next game are executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(a), the AT start performance is set to a performance in which a display indicating that the AT mode is started (text display such as "AT start") is performed. In other words, if an AT start command is received as a stop command, after the game ends, the AT start performance is executed based on the bet operation for the next game. In addition, in the AT start performance, the background and sound effects may be set to differ depending on the continuation rate to suggest the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started, for example.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2106, it is judged in step S2109 whether or not an AT end command has been received. If an AT end command has been received, a process of clearing the sub-side AT flag is executed in step S2110, and a process of setting an effect for performing an AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed in step S2111. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the AT end effect is set to display a message indicating that the AT mode is ending (such as a text display of "See you later"), as well as an effect of announcing the number of continuing sets in the current AT mode and the number of medals acquired.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2109, it is judged in step S2112 whether or not a set update command has been received. If a set update command has been received, one set of AT mode has ended, and a transition to the next set is to be made, a set update process is executed in step S2113. The set update process executes a process for clearing information regarding the presence or absence of a continuation condition for the previous set at the start of the current set, and a process for inputting the number of games in the current set into the game number counter described above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2112, a stop-time premonition effect setting process is executed in step S2114. As already explained, in this embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode transition lottery are executed not only at the start of the game but also at the end of the game, and a premonition command can be output based on the result. The stop-time premonition effect setting process executes a process for setting various effects of the premonition mode based on the premonition command output at the end of the game. Such stop-time premonition mode setting process will be explained in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S2103, step S2105, step S2108, step S2111, step S2113, or step S2114, a game number management process is executed in step S2115. The game number management process is a process for managing the number of games from the transition to the advantageous zone until the ceiling for winning the transition to the AT mode, and for setting the presentation when the ceiling is reached. Such game number related process will be explained in detail later.

After executing the process of step S2115, in step S2116, other all-stop effect setting processes are executed, and then this all-stop effect setting process is terminated. In step S2116, processes are executed to perform effects corresponding to various commands output when BB starts or ends, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout amount of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, and a sound effect corresponding to an automatic bet during a replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<Overview of CZ production>
Before explaining the start CZ effect setting process and the stop CZ effect setting process, an overview of the effects of each game during the CZ mode in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 54, etc.

As already explained, in the CZ mode in this embodiment, it is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than in the normal mode. If the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of premonition games is set to 0, a notification is made that the AT mode transition has been won in that game, and the AT mode starts from the next game. In other words, in this embodiment, a fully notified notification mode is adopted, in which the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified during each game in the CZ mode. In this way, the flow of play from the CZ mode to the AT mode can be made smoother, and the attention to each game in the CZ mode can be appropriately increased.

As a specific presentation of each game in the CZ mode, in this embodiment, multiple variable regions of number characters are provided in the auxiliary display unit 65, and a notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is made when the number characters that stop in the multiple variable regions form a predetermined combination. In this embodiment, the predetermined combination is set when the same number characters stop and form a doublet. For example, as shown in Figures 54(a1) to 54(c1), the left variable region SP1, the middle variable region SP2, and the right variable region SP3 are set in order from the left as the variable regions of the number characters in the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number characters 1 to 9 are set as the number characters to be displayed in these variable regions SP1 to SP3. Then, when each game is started, the number characters in these variable regions SP1 to SP3 are displayed variably, for example, vertically, and the number characters are stopped in order from the left each time the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. FIG. 54(a1) shows a state where the left stop switch 42 is operated and a number character stops in the left variable area SP1, FIG. 54(b1) shows a state where the middle stop switch 43 is operated and a number character stops in the middle variable area SP2, and FIG. 54(c1) shows a state where the right stop switch 44 is operated and a number character stops in the right variable area SP3. In this case, in FIG. 54, the same number "1" character is stopped in the left variable area SP1 and the middle variable area SP2, but a "4" character, which is different from the number in the middle left, is stopped in the right variable area SP3, indicating that a specified combination has not been formed. In other words, a notification is being issued that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won.

The stop switches 42-44 are provided so that they can be displaced from an initial position located at the front of the slot machine 10 to an operating position located at the rear. The stop switches 42-44 are biased from the operating position toward the initial position by a spring or the like as a biasing means, and are positioned at the initial position before operation. The stop switches 42-44 positioned at the initial position are pressed toward the operating position, applying a force to the rear side that exceeds the biasing force of the biasing means, displacing the stop switches 42-44 toward the operating position. When the hand or the like is released from the stop switches 42-44, the biasing force of the biasing means returns them to their initial positions.

The detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a to the main control device 101 change from the OFF state to the ON state when the stop switches 42 to 44 are displaced from the initial position to the operating position, and change from the ON state to the OFF state when the stop switches 42 to 44 are displaced from the operating position to the initial position. The main control device 101 can determine that the stop switches 42 to 44 have displaced from the initial position to the operating position by determining that the detection signals from the stop switches 42 to 44 have risen from the OFF state to the ON state, and can determine that the stop switches 42 to 44 have displaced from the operating position to the initial position by determining that the detection signals from the stop switches 42 to 44 have fallen from the ON state to the OFF state.

In the following description, operating the stop switches 42-44 from the initial position toward the operating position is also referred to as a stop ON operation, and operating the stop switches 42-44 from the operating position toward the initial position (releasing your hand, etc.) is also referred to as a stop OFF operation. Furthermore, the first stop ON operation of each of the stop switches 42-44 is referred to as the first stop ON operation, the first stop OFF operation as the first stop OFF operation, the second stop ON operation as the second stop ON operation, the second stop OFF operation as the second stop OFF operation, the third stop ON operation as the third stop ON operation, and the third stop OFF operation as the third stop OFF operation.

In the performance during the CZ mode, the stopping of the number characters in each of the above-mentioned variable areas SP1 to SP3 is performed based on the stop ON operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. That is, as shown in FIG. 54(a2), by operating the left stop switch 42 to stop ON, the number characters stop in the left variable area SP1, as shown in FIG. 54(b2), by operating the middle stop switch 43 to stop ON, the number characters stop in the middle variable area SP2, and as shown in FIG. 54(c2), by operating the right stop switch 44 to stop ON, the number characters stop in the right variable area SP3.

Note that the number character stops in the left variable area SP1 when the first stop ON operation is performed, the number character stops in the middle variable area SP2 when the second stop ON operation is performed, and the number character stops in the right variable area SP3 when the third stop ON operation is performed. The variable areas SP1 to SP3 where the number character stops are configured to correspond one-to-one to the stop order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the variable areas SP1 to SP3 where the number character stops may also be configured to correspond one-to-one to the stop switches 42 to 44. Specifically, for example, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated as the first stop ON operation, the number character stops in the middle variable area SP2, when the right stop switch 44 is operated as the second stop ON operation, the number character stops in the right variable area SP3, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated as the third stop ON operation, the number character stops in the left variable area SP1.

<Start time CZ performance setting process>
The start CZ performance setting process of step S2010 in the start performance setting process (Figure 48) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 52.

In step S2201, it is determined whether the sub-side CZ flag is set. If the sub-side CZ flag is not set, this start-time CZ effect setting process is terminated. If the sub-side CZ flag is set, in step S2202, an update process for the CZ game count display is executed. Note that the number of games in CZ mode is configured to be managed in the stop-time CZ effect setting process, but the display of the remaining number of games in CZ mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 (remaining game count image GP, see Figure 54) is configured to be updated at the start of the game. In step S2202, depending on the remaining number of games in CZ mode, the corresponding remaining game count image GP is read from the memory area of ROM 182, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that the updated remaining game count image GP is displayed.

After executing the update process for the CZ game count display, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating a specific role has been received as a start command for the current game. If a lottery result command indicating a specific role has been received, in step S2204, a Tenpai effect (Figure 55 (a)) is set to be performed as a performance during the CZ mode of the current game, in which the number character stopped upon the first stop ON operation and the number character stopped upon the second stop ON operation are the same number character. By performing the Tenpai effect, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation that a predetermined combination corresponding to a winning AT mode transition will be formed, as described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2203 that a lottery result command indicating a specific role has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2205, where it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating a special role has been received. If a lottery result command indicating a special role has not been received and the lottery result of the current game is neither a specific role nor a special role, it is determined in step S2206 whether or not a premonition command has been received as a start command for the current game. As already explained, in the start AT lottery process, a premonition command is set to be output if the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is won, and receiving a premonition command during CZ mode means that the AT mode transition lottery for the current game has been won. Also, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during CZ mode, the number of premonition games is set to 0, and the AT mode will start from the game following the current game.

If a premonition command has been received in step S2206, the process proceeds to step S2204, where the effect is set so that the above-mentioned tenpai effect is performed by the first stop ON operation and the second stop ON operation. On the other hand, if a premonition command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2207, where a normal tenpai effect lottery process is executed. In the normal tenpai effect lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that the tenpai effect occurs with a probability of about 5% regardless of the lottery result of the current game. Then, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the lottery process for the above-mentioned tenpai effect has been won, and if it has been won, the process proceeds to step S2204, where the tenpai effect is performed.

In contrast to this, if it is determined in step S2208 that the lottery process for the Tenpai effect has not resulted in a win, step S2209 is set to perform a Variety Eyes effect (Fig. 55(b)) in which the number characters stopped when the first stop ON operation is performed are different from the number characters stopped when the second stop ON operation is performed. By performing the Variety Eyes effect, it is possible to lower the expectation that a specific combination corresponding to a win for transition to the AT mode will be formed, as described above.

After setting in step S2204 that the ready-to-play effect will be generated upon the first stop ON operation and the second stop ON operation, in step S2210 it is determined whether or not a premonition command has been received. If a premonition command has been received and the result of the lottery for switching to the AT mode for this game is a winning result, in step S2211 it is determined by lottery whether or not a bomb effect will be generated based on the third stop ON operation for this game.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), the bomb effect is an effect in which a number character is stopped in the right variable area SP3 as an effect when the third stop is ON, and a bomb character (bomb image BP) is displayed. In the bomb effect, after the third stop is OFF, an explosion effect is executed in which an explosion image EP in which the bomb image BP explodes is displayed, as shown in FIG. 57(b), or an unexploded effect is executed in which the bomb image BP does not explode and an unexploded image NP is displayed, as shown in FIG. 59(a). When the bomb effect switches to an explosion effect, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the state in which a predetermined combination was not formed in each variable area SP1 to SP3 switches to a state in which a predetermined combination is formed, and a notification is made that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, and an AT winning effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 58(b). In contrast, if the bomb effect is executed without a win, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the state in which the specified combination was not formed in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 is maintained, and a "miss" redisplay effect is performed to notify the player that they did not win the AT mode transition lottery.

The bomb image BP is set to be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the number characters in the right variable area SP3; specifically, it is displayed in front of the number characters in the middle variable area SP2, overlapping with said number characters, but not overlapping with the number characters in the right variable area SP3, and further not overlapping with the number characters in the left variable area SP1. This makes it possible to preferably avoid a situation in which the number characters in the right variable area SP3, which are stopped when the third stop ON operation is performed, become difficult or impossible to grasp due to the bomb image BP being displayed.

In response to this, the explosion image EP (Fig. 57(b)) is displayed in front of the number characters that are stopped in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3, so as to overlap with these number characters. More specifically, in this embodiment, the explosion image EP is set to be displayed to the extent that the number characters cannot be seen. In this way, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity when the number characters are in a state in which a specified combination is formed after the explosion.

In the winning bomb effect lottery process in step S2211, it is determined whether or not to generate a bomb effect depending on the lottery result of the game. In this embodiment, for example, the lottery triggered by chance eye A among specific roles is more likely to generate a bomb effect than the lottery triggered by chance eye C, so that the more difficult it is to win the AT mode transition lottery, the more likely it is to generate an explosion effect. After executing the bomb effect lottery process, in step S2212, it is determined whether or not the bomb effect lottery has been won, and if it has not been won, in step S2213, it is set so that a double-digit effect (FIG. 56(a)) in which the same number character as the number character stopped in the above-mentioned ten-pai effect is stopped and a predetermined combination is formed is performed by the third stop ON operation. Then, in step S2214, it is set so that an AT winning effect (FIG. 56(b)) is performed based on the third stop OFF operation of the current game, and then this start time CZ effect setting process is terminated. The AT winning effect is set up so that, for example, a soldier character is shown letting out a roar on the auxiliary display unit 65 to celebrate the winning of the AT mode transition.

If the player does not win the explosion effect lottery when the player transitions to the AT mode in step S2212, the setting is made in step S2215 so that a Tenpai-missing effect (FIG. 55(a)) is performed in which a character with a number different from the character with a number stopped in the Tenpai effect is stopped when the third stop ON operation is performed. Also, if it is determined in step S2210 that a premonition command has not been received, the setting is made in step S2216 so that a Tenpai-missing effect (FIG. 55(a)) is performed in which a character with a number different from the character with a number stopped in the Tenpai effect is stopped when the third stop ON operation is performed. Furthermore, in the case where a barakeme effect is performed instead of a Tenpai effect, after the processing of step S2209 is performed, the setting is made in step S2217 so that a barakeme effect (FIG. 55(b)) is performed in which a random number character is stopped when the third stop ON operation is performed.

After executing the processing of step S2216 or step S2217, the process proceeds to step S2218. In step S2218, it is determined whether or not a special role flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The special role flag is a flag that is set in step S2222 when a special role is won. In this case, since a negative determination is made in step S2205, the special role flag is not set, so a negative determination is made in step S2218 and the process proceeds to step S2219.

In step S2219, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a bomb effect will be generated based on the third stop ON operation of the current game.

In the bomb effect lottery process in step S2219 when the transition to AT mode is not won, it is determined whether or not a bomb effect will be generated depending on the lottery result of the game. For example, a lottery triggered by a specific role is made more likely to generate a bomb effect than a lottery triggered by a non-specific role. After the bomb effect lottery process is executed, in step S2220 it is determined whether or not the bomb effect lottery has been won, and if not, the start time CZ effect setting process is terminated. If the bomb effect lottery has been won, in step S2221 a bomb image BP is set to be displayed based on the third stop ON operation, and then this start time CZ effect setting process is terminated.

In this way, depending on the lottery results for each game and the result of the AT mode transition lottery that is executed at the start, a double number effect is performed in the variable areas SP1 to SP3 to notify the player that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, or a tenpai miss effect or a barrage effect is performed to notify the player that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won.

On the other hand, if the game lottery result is a special role, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed, but if it is the second operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed. Then, as described above, when a special role is won, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the start AT lottery process, but is performed in the stop AT lottery process. Therefore, although it is possible to determine that a special role has been won at the start of the CZ mode, it is not possible to know whether the AT mode transition lottery has been won or not. Therefore, in this embodiment, the performance corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery executed at the time of stopping based on the special role is started in advance as a variable display of each variable area SP1 to SO3, and after the AT mode transition lottery at the time of stopping is executed, the performance started in advance is modified to correspond to the result of the AT mode transition lottery.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S2205 that a lottery result command indicating a special role has been received, a process is executed in step S2222 to set a special role flag in the various flag storage area 183a. Then, in step S2223, a lottery process for a special role is executed. This lottery process for a special role is set to have a different winning probability than the lottery process for a special role in step S2207 above, and specifically, it is set so that a lottery process for a special role is more likely to occur when a special role is won than when a role that is neither a special role nor a specific role is won, and more specifically, in step S2223, it is set so that a lottery process for a special role occurs with a probability of 30%.

After executing the Tenpai effect lottery process in step S2223, it is determined in step S2208 whether or not the Tenpai effect lottery has been won, and if it has been won, processing for setting the Tenpai effect is performed in step S2204. Incidentally, when a special role is won, a premonition command is not output in the start AT lottery process, so even if a Tenpai effect has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S2210, and it is set in step S2216 so that a Tenpai miss effect is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2208 that the Tenpai effect lottery has not been won, steps S2209 and S2217 are set to perform the Barakeme effect.

After executing the processing of step S2216 or step S2217, as described above, the process proceeds to step S2218, where it is determined whether or not the special combination flag is set. Since the special combination flag is set this time, a positive determination is made in step S2218, and the process proceeds to step S2221. In step S2221, as described above, the bomb image BP is set to be displayed based on the third stop ON operation.

In other words, in games where a special role is won, the game is set up so that the ready effect occurs more easily than when a special role is not won, and the bomb effect, in which a bomb image BP is displayed, always occurs when the third stop ON operation is performed.

<CZ effect setting process when stopped>
Next, the stop-time CZ performance setting process of step S2105 in the stop-time performance setting process (Figure 49) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 53.

In step S2301, it is determined whether the bomb effect is being executed. If the bomb effect is being executed, in step S2302, it is determined whether a premonition command has been received as the current start command or stop command. As described above, a premonition command is received during CZ mode when the AT mode transition lottery is won, a premonition command is received as the start command when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process, and a premonition command is received as the stop command when the AT mode transition lottery is held by operating in the first operation mode when a special role is won, and the AT mode transition lottery is won. Even in this case, the premonition game count is set to 0, so the AT mode will start from the game following the game that ends this time.

If a premonition command has been received, step S2303 sets the bomb effect to an explosion effect (Figure 57(b)) in which the bomb image BP changes to an explosion image EP. Then, step S2304 sets the repeat number effect (Figure 58(a)) to be performed when the explosion effect ends, and then, step S2305 sets the AT winning effect (Figure 58(b)) to be performed after the repeat number effect, and then the main stop time CZ effect setting process is terminated.

In contrast, if a premonition command has not been received in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2306, and a misfire effect (Figure 59(a)) is set up so that the bomb image BP is switched to a misfire image NP in this bomb effect. Then, in step S2307, a misfire redisplay effect (Figure 59(b)) is set up so that when the misfire effect ends, the originally displayed tenpai miss eyes or barake eyes are displayed.

If it is determined in step S2308 that the bomb effect has not been executed, or after the processing of step S2307 has been executed, it is determined in step S2308 whether the CZ game number counter provided in the various counter area 183b is 0 or not. The number of games in CZ mode (10) is input to the CZ game number counter when the CZ mode starts. If the CZ game number counter is not 0, the CZ game number counter is decremented by 1 in step S2309, and then this stop time CZ effect setting processing is terminated. In this case, in step S2202 of the start time CZ effect setting processing described above, the CZ game number display is updated so that the remaining game number image GP corresponding to the value of the CZ game number counter decremented in step S2309 is displayed.

If the CZ game number counter is 0 in step S2308, a process is executed in step S2310 to set the CZ mode end effect to be performed, and then the process for setting the CZ effect at the time of stopping is terminated. As shown in FIG. 50(b), the CZ mode end effect is set to an effect that notifies the player that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode has reached 0 and that the CZ mode has ended. Note that if a misfire effect in step S2306 or a miss re-display effect in step S2307 is set, the CZ mode end effect is set to be performed after the misfire effect or miss re-display effect is performed.

<Special role winning game production>
Next, the state of the presentation of the special role winning game in the CZ mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of Fig. 60. Fig. 60 (a1) shows a case where the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game and the AT mode shift lottery is won, and Fig. 60 (b1) shows a case where the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game and the AT mode shift lottery is not won. As already explained, when the special role winning game is operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd small role winning is established and one medal is paid out, while when the special role winning game is operated in the second operation mode, the 1st small role winning to the 6th small role winning are established and eight medals are paid out.

At ta1, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41. Then, a lottery process is carried out based on the start operation of ta1, and if a special role is won, the start time AT lottery process executed at ta1 results in a non-win in the AT mode transition lottery. Also, during CZ mode, the variable display of the number characters in each variable area SP1 to SP3 is started based on the start operation of ta1.

When the first stop ON operation is performed at ta2, as shown in FIG. 60(a2), the number character stops in the left variable area SP1. When the second stop ON operation is performed at ta3, as shown in FIG. 60(a3), the number character stops in the middle variable area SP2. The figure shows a case where the special role tenpai performance lottery process (step S2220) is won, and in FIG. 60(a3), the tenpai performance is performed. When the third stop ON operation is performed at ta4, as shown in FIG. 60(a4), the number character stops in the right variable area SP3 to produce a tenpai miss performance, and the bomb performance is started. These performances in FIG. 60(a2) to FIG. 60(a4) are set in the start time CZ performance setting process, and correspond to the advance performances set before the AT mode transition lottery is performed when the special role is stopped.

As described above, the winning result response process (Figure 37) on the main control device 101 side is executed in step S415 of the reel control process (Figure 22), and is executed after the payout determination process (step S413). In other words, the winning result response process is executed after each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped and the medal payout based on that stop has been completed.

In this case, after the bomb effect is started based on the third stop ON operation at ta4, when the third stop OFF operation is performed at ta5, the medal payout based on the winning of the 33rd minor prize is started. Then, after the medal payout is completed at ta6, the stop time AT lottery process is executed, and as a result, a premonition command is received and the bomb effect is switched to an explosion effect at ta6 (Fig. 60 (a5)). After that, at ta7, the explosion effect is switched to a double number effect (Fig. 60 (a6)), and at ta8, the AT winning effect is executed (Fig. 60 (a7)). In this way, a notification (Fig. 60 (a7)) is made that the AT mode transition lottery has been won in the game started at ta1. In this case, the AT mode will start from the game following that game.

When the second operation mode is used in a special role winning game, as shown in FIG. 60(b1), the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the start operation performed in tb1. Then, based on the first stop ON operation in tb2, a number character stops in the left variable area SP1 (FIG. 60(b2)), based on the second stop ON operation in tb3, a number character stops in the middle variable area SP2 (FIG. 60(b3)), and based on the third stop ON operation in tb4, a number character stops in the right variable area SP3, and a bomb effect is started (FIG. 60(b4)). These effects in FIG. 60(b2) to FIG. 60(b4) are also set in the start time CZ effect setting process, and correspond to advance effects that are set before the AT mode transition lottery is performed when the reels stop based on the special role.

As mentioned above, when the second operation mode is used in a special role winning game, the first to sixth minor role wins, which have a greater number of medals paid out than the 33rd minor role win, are achieved, and eight medals are paid out.

Then, after the third stop OFF operation is performed at tb5, the payout of eight medals based on the first through sixth minor wins is completed at tb7, which is after tb6, when the payout of one medal is completed for the 33rd minor win. In other words, the process for the stop-time AT lottery in the winning result response process is executed at tb7, which is after tb6, and the result of the AT mode transition lottery at the time of the stop can also be known at tb7.

In this case, the bomb effect that started at tb4 switches to a no-bomb effect at tb7, and then a miss re-display effect is performed at tb8, announcing that the result of the AT mode transition lottery for this game was a miss.

A detailed explanation using diagrams will be omitted, but when the first operation mode is used in a special role winning game, if the AT mode transition is not selected in the stop time AT lottery process, it will be determined that the premonition command has not been received in the stop time CZ effect setting process at ta6, in which case the bomb effect will switch to a misfire effect at ta6, and then the miss redisplay effect will be displayed at ta7.

In this embodiment, when the game results in a special combination, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the first operation mode, one medal may be paid out and the AT mode transition lottery, which is one of the processes related to the instruction function, is executed, whereas if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the second operation mode, eight medals, more than the first operation mode, may be paid out and the AT mode transition lottery, which is one of the processes related to the instruction function, is not executed. Therefore, in a game that aims to reduce the loss of medals, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode, and in a game that aims to transition to the AT mode, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode. In this way, the player can select which game to play, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the diverse needs of players.

In addition, in games where a special role is won, a bomb effect corresponding to the special role is set to be performed from the start of the game, and the bomb effect is switched between an explosion effect and a failure effect depending on the result of the AT mode transition lottery that is performed at the end of the special role winning game. This makes it possible to notify the result of the command function processing within the game in which the special role is won, even for special roles in which the presence or absence of processing related to the command function and the execution mode differ depending on the operation mode. This makes it possible to prevent the notification of the result of the command function processing from being carried over to the next game or later, making it possible to dramatically increase the attention to the result notification in each game as a so-called full notification type notification mode.

In particular, in this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during CZ mode, the AT mode is set to start from the game following the game in which the transition lottery was won. Therefore, even if the AT mode transition lottery is won as a result of a special combination, it is possible to notify the player of the AT mode transition win and start the AT mode from the next game. Therefore, there is no need to delay the start timing of the AT mode due to game results or the convenience of the notifying party, and smooth gameplay can be achieved while simplifying processing.

Because the process for the stop-time AT lottery is executed after the medal payout has been completed, the period from when the third stop OFF operation is performed to when the process for the stop-time AT lottery is performed will be different depending on whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode in a special role winning game or in the second operation mode in a special role winning game. That is, in the case where the bomb effect is started by the third stop ON operation as in Fig. 57 (a1) and Fig. 57 (a2), the period from the third stop OFF operation as in Fig. 57 (b2) to the occurrence of the explosion effect as in Fig. 57 (b1) is the A period (from ta5 to ta6 in Fig. 60) until the completion of the payout of one medal based on the winning of the 33rd small prize, whereas in the case where the explosion effect is started by the third stop ON operation, the period from the third stop OFF operation as in Fig. 59 (b2) to the occurrence of the misfire effect as in Fig. 59 (b1) is the B period (from tb5 to tb6 in Fig. 60) until the completion of the payout of eight medals based on the winning of the 1st small prize to the winning of the 6th small prize, and the B period is set to be longer than the A period. In this case, the timing at which the bomb effect switches to the explosion effect on the AT mode transition winning side arrives earlier than the timing at which it switches to the misfire effect on the AT mode transition non-winning side. By doing this, when performing the AT mode transition winning side performance, it is possible to guarantee the time to perform the AT winning performance, in addition to the double number performance using each variable area SP1 to SP3.

As described above, in this embodiment, the bomb effect can occur not only in the special role winning game, but also when the bomb effect lottery process (step S2211) when the AT mode transition is won or the bomb effect lottery process (step S2219) when the AT mode transition is not won, and when the bomb effect is being performed, the waiting period from the third stop OFF operation to the stop time CZ effect setting process is performed varies in length depending on the game lottery result.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61, the waiting period from when the third stop OFF operation is performed in the special role winning game until the stop time CZ effect setting process is performed is period A, which corresponds to the period during which one medal is paid out in the first operation mode, and is more specifically about 0.5 sec. In contrast, the above waiting period in the special role winning game is period B, which corresponds to the period during which eight medals are paid out in the second operation mode and is longer than period A, and is more specifically about 4.0 sec.

The waiting period in the watermelon winning game is the period during which three medals are paid out, which is period C, which is longer than period A and shorter than period B, and more specifically, is approximately 1.5 seconds.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period in which the same number of bets are set as the number of bets on the game in which the normal lip A to C is won in the replay process based on the winning of the normal lip A to C, and the period in which the same number of bets are set as the number of bets on the game in which the chance eye A to C or the cherry A to C is won in the replay process based on the winning of the chance eye A to C or the cherry A to C are set to be different from each other, and the betting period in the normal lip A to C is set to be longer than the betting period in the chance eye A to C or the cherry A to C. In addition, the betting period for the chance eye A to C or the cherry A to C is set to be the same length as the period in which the same number of medals are paid out. In this way, it is possible to give the impression that the specific combination such as the chance eye A to C or the cherry A to C formed by the replay result is treated the same as a small combination result in which medals are paid out, such as watermelon, and to give the impression that it is a different result from the replay result such as the normal lip A to C.

The above waiting period in the normal Rip A to C winning games corresponds to the period in which three bets are made, and is period D, which is longer than period C and shorter than period B in the watermelon winning game, and is more specifically approximately 3.0 sec.

The above-mentioned waiting period in the Chance Eyes A-C and Cherry A-C winning games is the same length as the period in which three medals are paid out, even if three bets are made, and is the same length as the above-mentioned C period in the Watermelon winning game, specifically about 1.5 seconds.

All of these periods A through C are periods during which the bomb effect may transition to an explosion effect. By taking advantage of the fact that the time required to pay out medals and the time required to set a bet in the replay process differ depending on the game result, the time until the explosion effect occurs is diversified, making it possible to appropriately increase the sense of anticipation for the explosion effect to occur.

Then, the A period of the first operation mode in the special role winning game is the most likely to cause an explosion effect, followed by the C period of the watermelon winning game, the chance eyes A-C, and the cherry A-C winning game, and then the D period of the normal lip A-C winning game, and the B period of the second operation mode in the special role winning game is set so that an explosion effect does not occur. Furthermore, the A period is the shortest, followed by the C period, the D period, and the B period, in that order. This allows players to expect an explosion effect to occur sooner, but also allows them to expect an explosion effect to occur at least until the D period, making it possible to suitably increase the attention given to the explosion effect.

Furthermore, in relation to the push order bell winning game, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operating sequence corresponding to the first to sixth minor prize winnings, eight medals are paid out, so the above-mentioned waiting period becomes period B. In this case, since it is set so that the AT mode transition lottery is not won when the push order bell is won (FIG. 30), there is no need to switch to the AT winning notification performance after period B has elapsed, and it is possible to avoid the discomfort and increased processing load that would occur if the performance was forcibly performed in a short period of time.

In addition, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an incorrect operation sequence that does not correspond to the first to sixth small wins, one medal will be paid out or no medal will be paid out, and the above-mentioned waiting period will be 0 or period A. In other words, even during period A in which one medal is paid out, if no small wins are achieved or if the ninth to 32nd small wins are achieved instead of the 33rd small win, no explosion effect will occur, so attention can be paid to the stop results, and it is possible to encourage the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode so that the 33rd small win will be achieved.

<About the number of premonition games>
Next, the effects during the premonition mode set based on the premonition command will be described. The premonition mode is a mode in which, when the AT mode shift lottery or the CZ mode shift lottery is won, a premonition effect suggesting that the shift lottery has been won can be executed in each game, and is set so that the notification of the AT mode shift win or the CZ mode shift win is made in the game in which the set premonition game number is 0.

As already explained, the number of premonition games is determined in the premonition game number lottery process (step S817, step S1320) when the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is won in the start-time AT lottery process or stop-time AT lottery process on the main control device 101 side. And, as mentioned above, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during CZ mode, the number of premonition games is set to 0 games.

Here, we will explain in detail the number of premonition games during normal mode with reference to Figure 62.

As described above, the number of premonition games is set to be selected from 0 to 40 games. In this embodiment, the number of premonition games that is likely to be selected is set to be different when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process and when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the stop AT lottery process. Also, the number of premonition games that is likely to be selected is set to be different when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process and when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the stop AT lottery process. Furthermore, the number of premonition games that is likely to be selected is different when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process and when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process, and the number of premonition games that is likely to be selected is set to be different when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the stop AT lottery process and when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the stop AT lottery process.

Specifically, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the start-time AT lottery process, either 1 to 5 games or 15 to 40 games are set as the premonition game number, whereas if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the stop-time AT lottery process, either 1 to 12 games are set as the premonition game number. Also, if the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the start-time AT lottery process, either 1 to 32 games are set as the premonition game number, whereas if the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the stop-time AT lottery process, either 1 to 7 games are set as the premonition game number.

In the stop time AT lottery process, the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is won only when the first operation mode is operated when a special role is won, and it is highly likely that the player clearly understands the special role winning game that triggered the transition win. In contrast, in the start time AT lottery process, the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is won when a specific role is won, but since chance eyes A to C and cherries A to C are composed of replay results, there is no miss, and the presence or absence of miss does not affect the result of the transition lottery, so the player may miss the specific role winning game that triggered the transition win. Furthermore, with regard to the CZ mode transition lottery, it is difficult to determine which game the CZ mode transition win was made in, since it is possible for the transition to be won not only by a specific role but also by normal rips A to C. Therefore, by making it easier to select a relatively long number of premonition games in the start AT lottery process, where there is a possibility that the player will not realize that they have won the transition, it is possible to give the impression that the transition to the AT mode or CZ mode can be won under any circumstances, and it is possible to provide a sense of surprise when the transition win is announced, and by doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the level of attention for each game in the normal mode. Conversely, by making it easier to select a number of premonition games determined in the stop AT lottery process, which is triggered by a special role, that is shorter than the number of premonition games determined in the start AT lottery process, it is possible to shorten the period from when it is realized that the transition lottery that is easy to win has been executed to when the result is announced, and to prevent stagnation in the middle of the game.

In addition, when comparing the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won with the case where the CZ mode transition lottery is won, the number of premonition games set is set to be longer when the AT mode transition lottery is won, regardless of whether it is the start-time AT lottery process or the stop-time AT lottery process. By doing this, players who understand that they are in a premonition mode from the premonition effects of each game will want the premonition mode to continue as long as possible, making it possible to increase the proportion of games that draw attention by taking advantage of players' expectations for the AT mode.

In particular, the number of premonition games set when the AT mode transition is selected in the start AT lottery process and the number of premonition games set when the CZ mode transition is selected in the start AT lottery process are set so that when the CZ mode transition is selected, the number of premonition games is set to up to 32 games, whereas when the AT mode transition is selected, the number of premonition games can be set to 33 or more games. By doing this, players who realize that they are in the premonition mode will pay attention to each of the effects during the premonition mode with the hope that it will continue for 33 games or more, making it possible to appropriately increase the attention paid to each effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is not won, a premonition effect that is the same as or similar to the effect during the premonition mode is executed, and a pseudo premonition mode is set in which no notification is given that the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery has been won.

The number of games in the pseudo premonition mode is set to be selected from 1 to 6 games or 10 to 18 games. In this case, if the premonition effect continues for 19 games or more, it is confirmed that the premonition mode is based on winning the AT mode transition or CZ mode transition. Therefore, players who realize from the premonition effect that they are in the premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode will want the mode to continue for 19 games or more, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to each game.

Then, in the start-time AT lottery process and stop-time AT lottery process in the main control device 101, the number of premonition games is determined based on the premonition game number table set as described above, and a premonition command including information on that number of premonition games is output to the display control device 81.

The following describes the processing performed by the display control device 81: the start premonition effect setting processing, the stop premonition effect setting processing, and the game count management processing.

<Start time premonition effect setting process>
First, the start-time premonition effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 63. The start-time premonition effect setting process is a process executed in step S2008 in the start-time effect setting process (Fig. 48).

In step S2401, it is determined whether the current display mode is normal mode. If it is CZ mode or AT mode, or if it is in the normal section, the start-time premonition effect setting process ends. If it is normal mode, the process proceeds to step S2402.

In step S2402, it is determined whether the sub-side premonition counter provided in the various counter area 183b is a value greater than 0. The sub-side premonition counter is a counter into which a value equivalent to the number of premonition games is input when premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode is set, and which is decremented by one each time a game is played. In other words, the process of step S2402 is a process of determining whether or not the game is in premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode.

If the sub-side premonition counter is 0 and it is determined that the game is not in premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode, in step S2403, it is determined whether or not a premonition command has been received as the start command for this game. If a premonition command has not been received, in step S2404, a pseudo premonition lottery process is executed. The pseudo premonition lottery process is a process for determining by lottery whether or not to set the above-mentioned pseudo premonition mode. In the pseudo premonition lottery process, a table for the pseudo premonition lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to set the pseudo premonition mode according to the lottery result of this game. In the pseudo premonition lottery table in this embodiment, the less likely the result is to appear as the lottery result of each game, the more likely it is to win the pseudo premonition lottery. For example, it is set so that chance eye A is more likely to win the pseudo premonition lottery than chance eye C. In other words, if you are likely to win the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery but end up losing these transition lotteries, it is set up so that you are likely to enter the pseudo premonition mode.

After executing the pseudo premonition lottery process, in step S2405 it is determined whether or not the pseudo premonition lottery has been won, and if not, the start-time premonition performance setting process is terminated. If the pseudo premonition lottery has been won, in step S2406 a process is executed to set a pseudo premonition flag in the various flags storage area 183a, and in step S2407 a pseudo premonition game number lottery process is executed. In the pseudo premonition game number lottery process, the game number table (Figure 62) for the pseudo premonition mode described above is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and the number of premonition games in the current pseudo premonition mode is determined by lottery.

On the other hand, if a premonition command is received in a situation other than the premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode in step S2403, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, it is determined whether the received premonition command is triggered by winning the AT mode transition lottery. If the premonition command is not output as a result of winning the AT mode transition lottery, but is triggered by winning the CZ mode transition lottery, in step S2409, a process is executed to set a sub-side CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 183a. On the other hand, if the premonition command is triggered by winning the AT mode transition lottery, in step S2410, a process is executed to set a sub-side AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 183a. After executing the process of step S2409 or step S2410, in step S2411, a process is executed to grasp the information on the number of premonition games set in the received premonition command.

After executing the pseudo premonition game number lottery process in step S2407, or after executing the process of determining the premonition game number for the premonition mode in step S2411, a process of inputting a value equivalent to the premonition game number for the pseudo premonition mode or the premonition mode into the sub-side premonition counter is executed in step S2412. This process results in a positive judgment in step S2402 of the next game.

After executing the process of step S2412, in step S2413, it is determined whether the number of games entered in step S2412 is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games (8 games). If it is equal to or less than 8 games, in step S2414, a process is executed to set the first premonition mode presentation as the premonition presentation in the current premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode, and then this start-time premonition presentation setting process is terminated. In the first premonition mode presentation in this embodiment, a continuous presentation is set that continues for a maximum of a predetermined number of games (8 games), and for example, a presentation is set in which the main character sets out on a journey in search of an enemy character. Then, the destination of the main character is determined according to the remaining number of premonition games, and a notification is made as to whether or not the main character will encounter an enemy character in each game. In a game in which the premonition game number is 0, if it is the premonition mode, a state in which an enemy character is encountered and a battle between them is started is displayed, and if it is the pseudo premonition mode, a state in which the search is given up without encountering an enemy character is displayed.

If it is determined in step S2413 that the number of premonition games is greater than the predetermined number of games, it is determined in step S2415 whether the sub-side AT mode winning flag is set. If the sub-side AT mode winning flag is not set and the premonition mode is triggered by the CZ mode transition winning or the pseudo premonition mode, in step S2416, a process is executed to set the second premonition mode performance as the premonition performance in the current premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode, and then this start-time premonition performance setting process is terminated. In the second premonition mode performance in this embodiment, a continuous performance is set that continues for at least a number of games greater than the predetermined number of games (8 games), and for example, a performance is set in which the main character trains for a battle with an enemy character. Then, the training content of the main character is determined according to the remaining number of premonition games, and the state of the determined training is displayed, and a notification is made as to whether a battle with an enemy character will start in each game. In a game where the premonition game count is 0, if the premonition mode is selected, the game will show the start of a battle with an enemy character, and if the pseudo-premonition mode is selected, the game will show the main character getting injured during training and giving up on the battle with the enemy character.

If it is determined in step S2415 that the sub-side AT mode winning flag is set, the current premonition mode is a premonition mode triggered by an AT mode transition winning, and the number of premonition games is greater than the predetermined number of games, the process proceeds to step S2417. In step S2417, a third premonition lottery process is executed.

In this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned first and second premonition mode effects, a third premonition mode effect is set as an effect during the premonition mode, which, when selected, confirms that the player has won the AT mode transition. In the third premonition mode effect in this embodiment, a continuous effect is set that continues for at least a number of games greater than a predetermined number of games (8 games), and, for example, an effect is set in which the main character is shown planning a strategy in a small room in preparation for a battle with an enemy character. Then, depending on the number of remaining premonition games, the main character is shown coming up with a strategy or thinking about it, and a notification is given as to whether or not a battle with an enemy character will start in each game. In a game in which the number of premonition games is 0, the start of a battle with an enemy character is displayed.

In step S2417, whether or not to set the third premonition mode effect is determined by lottery. In this embodiment, the winning probability of the third premonition lottery process is set to differ depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process in the main processing of the main control device 101, and the higher the setting, the more likely the third premonition mode effect will occur, such as setting 6 having the highest winning probability and setting 1 having the lowest winning probability.

After executing the third premonition lottery process in step S2417, it is determined in step S2418 whether or not the third premonition lottery process has been won, and if the third premonition lottery process has not been won, a process to set the second premonition mode presentation is executed in step S2416, and then this start-time premonition presentation setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the third premonition lottery process has been won, a process to set the third premonition mode presentation is executed in step S2719, and then this start-time premonition presentation setting process is terminated.

As described above, the various effects of the premonition mode are set based on receiving a premonition command, and the various effects of the pseudo premonition mode are set by winning the pseudo premonition lottery when the premonition mode is not in effect. Then, in a game that is started in a situation where the sub-side premonition counter is determined to be greater than 0 in step S2402 and the premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode has already been set, the process proceeds to step S2420, where it is determined whether the pseudo premonition flag is set or not, thereby determining whether the mode is premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode.

If it is in the pseudo premonition mode, proceed to step S2421 to determine whether or not a premonition command has been received as the start command for the current game. If a premonition command has been received and the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery has been won during the pseudo premonition mode, the pseudo premonition flag is cleared in step S2422, and then proceed to step S2408. In this case, a process is executed (steps S2408 to S2419) to change the presentation content of the pseudo premonition mode to the presentation content of the premonition mode.

If it is determined in step S2420 that the mode is premonition mode and not pseudo premonition mode, or if in step S2421 that the mode is pseudo premonition mode but a premonition command has not been received as the start command for the current game, the process proceeds to step S2423, where the sub-side premonition counter is decremented by 1. Then, in step S2424, a process is executed to set the premonition effect corresponding to the value of the sub-side premonition counter to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64, and then this start premonition effect setting process is terminated.

<Stop Premonition Effects Setting Processing>
Next, the stop time premonition effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 64. The stop time premonition effect setting process is a process executed in step S2114 in the full stop time effect setting process (Fig. 49).

In step S2501, as in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the game is in normal mode. If the game is in CZ mode, AT mode, or in the normal section, the process for setting the premonition effect at the time of stopping is terminated. If the game is in normal mode, in step S2502, it is determined whether or not the sub-side premonition counter is greater than 0, and it is determined whether or not the game is already in premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode. If the sub-side premonition counter is 0, in step S2503, it is determined whether or not a premonition command has been received as a stop command for the current game. If not, the process for setting the premonition effect at the time of stopping is terminated. In other words, the process for setting the premonition effect at the time of stopping does not include a process for setting the pseudo premonition mode. In this way, by leaving the setting of the pseudo premonition mode to the process for setting the premonition effect at the time of starting, it is possible to eliminate duplication of processes and simplify the process configuration.

If a premonition command has been received, proceed to step S2504. As already explained, a premonition command is output as a stop command when the player operates in the first operation mode in a special role winning game and wins the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery. In this case, in step S2504, it is determined whether the premonition command is based on the AT mode transition lottery, that is, whether the player operates in the first operation mode when the special role is won and wins the AT mode transition lottery among the processing related to the instruction function. If the player operates in the first operation mode but does not win the AT mode transition lottery and wins the CZ mode transition lottery among the processing related to the instruction function, the sub-side CZ mode winning flag is set in step S2505. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, the sub-side AT mode winning flag is set in step S2506. After the processing in step S2505 or step S2506 is executed, the number of premonition games is grasped in step S2507.

After grasping the number of premonition games, in steps S2508 to S2515, similar to the processing in steps S2512 to S2519 described above, the number of premonition games is input to the sub-side premonition counter, and if the number of premonition games is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, the first premonition mode presentation is performed, and if it is greater than the predetermined number of games, the second premonition mode presentation or the third premonition mode presentation is performed, and then the premonition presentation setting process at the time of stopping is terminated. Note that in this embodiment, the winning probability of the third premonition lottery process in step S2513 and the winning probability of the third premonition lottery process in step S2417 are set to be different, and specifically, in step S2513, the lower the setting, the easier it is to win the third premonition lottery, and in step S2417, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the third premonition lottery. By doing this, when predicting the setting value, it becomes necessary to know whether the AT mode transition lottery in the start AT lottery process or the AT mode transition lottery in the stop AT lottery process has been won, making it possible to appropriately increase the attention to the lottery results of each game. Also, by doing this, it becomes possible to average the occurrence rate of the third premonition mode performance by the setting value when combining the start and stop times.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the sub-side premonition counter is greater than 0, it is determined in step S2516 whether or not the pseudo premonition flag is set. If it is set, it is determined in step S2517 whether or not a premonition command has been received as a stop command for the current game, and if it has been received, the pseudo premonition flag is cleared in step S2518, and then the process of changing from pseudo premonition mode to premonition mode is executed in steps S2504 to S2515. If it is not pseudo premonition mode in step S2516, or if a premonition command has not been received in step S2517, this stop premonition performance setting process is terminated.

<Game Number Management Processing>
Next, the game number management process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 65. The game number management process is a process executed in step S2115 in the full stop time presentation setting process (Fig. 49), and executes a process of updating the display of the number of games played after the transition to the advantageous zone in the auxiliary display unit 65, and setting the presentation when the ceiling game number is reached.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the mode is normal or CZ. If the mode is AT or in the normal zone, the process for setting the premonition effect at the time of stopping is terminated. If the mode is normal or CZ, in step S2602, a process for incrementing the sub-side game number counter provided in the various counter areas 183b by 1 is executed. The sub-side game number counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games from the transition to the favorable zone until the AT mode is started, and is a counter that is cleared to 0 when the transition to the AT mode occurs or the favorable zone ends. In the following step S2603, a process for updating the game number display is executed. Specifically, a process for updating the display of the number of games after the transition to the favorable zone (favorable zone game number image AP, see FIG. 66) displayed in a predetermined area of the auxiliary display unit 65 according to the value of the sub-side game number counter in step S2602 is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a transition to a favorable zone occurs, a ceiling game number is set, and when the number of games played according to a specific prescribed number reaches this ceiling game number, the AT mode winning flag is set without going through an AT mode transition lottery (see FIG. 31, start-time AT lottery processing). In this embodiment, the ceiling game number is set to a maximum of 700 games, and transition to the AT mode is confirmed when at least 700 games have been played (FIG. 66(a)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the process of decrementing the ceiling counter according to the completion of each game is performed, a subtraction value lottery process (step S1304) is executed, and a number greater than 1 may be decremented. In this subtraction value lottery process, a large subtraction value is particularly likely to be selected in response to a special role (FIG. 39). However, even in a game in which a special role is won, if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the subtraction value lottery process is executed, but if the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the subtraction value lottery process is not executed and the ceiling counter is not decremented in that game.

In other words, when the first operation mode is used in a special role winning game, as shown in FIG. 66(b), after the transition to the favorable zone at t0, a subtraction value greater than 1 is selected and subtracted from the ceiling counter at t1 or t2, resulting in the ceiling counter becoming 0 in fewer games than 700 games at t4 (t3). In contrast, when the second operation mode is used in a special role winning game, as shown in FIG. 66(c), after the transition to the favorable zone at t0, the ceiling counter is not subtracted in the special role winning games such as t1 and t2, so that even at t4 when the actual number of games played reaches 700, the ceiling counter does not become 0, and becomes 0 at t5, which is later.

In other words, when operating in the second operation mode, even if the display of the number of games after the transition to the advantageous zone (advantageous zone game count image AP) reaches the maximum ceiling number of games of 700, the AT mode winning flag may not be set.

In the game count management process, after executing the process of step S2603, it is determined in step S2604 whether or not a subtraction value command has been received as a stop command for the current game. If a subtraction value command has been received, in step S2605 the current subtraction value is determined from the subtraction value command, and the absolute value of the subtraction value is added to the sub-side ceiling counter of the various counter area 183b. Incidentally, as described above, in a special role winning game, a subtraction value command is output from the main control device 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, and a subtraction value command is not output when they are operated in the second operation mode.

If it is determined in step S2604 that a subtraction value command has not been received, or after executing the processing of step S2605, p determines in step S2606 whether the sub-side game number counter has reached a value equivalent to the ceiling game number. Specifically, if the ceiling game number is set to 700, a positive determination is made in step S2606 when the sub-side game number counter updated in step S2602 reaches 700. If the sub-side game number counter is different from the ceiling game number, the game number management processing is terminated.

As described above, the sub-side game number counter is cleared to 0 when a transition to AT mode occurs or when the advantageous zone ends. When a positive judgment is made in step S2606 and the sub-side game number counter reaches the ceiling game number, this means that the game has been played for the ceiling game number, but a transition to AT mode has not yet occurred. In this case, in step S2607, it is judged whether the sub-side AT mode winning flag or the sub-side CZ mode winning flag is set. When either winning flag is set, this means that the ceiling counter on the main control device 101 side has reached 0 and been set to premonition mode, or that a CZ mode transition lottery has been won. In this case, a positive judgment is made in step S2607, and the game number management process ends as is.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2607, and it is judged that the ceiling game number has been consumed but the sub-side AT mode winning flag or the sub-side CZ mode winning flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S2608, where a process is executed to calculate the difference between the ceiling game number (700) and the sub-side ceiling counter. In other words, for example, when a special role is won, the number of games that has not been subtracted from the ceiling game number is determined by operating in the second operation mode (see FIG. 66 (c)). This makes it possible to know how many games are required to reach the ceiling.

After executing the process of step S2608, in step S2609, a process is executed to set the pseudo premonition flag. Then, in step S2610, a process is executed to input the actual number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached, which was determined in step S2608, into the sub-side premonition counter. In other words, in this case, the pseudo premonition mode is set to cover the actual number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached.

Then, in step S2611, it is determined whether the actual number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached is a predetermined number of games (8 games) or less. If it is less than the predetermined number of games, in step S2612, a process is executed to set the premonition effect in the pseudo premonition mode as a first premonition mode effect, and then this game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the actual number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached is greater than the predetermined number of games, a process is executed to set the premonition effect in this pseudo premonition mode as a third premonition mode effect, and then this game number management process is terminated.

In this case, the ceiling counter becomes 0 on the main control device 101 side, and the AT mode winning flag is set and a premonition command is output. Then, in the above-mentioned start-time premonition performance setting process, a process for rewriting the pseudo premonition mode to the premonition mode (steps S2420 to S2422, steps S2408 to S2419) is executed, and when the number of premonition games based on reaching the ceiling is played, a transition to the AT mode occurs.

In this embodiment, the ceiling number of games is set to 700, the probability of winning a special role is about 1 in 20, and on average, about 35 games in which a special role is won will occur before the ceiling number of games is reached. In this case, if the second operation mode is always used in the games in which a special role is won, on average, 35 deductions will not occur before 700 games have been played, and the actual number of games remaining before the ceiling number is reached when 700 games have been played will be an average of 35 games.

As shown in FIG. 62, the number of premonition games when the ceiling is reached is set to be a relatively short number of games, between 1 and 5. In contrast, the number of premonition games when the AT mode transition is selected, which is set in the start-time AT lottery process, is set to be a maximum of 40 games.

In other words, even if the second operation mode is used every time a special role is won until the ceiling game number is reached, when 700 games are reached and the pseudo premonition mode is started, the actual ceiling is reached, and the premonition game number based on reaching the ceiling is set, the premonition game number will likely be within 40 games. By doing this, it becomes easier to perform premonition effects including the pseudo premonition mode until the actual ceiling is reached, within the range of premonition effects based on the normal AT mode transition win, making it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable, and since there is not as much need to store dedicated effect data, it is also possible to reduce the amount of stored data.

In addition, in the pseudo premonition mode when the ceiling number of games is reached, a third premonition mode presentation is set, which would normally confirm that the premonition mode is a winning AT mode transition lottery. This makes it possible to effectively ease the player's disappointment when the AT mode does not start even though the ceiling number of games has been reached, by using the presentation that would normally confirm the AT mode.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When operated in the first operation mode, the first benefit is awarded and the processing related to the instruction function is executed as the first processing, and when operated in the second operation mode, a second benefit more advantageous than the first benefit is awarded and a special role is set in which the processing related to the instruction function is executed as the second processing less advantageous than the first processing, and a notification corresponding to the result of the processing related to the instruction function executed in the game in which the special role is won is executed during the game. More specifically, when a special role is won during the CZ mode, a notification corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the special role is executed at the end of the game in which the special role is won. In this way, when an AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, the number of premonition games is set to 0, and the AT mode is started from the game next to the game in which the transition was won, the special role can be applied even in a completely notified type of game, and even if an AT mode transition lottery triggered by a special role is won, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as the AT mode transition winning not being notified before the AT mode starts when starting the AT mode from the next game.

In addition, by doing this, even if a special role triggers a win to transition to AT mode, it is possible to start the AT mode quickly (with the shortest possible number of premonition games being 0) just like with other results, making it possible to ideally apply special roles, in which processing related to the instruction function can only be performed at the end of a game, to existing games.

When a special role is won, if the first operation mode is used, the stop time AT lottery process is set to have a high probability of winning the AT mode transition, while if the second operation mode is used, the AT mode transition is not won. In this way, by making the process related to the instruction function executed according to the operation mode when a special role is won two extremes, it is possible to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 more carefully in the game in which the special role is won.

When a special role is won during CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery when the game is operated in the first operation mode is set to have a 50% probability of winning the AT mode transition, and approximately half of the triggers for the AT mode transition during CZ mode are set to be special roles. In other words, if the AT mode transition win is triggered by a special role, even in CZ mode, if the AT mode transition win is notified or the AT mode is started after several games, approximately half of the transitions to the AT mode may be configured to have such a drawn-out performance. In this regard, by using the above configuration, it is possible to more quickly carry out the AT mode transition lottery and the AT mode transition for the AT mode transition triggered by a special role, which is relatively easy to occur, and it is possible to progress in the game more smoothly.

In the AT mode, when the push order bell is won, a push order notification effect occurs, which makes it possible to achieve the first to sixth minor prizes, and this push order notification effect is executed as a start effect based on the operation of the start lever 41. In other words, if the push order bell is won in the first game of the AT mode, the push order notification effect occurs as a start effect of the first game. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player of the AT mode transition win in the game even if it is a special role winning game, so that in a configuration in which the AT mode starts from the next game, the player is notified of the AT mode transition win in advance before the push order notification effect is executed.

During CZ mode, the winning or losing of the AT mode transition lottery is notified by the effect of whether or not the number characters in each game are repeated, and a Tenpai effect is set as an effect with a high expectation of winning the AT mode transition lottery by getting a repeat number in such an effect, and the Tenpai effect occurs before the end of the game and after the first stop operation which is the branching timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode when a special role is won. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the effect of building excitement in advance in notifying the winning or losing of the AT mode transition lottery at the end of each game in CZ mode, while making it difficult to decide whether to operate in the first operation mode or the second operation mode depending on whether or not the Tenpai effect occurs.

The AT mode transition lottery when a special role is won is executed in the stop time AT lottery process, and this stop time AT lottery process is configured to be executed after the operation of all stop switches 42 to 44 is completed. In other words, if it is intended to notify the result of the AT mode transition lottery based on the special role in the game, the notification must be made after the operation of all stop switches 42 to 44 is completed and before the bet operation for the next game is made, and the timing for executing the notification is extremely limited. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to increase attention to the presentation of each game by encouraging people to anticipate the double-digit presentation in advance using a ready-to-play presentation, etc.

The above-mentioned Tenpai effect is likely to occur when the AT mode transition is won, but it can also occur when the AT mode transition is not won. By doing this, even if the Tenpai effect is executed in a situation where the AT mode transition lottery has not yet been executed in a game in which a special role is won, it is possible to build up anticipation for the AT mode transition being won when the Tenpai effect occurs, while avoiding any inconsistencies in the event that the subsequent AT mode transition lottery is not won.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned Tenpai effect is set to occur easily not only in the special role winning game, but also when the AT mode transition is won in the start-time AT lottery process. By doing so, it is possible to increase the rate at which the Tenpai effect leads to an AT mode transition win, and it is possible to build up a sense of anticipation when the Tenpai effect occurs, even if the AT mode transition lottery has not yet been executed in the special role winning game.

<Modification 1>
As described above, in the special role in which the processing related to the instruction function is executed as the first processing when operated in the first operation mode, and the processing related to the instruction function is executed as the second processing when operated in the second operation mode, in this embodiment, the first processing is set to execute the AT mode transition lottery, and the second processing is set not to execute the AT mode transition lottery. Due to such a difference in processing, it is possible to start the performance corresponding to the first processing of the first processing and the second processing being performed without waiting for the result of the first processing. Therefore, in this modified example, at the timing when it becomes possible to determine that the operation was performed in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, the performance corresponding to the processing related to the instruction function when operated in the first operation mode is started.

Specifically, as described above, in the special role winning game, the first operation mode is when the left reel 32L is stopped first and the stop operation is performed from the timing when the No. 5 "REPLAY" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle row to the timing when the No. 9 "BAR" symbol reaches the middle row on the left reel 32L. The second operation mode is when the center reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first, or when the left reel 32L is stopped first but the operation is performed at a timing outside the above range (FIG. 24). In this case, it can be said that it is possible to determine whether the first operation mode has been performed at the time when the first stop ON operation is performed in the special role winning game. Therefore, in the modified example, when the first stop ON operation is performed, a notification for the AT mode transition lottery that is executed based on the first operation mode is started.

Figure 67 (a) is a flowchart showing the first stop ON time effect setting process in this modified example. The first stop ON time effect setting process is executed as one process of the effect setting process at each stop operation (step S1708) in the effect setting process (Figure 47) of the display control device 81, and is executed when a command corresponding to the first stop ON operation is received from the main control device 101.

In step S2701, it is determined whether the game being played is a special role winning game. If it is a special role winning game, it is determined in step S2702 whether it is the first operation mode. In other words, it is determined whether the first stop ON operation executed this time was an operation to stop the left reel 32L first and to stop the left reel 32L from the timing when the No. 5 "REPLAY" symbol reaches the middle row to the timing when the No. 9 "BAR" symbol reaches the middle row.

If it is the first operation mode, in step S2703, it is determined whether the sub-side CZ flag is set, thereby checking whether the current game is in CZ mode. If it is in CZ mode, in step S2704, it is determined whether the effect set for the current game is the barakeme effect. If the special role winning game is not won in the Tenpai effect lottery process (step S2223) executed at the start of the game, and the barakeme effect is set instead of the Tenpai effect, the process proceeds to step S2705, and a process is executed to change the set barakeme effect to the Tenpai Geraseme effect, and then the first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated.

In this case, the number character stopped in the middle variable area SP2 should be the same as the number character stopped this time in the left variable area SP1, and the barrage effect should be modified to a Tenpai Out of 100 effect. If the left variable area SP1 and the right variable area SP3 are set to have the same number characters in the set barrage effect, the number character stopped in the middle variable area SP2 should be modified to the same number character stopped in the left variable area SP1, and the number character that was scheduled to be stopped in the right variable area SP3 should be modified to a different number character from the number character stopped in the left variable area SP1. If a negative judgment is made in steps S2701 to S2704, the first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated as it is.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), even if the scatter effect is set in the special role winning game in the CZ mode, if the first stop ON operation corresponds to the first operation mode, as shown in FIG. 67(c1), the number character that stops in the middle variable area SP2 based on the next second stop ON operation becomes the same as the number character already stopped in the left variable area SP, and the tenpai effect is performed at the time of the second stop ON operation. This makes it possible to stimulate the expectation that the doublet effect will be performed in the current game and the fact that the AT mode transition has been won will be notified, and the player's attention can be appropriately increased. However, even in this case, the tenpai miss effect is performed instead of the doublet effect at the time of the third stop ON operation, and then the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified through the bomb effect.

In contrast, if the first stop ON operation does not correspond to the first operation mode but corresponds to the second operation mode, as shown in FIG. 67 (c2), the number characters stopped in the medium variation area SP2 are not modified, so the variation is executed as is.

By doing this, even if a special role has different processing contents related to the instruction function depending on the operation mode, it is possible to start the performance corresponding to the processing related to the instruction function before the stop operation is completed.

In particular, since the above only modifies the barrage effect to a tenpai out of line effect, even if the AT mode transition lottery in the subsequent stop-time AT lottery process results in a non-winning result, a repeat effect will not occur despite the non-winning AT mode transition lottery. Therefore, to the extent that no inconsistencies in the presentation arise, it is possible to start the presentation corresponding to the AT mode transition lottery in the stop-time AT lottery process before the transition lottery is executed.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, when the AT mode shift lottery is won in the CZ mode, the notification that the AT mode shift lottery has been won in the game is not necessarily made. Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the start time AT lottery process in this modified example.

In this modified example, the processing performed when it is determined in step S2809 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won during CZ mode differs from the processing performed in the above embodiment, and the other processing (steps S2801 to S2820) is the same as the corresponding processing (steps S801 to S820).

That is, in step S2809, if it is determined that the AT mode transition lottery has been won during the CZ mode (step S2808: YES, step S2809: YES), in step S2821, it is determined whether the CZ game counter is greater than a predetermined number (3) and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is greater than a predetermined number. If the number is greater than the predetermined number, in step S2822, a delayed lottery process is executed. The delayed lottery process is a process for determining by lottery whether or not to notify the fact that the AT mode transition lottery has been won in the game when the AT mode transition lottery has been won. For example, the probability of winning the delayed lottery may be different depending on the lottery result that triggered the AT mode transition win, and the delayed lottery may be more likely to be won in the case where the AT mode transition win is triggered by a lottery result with a high occurrence rate of each game, such as Chance Eye A being more likely to win the delayed lottery than the case where the AT mode transition win is triggered by a lottery result with a low occurrence rate. Also, the more games remaining in the CZ mode, the easier it is to win the delayed lottery.

After executing the delayed lottery process in step S2822, it is determined in step S2823 whether or not the delayed lottery has been won. If it has been won, a process to set the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S2824, and then a process to set a delay flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S2825, and then the start-time AT lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is equal to or less than a predetermined number in step S2821, or if it is determined in step S2823 that the delayed lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2810, where the CZ mode is terminated and a process to set the mode to a premonition mode with 0 games is executed, and then the start-time AT lottery process is terminated.

In other words, if the delayed lottery is won, the AT mode winning flag is set, but the CZ mode does not end, the premonition mode for game 0 is not set, and the corresponding premonition command is not output, so the display control device 81 does not notify the player of the AT winning in this game, and continues to execute the presentation in CZ mode.

However, as mentioned above, even if the CZ mode is not ended, since the AT mode winning flag is set, a positive judgment is made in step S606 in the lottery result response processing for the next game (Figure 28), and the continuation judgment processing or AT addition processing is executed instead of the start-time AT lottery processing. However, since the AT mode has not started, the continuation judgment processing (Figure 32) simply makes a negative judgment in step S901.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the AT addition process in this modified example.

Steps S2901 to S2910 are the same as the processing of steps S1001 to S1010 described above. In other words, even before the AT mode starts, the AT mode transition lottery has already been won, so an additional lottery for setting the AT mode is held. In this way, it is possible to ensure that winning the delayed lottery does not become a disadvantage to the player.

If the determination in step S2905 is negative, or after the processing in step S2908 or step S2910 is executed, in step S2911, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned delay flag is set. If the delay flag is not set, the AT addition processing is terminated.

If the delay flag is set and the AT mode transition lottery has been won in CZ mode but the premonition command has not yet been output, step S2912 determines whether the lottery result for this game is a special role win. If a special role win has been won, steps S2913 to S2916 execute processing to set the premonition mode. That is, in step S2913, 0 is input to the premonition counter, and in step S2913, the premonition flag is set. Then, in step S2915, the AT mode transition lottery has been won and a premonition command including information that the number of premonition games is 0 is set as an output target to the display control device 81. After that, in step S2916, processing is executed to clear the delay flag, and the AT addition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2912 that the special role has not been won, it is determined in step S2917 whether the CZ game counter is 1 or not. If the CZ game counter is 1, this means that when the currently started game ends, the CZ game counter is set to 0 in the CZ game number processing, and the CZ mode ends. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2913, and processing is executed to set the premonition mode in which the premonition game number is 0 games. If the CZ game counter is not 0 in step S2917, the process for adding to the AT ends as is.

In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process during CZ mode, the delayed lottery will be won and notification of the AT mode transition win will not be made in the current game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(a1), if the AT mode transition lottery is won as a result of, for example, winning a watermelon, and the delayed lottery is won, a premonition command will not be output in the current game, and as shown in FIG. 70(a2), a Tenpai out of combination effect will be executed as the effect in the CZ mode of the current game.

After that, if a special role is won before the current CZ mode ends (Fig. 70 (b1)), a doublet effect is executed in the game and a notification is made that the AT mode transition lottery has been won (Fig. 70 (b2)). In this case, the doublet effect is set in the start CZ effect setting process based on the premonition command output at the start of the current game. Therefore, the doublet effect may be executed directly without the bomb effect (steps S2213 and S2214), or the doublet effect may be executed via the bomb effect (steps S2215, S2221, and S2303 to S2305). In this way, in the special role winning game, not only is a notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won after the final stop, but there are also cases where a notification that the win has been made earlier, making it possible to draw attention to the effects before the final stop in the special role winning game.

In addition, when a notification is made that the AT mode transition lottery has been won in the special role winning game through winning the delayed lottery, the notification of the win will be made in the special role winning game whether the player operates in the first operation mode or the second operation mode, as shown in FIG. 70 (b1). In this way, even if the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the first operation mode, but not in the second operation mode, it is possible to give the impression that the AT mode transition lottery is being executed in the second operation mode. For example, even if a player mistakenly operates in the second operation mode, it is possible to have the player watch the notification with hope, and even if the player does not understand that the AT mode transition lottery is not executed in the second operation mode, it is possible to fully enjoy the special role winning game.

Furthermore, as in the above configuration, in the special role winning game, since the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won can be made even in the second operation mode, if the first small role winning to the sixth small role winning are achieved in the second operation mode, it is possible to give the impression that the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the push order bell has been won, and it is also possible to increase the attention when the push order bell is won. In this case, although the first small role winning to the sixth small role winning occur in the special role winning game, the ninth small role winning to the 32nd small role winning do not occur, so it is possible to give the impression that the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 matches the first small role winning to the sixth small role winning when the push order bell is won. By doing so, it is possible to have a high interest in the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the push order bell is won, even before the AT mode transition, and it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in order to enhance this effect, if a delay flag is set when a special role is won, a configuration may be made in which, together with the current CZ mode performance, a performance in which the player predicts the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in FIG. 70(c). Specifically, three question mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44. Then, each time a stop switch 42 to 44 is operated, a performance is performed in which the question mark corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 to 44 is switched to a mark indicating the correct answer (for example, a circle character) in order to inform the player that the operation order is correct. In this case, in order to establish the first small role win to the sixth small role win when a special role is won, it is preferable to also inform the player that the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 should be operated first among the three question mark marks. By doing this, it is possible to give a stronger impression that the AT mode transition lottery has been won and the repeat number effect (Figure 70 (b2)) has been executed, precisely because the first to sixth small wins have been successfully achieved.

Furthermore, in the push order bell winning game, a push order prediction effect may be executed to allow the player to predict the above operation order. However, in the push order bell winning game in this embodiment, even in CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery is not won (Figure 30), so even if the operation order matches the first small win to the sixth small win, the repeat number effect will not occur.

In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the above-mentioned push order prediction effect is generated in the push order bell winning game, and if the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponds to the first small win to the sixth small win, a correct answer effect is generated in the push order prediction effect to indicate that the push order was correct, and if the operation sequence does not correspond to the first small win to the sixth small win, an incorrect answer effect is generated in the push order prediction effect to indicate that the push order was incorrect. In this way, even if a correct answer effect is generated in the push order bell winning game, the AT mode will not be won, so that, in addition to the first small win to the sixth small win during the special role, it is possible to give the player the impression that they have won the AT mode transition lottery by correctly answering the operation sequence of the first small win to the sixth small win when the push order bell is won.

In a special role winning game, the center and right question marks corresponding to the center stop switch 43 and right stop switch 44 in the push order prediction presentation may be displayed as "1" or the like. This prevents operation in the first operation mode and encourages operation in the second operation mode.

It is also possible to configure the game where the push order bell is won so that the CZ mode transition lottery can be won. By doing this, when the push order bell is won, in addition to the first to sixth small wins during a special role, the AT mode transition lottery can be won, but it is possible to give the impression that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery by correctly answering the operation sequence for the first to sixth small wins than by not answering it correctly, and it is also possible to give the impression that even the push order bell is a type of special role in which the content of the processing related to the instruction function differs depending on the operation mode. Therefore, it can be very useful in improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if the push order bell is won when the delay flag is set, a push order prediction effect is performed, and if the operation sequence for the first to sixth minor prizes is correct, a correct answer effect is performed and a repeat number effect is generated to notify the player of the AT mode transition win. In this case, in some cases where the push order bell is won when the delay flag is set (if the player wins the specified lottery), the correct answer effect and the repeat number effect are generated as described above.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the stopping results when operating in the first operation mode in a special role winning game are partially common to the stopping results in other lottery results, and by taking advantage of this, a notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is executed before the operation is completed.

Figure 71 (a) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process when the first stop is ON in this modified example.

In step S3001, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is Cherry A to C. In the following step S3002, the stop result that was stopped based on the current first stop ON operation is grasped, and it is determined whether the "BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of the left reel 32L. As described above, when Cherry A to C is won, the 10th replay win flag and the 12th replay win flag are set (see FIG. 20, etc.), and the 10th replay symbol and the 12th replay symbol on the left reel 32L are "BAR" symbols (see FIG. 10). In contrast, in a game in which Cherry A to C is won, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the "BAR" symbol cannot be stopped on the left reel 32L, one of the "red 7" symbol, "red shell" symbol, and "white shell" symbol, which is the 11th replay symbol, stops in the middle of the left reel 32L.

In step S3002, it is determined that the first stop ON operation corresponds to the left reel 32L, and that the stop result corresponds to the 10th replay win or the 12th replay win, but not the 11th replay win. If a positive determination is made in step S3002, it is determined in step S3003 whether the sub-side CZ flag is set and whether the currently started game is in CZ mode. If it is in CZ mode, it is determined in step S3004 whether a premonition command has been received as a start command for this game. If a premonition command has been received, this means that the AT mode transition lottery was won, triggered by Cherries A to C.

If a premonition command has been received, in step S3005, the confirmation effect is controlled to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 based on the first stop ON operation, and then the first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated. The confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the fact that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, and in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), a number character stops in the left variable area SP1 in response to the stop of the first reel, and an image corresponding to the confirmation effect is displayed in the middle variable area SP2 and the right variable area SP3 that are still changing. In addition, in the background (middle variable area SP2 and right variable area SP3) of the image corresponding to the confirmation effect, a stop warning image (an image that faintly displays a number character) is displayed, which warns that the same number character as the number character stopped in the left variable area SP1 will stop in these middle variable area SP2 and right variable area SP3. By doing this, the player can know that they have won the AT mode transition lottery (that the AT winning effect will be performed in this game) when the first reel stops, but before the second and third reels stop.

If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S3001 to S3004, the first stop ON performance setting process is terminated.

As shown in Figure 71 (c1), when the "BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R may stop to result in the 10th replay win (Figure 71 (c2)), the 12th replay win (Figure 71 (c3)), or the 33rd minor win (Figure 71 (c4)).

In other words, when the "BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L, this also includes the outcome when the reel is operated in the first operation mode when a special role is won. Therefore, when the AT mode transition lottery based on Cherries A to C is won, a confirmation effect is generated when the "BAR" symbol stops in the middle, giving the player the impression that the result of the AT mode transition lottery that will be executed after the reel stops based on the special role has been notified in advance. This makes it possible to appropriately increase attention to the stopping operation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and the effects during the stopping operation.

The above-mentioned modified example 3 may be applied to modified example 2, and the above-mentioned confirmation effect may be generated when a special role is won under a situation where the delay flag is set, and the "BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L based on the first stop ON operation. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the confirmation effect occurs when the "BAR" stops in the middle of the left reel 32L. Even if it becomes possible to determine whether the special role is a special role or Cherries A to C by the subsequent stop operation, the impression can be given that the confirmation effect occurs not only as a trigger for Cherries A to C, but also as a trigger for the special role, so that it is easy to associate the special role with the winning of the confirmation effect when the confirmation effect occurs. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the attention when the special role is won.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the stop-time AT lottery process is determined prior to the execution timing of the stop-time AT lottery process, and the presentation of the game is determined based on the determined result.

Figure 72 is a flowchart showing part of the start AT lottery process in this modified example. As already explained, the start AT lottery process is executed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and although it is possible to determine whether a special role has been won, it is not possible to determine whether the game will be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode.

After determining in step S801 that the ceiling counter is not 0 in the start-time AT lottery process, a process to obtain an AT lottery random number is executed in step S3101. Then, a process to grasp the lottery result of the game is executed in step S3102. The processes in steps S3101 and S3102 are the same as the processes in steps S802 and S803 described above.

In the following step S3103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a win for a special role based on the processing result of step S3102. If a special role is won, a pre-determination process is executed in step S3104. If it is determined in step S3103 that a special role is not won, or after the pre-determination process is executed in step S3104, the process proceeds to step S804, and a lottery for switching to the AT mode at the start, etc. is executed.

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the pre-determination process of step S3104. The pre-determination process is a process for determining the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the process for the stop-time AT lottery prior to the execution timing of the process for the stop-time AT lottery.

That is, in step S3201, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step S3202, a process is executed to obtain a lottery table for transition to normal AT mode when stopped, and if the CZ mode flag is set, in step S3203, a process is executed to obtain a lottery table for transition to CZ AT mode when stopped. These lottery tables are as shown in FIG. 39.

After obtaining one of the lottery tables, in step S3204, an AT mode transition lottery is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, using the lottery table and the AT lottery random number obtained in step S3101. In other words, since the AT mode transition lottery is performed using a similar lottery table and an AT lottery random number obtained based on the start operation in the stop time AT lottery process (FIG. 38), the AT mode transition lottery performed in step S3204 and the AT mode transition lottery performed in the stop time AT lottery process (step S1310) will have the same result, and if it is normal mode, there is a 10% chance of winning the AT mode transition, and if it is CZ mode, there is a 50% chance of winning the AT mode transition.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in step S3205, the AT mode transition lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode in this special role winning game is executed from the lottery table and the AT lottery random number acquired in step S3101. In the stop time AT lottery process (FIG. 38) in this embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is not executed when operated in the second operation mode, but if the AT mode transition lottery is executed even when operated in the second operation mode, the stop time AT lottery process executes the AT mode transition lottery using the same lottery table and the AT lottery random number acquired based on the start operation, so the AT mode transition lottery executed in step S3205 and the AT mode transition lottery executed in the stop time AT lottery process (step S1310) will have the same result. In this embodiment, in normal mode, there is a 0% probability of winning the AT mode transition, and in CZ mode, there is a 0% probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, and in either mode, the AT mode transition lottery is not won.

After executing the processes of steps S3204 and S3205, in step S3206, it is determined whether or not the result of the process of step S3204 was a win to transition to the AT mode, and if it was a win to transition to the AT mode, in step S3207, a process is executed to set the first operation win notification command as an output target to the display control device 81. The first operation win notification command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that if the player operates in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, the player will win the AT mode transition lottery.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3206 or after the processing of step S3207 is executed, in step S3208, it is judged whether or not the processing result of step S3205 was a win to transition to the AT mode, and if a win to transition to the AT mode was obtained, in step S3209, a process is executed to set a second operation winning prediction command as an output target to the display control device 81. The second operation winning prediction command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that if the player operates in the second operation mode in this special role winning game, the player will win the AT mode transition lottery. If a negative judgment is made in step S3208 or after the processing of step S3209 is executed, this pre-judgment process is terminated.

Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the start CZ performance setting process in this modified example.

In the start CZ effect setting process in this modified example, the process when a special role is won (step S3305: YES) is different, and the other processes (steps S3301 to S3321) are the same as the processes in steps S2201 to S2221 above.

Specifically, in a game in which a special role is won during CZ mode, a positive judgment is made in step S3305, and the process proceeds to step S3322. In step S3322, a process of setting a special role flag is executed. Then, in step S3323, it is determined whether the above-mentioned first operation winning prediction command or second operation winning prediction command has been received. If either of these winning prediction commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S3304, and the performance is set so that a tenpai performance is executed.

In other words, if the advance judgment process specifies in advance that an operation in any of the operation modes will result in a win in the AT mode transition lottery, the start time CZ effect setting process will execute a ready-to-play effect that has a high probability of notifying the player that an AT mode transition has been won. In this way, it is possible to start an effect that corresponds to the result of the stop time AT lottery process without waiting for the result of the stop time AT lottery process.

However, as mentioned above, when a special role is won, no premonition command is output for the start AT lottery, so a negative judgment is made in step S3310, and the setting is made so that the Tenpai miss effect is performed. Also, if the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command has not been received, the Tenpai effect lottery process for the special role is performed in step S3324, and even if the lottery is won, the setting is made so that the Tenpai effect is performed in step S3304, and then the Tenpai miss effect is performed.

In other words, if the first operation winning prediction command or the second operation winning prediction command is received, the Tenpai effect will be executed without going through the Tenpai effect lottery process. As a result, even if these winning prediction commands are not received, when the Tenpai effect is executed, there is a high probability that it will lead to a notification that the AT mode transition has been won, making it possible to appropriately increase the sense of anticipation for the Tenpai effect.

In particular, in this modified example, whether the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command has been received can be predicted from whether a tenpai effect has occurred, and whether the tenpai effect has occurred is determined by the second stop ON operation. In other words, the tenpai effect occurs at a timing after it has already been decided whether the first operation mode or the second operation mode will be used. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the act of changing the operation mode due to the effect that occurs when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command has been received, and to prevent the occurrence of an event in which only players who know of the effect that will occur have an advantage. Thus, fairness in the game is guaranteed.

In other words, for example, when the first operation winning notice command is received, if a special effect (for example, an effect in which the sound effect when the lever is operated is a special sound effect different from normal) is generated at a timing before the first stop ON operation is performed, it is possible to know in advance that the AT mode transition will be won by operating in the first operation mode, which is preferable in terms of increasing the interest in the game. However, with such a configuration, in a game in which the above-mentioned special effect does not occur, even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition will not be won, so it is preferable for the player to operate in the second operation mode and receive more medals. Therefore, although it is preferable in terms of increasing the interest in the game, it is not preferable in terms of ensuring the fairness of the game to have a special effect corresponding to the result of the pre-determination process before the operation. In this modified example, since a notification corresponding to the result of the pre-determination process is performed after the branching between the first operation mode and the second operation mode as described above, it is possible to expect the above-mentioned effect from the notification while ensuring fairness.

Incidentally, when a special effect corresponding to the result of the pre-determination process is executed before the above-mentioned operation, the special effect does not necessarily occur when the first operation winning prediction command is received. Even if the special effect does not occur when the first operation winning prediction command is received, it does not necessarily mean that it is better to operate in the second operation mode. In other words, when performing an effect corresponding to the result of the pre-determination process, by making it so that it is not determined from the effect that the AT mode transition lottery will not be won even if the player operates in the first operation mode, it is possible to motivate the player to operate in the first operation mode regardless of the result of the pre-determination process, and it is possible to preferably ensure the fairness of the game.

When the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received, a special effect different from the tenpai effect may be executed. For example, the confirmation effect of FIG. 71(b) may be applied as the special effect. In addition, the sound effect during the tenpai effect may be a special sound effect that does not occur or is difficult to occur under normal circumstances, or a character that does not appear or is difficult to appear under normal circumstances may appear. In this way, it is possible to further increase attention to the operation mode when a special role is won, and in particular, in a configuration in which the second operation mode is set not to result in a win for the AT mode transition as in the above embodiment, it is assumed that the operation is performed in the first operation mode, and the execution of the special effect makes it possible to know in advance that the AT mode transition will be won.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the game characteristics using the above-mentioned pre-determination process will be described. Specifically, in this modified example, when the pre-determination process specifies that the AT mode shift lottery will be won by operating in the first operation mode when the special role is won, the first operation winning notice command is output as described above, and when the first operation winning notice command is not received when the special role is won, the second operation mode is operated to execute a specific notification effect that establishes the first small role winning to the sixth small role winning. Note that the mode that executes the specific notification effect is referred to as the navigation mode in the following description.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the navigation mode processing in this modified example. The navigation mode processing is executed as one of the other processes (step S2012) in the start-time performance setting process ( Figure 48 ) on the display control device 81 side.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not a transition to a favorable zone has occurred in the game to be started. If a transition to a favorable zone has occurred, in step S3402, a navigation mode lottery is executed to determine whether or not to transition to the above-mentioned navigation mode. In this modified example, the probability of winning the navigation mode lottery is set to differ depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process; specifically, it is set so that the higher the setting, which increases the ball payout rate, the easier it is to win the navigation mode lottery.

After the navigation mode lottery is executed in step S3402, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the navigation mode lottery has been won. If the navigation mode lottery has been won, a process is executed in step S3404 to set a navigation mode flag in the various flags storage area 183a.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3401 or step S3403, or after the processing of step S3404 is executed, in step S3405, it is judged whether or not a transition to AT mode will occur in the game to be started this time. If the game to be started this time is an AT mode transition game, in step S3406, a process to clear the navigation mode flag is executed, and then this navigation mode processing is terminated. If in step S3405, it is not an AT mode transition game, this navigation mode processing is terminated as it is.

In other words, in this modified example, if the navigation mode lottery that is executed when the advantageous zone transitions is won, navigation mode is set, and the transition to AT mode occurs, and navigation mode ends. Also, in this modified example, navigation mode does not end when the advantageous zone ends, so even if the advantageous zone ends without transitioning to AT mode, navigation mode continues, and it is possible to enjoy the benefits of that navigation mode until the transition to AT mode occurs.

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the specific notification process in this modified example. The specific notification process is also executed as one of the other processes (step S2012) in the start-time performance setting process ( Figure 48 ) on the display control device 81 side.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating a special role has been received as the current start command. If a positive determination is made in step S3501 and the lottery result for this game is a special role, the process proceeds to step S3502. In step S3502, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned first operation winning notice command has been received.

When the first operation winning notice command has been received, as described above, it is the case where it has been determined in advance that the AT mode transition lottery will be won by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the first operation mode in a special role winning game. When the first operation winning notice command has not been received, that is, when the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the first operation mode when a special role is won, it is determined in step S3503 whether the above navigation mode flag is set. When the navigation mode flag is set, in step S3504, a process is executed to set a specific notification effect to be executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 as the start effect of this game, and then this specific notification process is terminated. In other words, the above specific notification effect is executed as the start effect and is executed before the stop switches 42-44 are operated.

If the first operation winning notification command is received in step S3502, or if the navigation mode flag is not set in step S3503, the specific notification process ends without setting the specific notification effect.

If it is determined in step S3501 that the game is not a special role winning game, the process proceeds to step S3505, where a lottery result command indicating a special role has been received and it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is a special role winning game.

Here, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 77(c), a 13th replay has been added as a winning mode, and it is set so that when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 13th replay winning is established. The above special combination is a combination that allows the 13th replay winning, and is won with a lower probability (specifically, about 1 in 5000) than other AT winning results such as special combinations in a 3-bet game. Also, in the start-time normal AT mode transition lottery table and start-time CZ AT mode transition lottery table in the start-time AT lottery process in this modified example, the above special combination is set to win the AT mode transition with a 100% probability.

If it is determined in step S3505 that the lottery result for this game is a win for a special role, then in step S3506 it is determined whether or not a premonition command has been received as the start command for this game. If a premonition command has been received, this means that the AT mode transition lottery based on the special role has been won, meaning that the special role has been won in normal mode or CZ mode rather than in AT mode. If a premonition command has been received, then the process proceeds to step S3504, where processing is executed to perform the above-mentioned specific notification performance, and then this specific notification processing is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S3505 or step S3506, the specific notification processing is terminated as is.

As shown in FIG. 77(a), the specific notification effect in this embodiment is set up so that three "red 7" symbols are displayed in a line on the auxiliary display unit 65, the word "Aim" is displayed, and a sound such as "Aim" is output from the speaker 64 to notify the player that they should aim for the "red 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Here, if the 13th replay win is made, by operating each of the stop switches 42-44 aiming for the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbols may stop in a line on the lower line L3, as shown in FIG. 77(b1). In contrast, the operation mode aiming for the "red 7" symbol in the special role winning game is not included in the range of the first operation mode (FIG. 24), and even if the stop operation is performed starting from the left reel 32L, the 33rd small role win is not made, and the 1st small role win is made.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 77(b2), the stopping result of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M when aiming for the "red 7" symbol to achieve the first small win is the same as the stopping result when the 13th replay win is achieved, and at the time when the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, it is not possible to determine whether the first small win or the 13th replay win is achieved.

In other words, when a specific notification effect is executed to notify the player that they should aim for the "red 7" symbol, the player cannot tell whether they are being prompted to operate in the second operation mode because they did not win the AT mode transition lottery in the special role winning game, or whether they have won the 13th replay, which means they will win the AT mode transition lottery. By doing this, in a gameplay that aims to win the AT mode transition lottery, when a specific notification effect is executed, it is not confirmed that the AT mode transition will not be won when a special role is won, and the enjoyment of the specific notification effect and of operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on it can be improved.

The benefits of navigation mode are explained using Figure 77 (d).

In a situation where the navigation mode is not set, since a specific notification effect does not occur in the special role winning game, the stop switches 42 to 44 should be operated in the first operation mode in order to receive the AT mode transition lottery, and in this case, as described above, the 33rd small role winning will be established. In this way, if the game is always played in the first operation mode, a reduction of about 1.37 medals per game is expected, and it is possible to play about 36.40 games per 50 medals. In contrast, if the game is always played in the second operation mode in the special role winning game, a reduction of about 1.02 medals per game is expected, and it is possible to play about 48.84 games per 50 medals, and the number of games that can be played with the same number of medals is greater when operating in the second operation mode than when operating in the first operation mode. However, as mentioned above, by using the second operation mode, the player will not be able to enter the AT mode transition lottery and the ceiling counter will not be decremented, so in games where the aim is to transition to the AT mode, operating in the first operation mode is more advantageous for the player than operating in the second operation mode.

In the case of a special role winning game, if the player operates in the first operation mode, about half of the players will win the AT mode transition, and if a specific notification effect always occurs when the AT mode transition is won in the navigation mode, half of the players will be operated in the first operation mode and the other half will be operated in the second operation mode. In this case, a reduction of about 1.20 medals per game is expected, and it is possible to play about 41.71 games per 50 medals. Therefore, although the number of games that can be played with the same number of medals is smaller than when always operating in the second operation mode, the number of games that can be played with the same number of medals is greater than when always operating in the first operation mode, and it is possible to efficiently receive the AT mode transition lottery. In other words, in terms of playability aiming for the AT mode transition lottery, playing in the navigation mode is more advantageous than always operating in the first operation mode. In this way, it is possible to diversify the game in a configuration that utilizes special roles.

As described above, the AT mode transition lottery at stop is set to have the same probability regardless of the set value, at least when a special role is won. In contrast, the higher the setting of the navigation mode lottery, the easier it is to win. By doing this, it is possible to vary the number of games per unit number of medals (base) according to the set value, even if there is no difference in the setting of the AT mode transition rate.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, a special role winning game during the AT mode will be described.

In the above embodiment, among the processes related to the instruction function triggered by a special role, the AT mode add-on lottery is configured to perform the same process whether it is operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. Specifically, even in the case of a special role winning game, the add-on lottery is performed in the AT add-on process executed at the start, just like other lottery results. In this modified example, this is changed, and the processing content for the add-on lottery during the AT mode is also different whether it is operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode.

Figure 78 (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the AT game number processing in this modified example. As described above, the AT game number processing is a process executed in step S1211 of the winning result response processing (step S415) which is executed after the payout determination processing in the reel control processing (Figure 22).

In this modified example, first, in step S3601, the process for adding AT at the time of stop is executed. Then, in step S1601, the process for decrementing the AT game number counter is executed, and the number of games in the AT mode is managed.

Figure 78 (b) is a flowchart showing the process for adding AT when stopped in step S3601.

The process for adding AT when stopped is basically the same as the process for adding AT executed at the start described above (Figure 33), but the process for adding AT when stopped does not perform the process for obtaining the add-on lottery random number used in the add-on lottery, and is different in that it performs the process for grasping the operation mode of the current game and the add-on lottery table used in the add-on lottery. That is, in this modified example, the operation mode of the current game is grasped in step S3611, and the subsequent processes of steps S3612 to S3620 are the same as the processes of steps S1002 to S1010 described above, and the add-on lottery table obtained in step S3613 is different from the add-on lottery table obtained in step S1003.

Regarding the add-on lottery table, specifically, in the AT add-on lottery process executed at the start of this modified example (hereinafter referred to as the start-time AT add-on lottery process to distinguish it from the process at the time of stop), as shown in FIG. 79, the add-on lottery based on the special role is set to be non-winning. On the other hand, in the add-on lottery table obtained in step S3613 in the above-mentioned stop-time AT add-on process, if the first operation mode is used in this special role winning game, there is a 30% chance of winning the add-on lottery, but if the second operation mode is used, the add-on lottery is not won.

Figure 80 is a flowchart showing part of the process for adding AT at the start in this modified example. This process is a modified example of the AT adding process in step S609 in the lottery result response process (Figure 28).

The processing of steps S3701 and S3702 is the same as the processing of steps S1001 and S1002 above, and an additional lottery random number is obtained to grasp the lottery result of the current game. In the following step S3703, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is a special role win or not, and if it is a special role win, an additional pre-determination process is executed in step S3704. If it is determined in step S3703 that the special role is not a win, or after executing the processing of step S3704, the process proceeds to step S1004, and an additional lottery process at the start is executed. As described above, in a special role winning game, it is set so that a win is not obtained in the additional lottery process at the start. Note that a configuration in which an additional lottery at the start is not executed in a special role winning game may be adopted.

Figure 81 is a flowchart showing the pre-addition determination process of step S3704.

In step S3801, a process for acquiring a lottery table for AT addition at stop is executed. The lottery table acquired in step S3801 is the same lottery table as the lottery table acquired in step S3613. In the following step S3802, an AT addition lottery is executed from the lottery table and the lottery random number acquired in step S3701 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in this special role winning game. In other words, the AT addition lottery executed in step S3802 and the AT addition lottery executed in the lottery process for AT addition at stop (FIG. 78(b)) are configured to execute an AT addition lottery using a similar lottery table and the lottery random number acquired based on the start operation, so the result is the same. The AT addition lottery executed in step S3802 and the AT addition lottery executed in the lottery process for AT addition at stop (step S3614) will be the same, and there is a 30% probability of winning the lottery.

After executing the processing of step S3802, in step S3803, an AT addition lottery is executed in the case where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode in this special role winning game, based on the lottery table and the addition lottery random number acquired in step S3701. In this case, the result is the same as the result of the AT addition lottery in the process for lottery for AT addition at stop (FIG. 78(b)), and the AT addition lottery executed in step S3803 does not result in an addition win. Note that if the configuration is such that an addition lottery is not executed when the switch is operated in the second operation mode, the addition advance judgment process may also be configured not to execute an addition lottery in the case where the switch is operated in the second operation mode.

After executing the process of identifying the result of the additional lottery at the time of stopping in advance at the start in step S3802 or step S3803, in step S3804, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery will be won if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, and if the additional lottery is won, in step S3805, a process is executed to set the first operation winning notice command as an output target to the display control device 81. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S3804 or after the process of step S3805 is executed, in step S3806, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery will be won if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode, and if the additional lottery is won, in step S3807, a process is executed to set the second operation winning notice command as an output target to the display control device 81. If a negative judgment is made in step S3806 or after the process of step S3807 is executed, the additional advance judgment process is terminated.

Figure 82 (a) is a flowchart showing part of the start-time performance setting process in this modified example. As described above, the start-time performance setting process is executed when the display control device 81 receives a start-time command at the start of the game.

Steps S3901 to S3903 are similar to the processing of steps S2001 to S2003 described above, and when a lottery result command for the push order bell group is received, and a push order notification command for any of the first to sixth minor prizes is received, the push order notification performance for the corresponding operation order is set to be performed.

If it is determined in step S3901 that the lottery result command for the push order bell group has not been received, then in step S3904 it is determined whether or not the lottery result command for a special role has been received. If the lottery result command for a special role has been received, then in step S3905 it is determined whether or not the push order notification command has been received. As described above, when a push order notification command is output in a game in which a special role is won, this means that the AT mode is in progress. Note that, as described above, the push order notification command when a special role is won is a push order notification command that indicates the operation sequence for winning the sixth minor role.

If the special role is won during the AT mode, proceed to step S3906 and determine whether the first operation winning notice command has been received. If the first operation winning notice command has not been received, that is, if the player does not win the additional lottery even if the player operates in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, proceed to step S3903 and set the push order notification performance for the operation sequence corresponding to the sixth small role winning to be performed. In this case, based on the special role winning, it is possible to establish the sixth small role winning, which results in the payout of eight medals, rather than the 33rd small role winning, which results in the payout of one medal. In other words, in the additional lottery based on this special role, if the player does not win even if the player operates in the first operation mode, it is possible to improve the medal increase speed (net increase in number of medals) during the AT mode by operating in the second operation mode, which results in the payout of more medals.

On the other hand, even if a special role is won during the AT mode, if it is determined in step S3906 that the first operation winning notice command has been received, and if the special role winning game will be won by operating in the first operation mode, in step S3907, a determination is made as to whether or not it has been determined that the number of games in the AT mode and the number of medals increased will reach the upper limit of the advantageous zone. As already explained, in the remaining game number management process (step S1804) in the second zone display process (FIG. 46) on the main control device 101 side, the sum of the number of games played in the advantageous zone and the number of games remaining in the AT mode is greater than the upper limit of the advantageous zone, and if it is already determined that the upper limit of the advantageous zone will be reached by playing the remaining AT mode, the first exceed command is output. Furthermore, in the remaining number management process (step S1805) in the second section display process, if the advantageous section is in a situation where it will reach the upper limit increase (2400 coins) with the current remaining number of games based on the remaining number of games in the AT mode, and the upper limit increase of the advantageous section will be reached by continuing to play the remaining AT mode, a second exceedance command is output. In the above step S3907, it is possible to determine whether the upper limit of the advantageous section will be reached by determining whether the first exceedance command or the second exceedance command has been received.

If it is determined in step S3907 that the upper limit will not be reached, then in step S3908, a specific notification effect during the AT is set to be executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3907 that the upper limit will be reached, that is, if the situation is such that an additional win would be achieved by operating in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, but the additional processing in the AT mode based on the additional win would be meaningless in terms of the number of games and the increase in the number of medals, then the process proceeds to step S3903, and a push order notification effect is set to be executed in the operation sequence corresponding to the sixth minor role winning. In this case, it is possible to achieve the sixth minor role winning, which has a large number of medals paid out, in the special role winning game.

In other words, in this modified example, even if the first operation mode is used in a special role winning game during the AT mode to win an additional bonus, the operation mode is different depending on the upper limit game number and the upper limit increase number in the advantageous zone, and if the remaining number of games in the AT mode that has already been determined is enough to reach the upper limit game number and the upper limit increase number in the advantageous zone, it is deemed that there is no need to perform any more additional AT mode processing, and the player is operated in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode to win the sixth minor role with a larger number of medals paid out. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of emptiness about winning an additional bonus in a situation where it is certain that the upper limit will be reached, and if it is certain that the upper limit will be reached, it is possible to reach the upper limit increase number early, or to increase the total number of medals paid out when the upper limit game number is reached.

As for the specific notification effect during the AT in step S3908 above, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 82(b), three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44, and a similar effect to the specific role notification effect described above is set.

In this embodiment, if Cherries A to C are won among the specific roles, the 10th replay win through the 12th replay win can be achieved. If the 12th replay win is achieved when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at a timing when the 12th replay win can be achieved, it is confirmed that Cherry B or Cherry C was won. If the 10th replay win is achieved even though the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at a timing when the 12th replay win can be achieved, it is confirmed that Cherry A was won. In contrast, if the 11th replay win is achieved, it is not possible to determine which of Cherries A to C was won.

In that case, if you want to distinguish the type of Cherries A to C when a special role notification effect occurs, it is necessary to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 at least when the 10th replay win or the 12th replay win is achieved, not the 11th replay win. Since the 10th replay symbol and the 12th replay symbol on the left reel 32L are the "BAR" symbol, and the 11th replay symbol are the "red 7", "red shell" and "white shell" symbols, the timing when the 10th replay win or the 12th replay win can be achieved on the left reel 32L is the timing that corresponds to the first operation mode when a special role is won.

In other words, when a specific role notification effect is performed, even if it is not triggered by a special role, if the player is trying to determine the type of winning role, it is considered that the stop switches 42 to 44 will be operated in the first operation mode. Therefore, by making the notification mode of the specific role notification effect during the AT the same notification mode as the notification mode of the specific role notification effect, it is expected that the same operation will be performed even when a special role is won, and it is not necessary to store performance data dedicated to the specific role notification effect during the AT, and it is also possible to reduce memory capacity. Conversely, from the player's perspective, when a specific role notification effect or a specific role notification effect during the AT is performed, it is possible to understand that there is a possibility that a special role has been won, so it is considered that the first operation mode will be to operate the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L. As a result, it becomes possible to distinguish between cherries A to C, and the gameplay, such as the probability of winning an additional bonus being different depending on the winning result, can be fully understood, and through this improvement in understanding, it is possible to make the game more interesting than ever before.

If it is determined in step S3904 that the special role has not been won, then in step S3909 it is determined whether or not the special role has been won, and if so, then in step S3910 a process is executed to perform a special role notification effect. Steps S3909 and S3910 are the same as the processes in steps S2006 and S2007. If a negative determination is made in step S3902, step S3905 or step S3909, or after the processes in step S3903, step S3908 or step S3910 have been executed, the process proceeds to step S2008, and a start-time premonition effect setting process is executed.

By doing as described above, as shown in FIG. 82(c), it is possible to make the operation mode at the time of winning the special role different depending on the relationship between the winning of the additional bonus and reaching the upper limit, and to make the net increase in the number of coins during the AT mode different depending on the situation. In other words, if the first operation winning notice command is received during the AT mode, and the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the net increase in the number of coins during the AT mode can be expected to increase by about 2.74 coins per game if the operation is performed in the first operation mode when the first operation winning notice command is received during the AT mode, and if the operation is performed in the first operation mode when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the net increase in the number of coins during the AT mode can be expected to increase by about 2.98 coins per game if the operation is performed in the second operation mode when the net increase in the number of coins during the additional bonus is greater than the net increase in the number of coins when the operation is performed in the first operation mode when the operation is performed in the first operation mode. In this way, if a situation occurs in which winning the additional prize would be meaningless, the player is prompted to operate the game in a manner that does not allow the additional prize lottery to be drawn, thereby increasing the speed at which medals are added. This allows the player to reach the upper limit on the number of medals added more quickly, or increases the number of medals added when the upper limit on the number of games is reached.

Furthermore, before the first exceed command or the second exceed command is received, in a situation where it is not certain that the upper limit will be reached, a specific notification effect during the AT (specific role notification effect) may be executed regardless of whether the first operation winning notice command is received. In this way, it may become impossible or difficult to determine whether or not the additional lottery has been won, so when a special role is won, it may become necessary to always operate in the first operation mode. In this way, the net increase in the number of coins in a game that proceeds in this manner can be expected to increase by approximately 2.63 coins per game, which is less than the net increase in the number of coins in a mode in which a specific notification effect during the AT (specific role notification effect) is executed only when the first operation winning notice command is received.

In this case, for example, in the early stages after switching to the AT mode, when a special role is won, the game proceeds in a mode in which a specific notification effect during the AT (specific role notification effect) is executed regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received, and when a predetermined trigger occurs (for example, when a transition condition is met, such as winning the transition lottery or using up a predetermined number of sets), the game switches to a mode in which a specific notification effect during the AT (specific role notification effect) is executed only when the first operation winning notice command is received, and further, when the first excess command or the second excess command is received, the game switches to a mode in which operation is performed in the second operation mode even if operation in the first operation mode would result in a win in the additional lottery. In this way, the notification mode can be switched according to the situation. In addition, when a special role is won, the game may be switched from a mode in which a specific notification effect during AT (specific role notification effect) is executed regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received to a mode in which a specific notification effect during AT (specific role notification effect) is executed only when the first operation winning notice command is received, and then may be switched to a mode in which a specific notification effect during AT (specific role notification effect) is executed regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received when a special role is won. Also, when the AT mode is switched to, a configuration may be used in which a game in which a specific notification effect during AT (specific role notification effect) is executed regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received when a special role is won, or a game in which a specific notification effect during AT (specific role notification effect) is executed only when the first operation winning notice command is received, is determined by lottery or the like.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, the manner of push order notification when a special role is won during the AT mode is different from that of the above embodiment. Specifically, in the above embodiment, when a special role is won during the AT mode, a push order notification or push order notification performance is performed for an operation sequence corresponding to a predetermined sixth small role win among the first small role win to the sixth small role win. In contrast, in this modified example, which operation sequence among the first small role win to the sixth small role win is to be notified is determined by lottery.

Figure 83 (a) is a flowchart showing part of the lottery result response processing in this modified example.

After executing the start AT lottery process in step S607, or after executing the AT addition process in step S609, it is determined in step S4001 whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, in steps S4002 to S4005, similar to the processes in steps S611 to S614 above, if in AT mode, the push order notification and push order notification performance process for the operation sequence corresponding to the first small win to the sixth small win is executed, and if not in AT mode, the push order notification is not executed and a push order bell group notification is executed.

If the push order bell is not won in step S4001, it is determined in step S4006 whether or not a special role has been won. If a special role has been won, it is determined in step S4007 whether or not the AT mode flag is set, and if it is not set, a special role is announced in step S4008. The processing in step S4008 is the same as the processing in step S617.

If the AT mode flag is set in step S4007 and a special role has been won in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S4009. In step S4009, a notification small role lottery process is executed. In the notification small role lottery process, when the current special role is won, it is determined by lottery which of the first to sixth small roles will be used to notify the player of the push order corresponding to the winning of the first to sixth small roles. In this case, the notification small role lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a is obtained, and a selection is made as to which small role the push order notification corresponding to will be performed.

After executing the notification small role lottery process in step S4009, control is performed in step S4010 so that the push order notification of the operation sequence corresponding to the processing result of step S4009 is performed on the instruction monitor 68. Then, in step S4010, processing is performed to set the push order notification command corresponding to the processing result of step S4009 as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result response processing is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S4006, the lottery result response processing is terminated as it is.

The notification small prize lottery table used in the notification small prize lottery process of step S4009 is set so that the proportion of selected small prizes varies depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, as shown in FIG. 83(b). Of these, the second to sixth small prizes are set so that the proportion of the third and fifth small prizes selected is higher than the proportion of the second, fourth and sixth small prizes selected, particularly in settings 1, 3 and 5, and also in settings 2 and 4, the proportion of the second, fourth and sixth small prizes selected is higher than the proportion of the third and fifth small prizes selected. In this way, it is possible to predict the setting value from the selection rate of the notified small prize.

The rate at which the first small win is selected varies depending on the setting value, and the higher the payout rate (the higher the setting), the higher the rate at which the first small win is selected. Therefore, it is possible to predict the setting value from the selection rate of the first small win. Here, the push order notification for the operation sequence corresponding to the first small win is the operation sequence of left → middle → right, and if the left reel 32L is stopped first in a special win game, as described above, depending on the timing of the stopping operation, the 33rd small win will be achieved instead of the 1st small win.

In other words, when the push order notification of the operation sequence corresponding to the first small win is performed during AT mode, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at a timing that allows the 33rd small win to be achieved, if the 33rd small win is achieved instead of the 1st small win, it can be understood that the push order notification of the operation sequence corresponding to the first small win was a push order notification triggered by a special role, and if the first small win is achieved instead of the 33rd small win, it can be understood that the push order notification of the operation sequence corresponding to the first small win was a push order notification triggered by a push order bell. In this way, when predicting the setting value from the proportion of push order notifications of the operation sequence corresponding to the first small win, it is possible to eliminate the push order notification triggered by the push order bell by devising the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and to improve the prediction accuracy.

However, if you try to improve the prediction accuracy of such a set value, you will end up receiving one medal instead of eight. This makes it possible to realize a novel gameplay experience in which the player can choose between improving the prediction accuracy of the set value or increasing the number of medals paid out.

Moreover, as described above, when a special role is won during the AT mode, push order notifications corresponding to any of the first to sixth minor role wins are made, so the occurrence rate of push order notifications for each operation sequence can be averaged. By doing this, it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable that push order notifications corresponding to a specific operation sequence are likely to occur when push order notifications are made, and to prevent inconveniences caused by such bias. For example, if the push order notification or push order notification effect is generated even when the push order bell or special role is not won, and the push order notification or push order notification effect of the push order bell or special role is not won, and the push order notification or push order notification effect of the cherries A to C or chance eyes A to C is difficult or impossible to distinguish visually, when the push order notification effect or the like occurs, it is thought that the player expects that the push order notification effect or the like is a cherry A to C or chance eyes A to C that are likely to win in the AT addition lottery, or is triggered by a special role. However, if the occurrence rate of the push order notification effect or the like is biased depending on the operation order as described above, an inconvenience may occur, such as the lottery result being predicted by the operation order, even though the lottery result cannot be predicted or is difficult to predict from the mode of the push order notification effect or the like. In this regard, by making it difficult for bias to occur in the operation order as described above, it is possible to effectively avoid such inconveniences.

In this modified example, the variation (standard deviation) in the occurrence rate of the push order notification corresponding to the first to sixth minor roles is 7% for setting 1, 5% for setting 2, 6% for setting 3, 7% for setting 4, 7% for setting 5, and 15% for setting 6, with the average variation for each setting value being 8%. In contrast, the variation for each setting value in the occurrence rate of the push order notification corresponding to the first minor role is 13%, which is higher than the average value of the variation in the push order notification for the first to sixth minor roles. In other words, it is possible to more efficiently predict the setting value by predicting only the occurrence rate of the push order notification for the first minor role, rather than predicting the setting value from the occurrence rate of the push order notification for each minor role.

However, even if the push order notification corresponding to the first minor win is made when the special win is won, if the player does not operate in the first operation mode but operates in the second operation mode, the first minor win will be achieved, but it will be impossible to determine whether it was triggered by the win of the push order bells 1 and 2. In other words, if the first minor win is achieved when the special win is won, it will be confused with the first minor win triggered by the push order bell, and it will be impossible to efficiently predict the set value. By doing this, if you want to predict the set value, you can achieve the gameplay of aiming for the 33rd minor win, which has the smaller number of payouts, and you can move away from playing simply to increase the number of medals, and the fun of playing during the AT mode will be improved.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, a notification small role is drawn at a predetermined opportunity when a special role is won, and when a special role is subsequently won, the result of the drawing is used to determine the notification small role. Figure 84 (a) is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition process in this modified example. The advantageous zone transition process is a process executed in step S1706 in the zone display first process (Figure 45).

In step S4021, the lottery result of the current game is ascertained, and in the following step S4022, a process for obtaining a ceiling game number table is executed, and in step S4023, a ceiling game number lottery process is executed. Then, in step S4024, the process result of step S4023 is input to the ceiling counter, and in step S4025, a process for setting a ceiling command including information on the ceiling game number as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. As described above, the ceiling counter has a subtraction value lottery performed according to the lottery result of each game, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0, a transition to the AT mode occurs without going through an AT mode transition lottery.

In step S4026, a notification small win lottery process is executed. The notification small win lottery table used in the notification small win lottery process in this modified example is set so that the proportion of selected small wins varies depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, as shown in FIG. 84(b). Of the six possible operation sequences, five operation sequences are set so that they all have the same selection rate, and only the remaining one operation sequence is set so that its selection rate differs from that of the other operation sequences. The operation sequence that differs from the selection rate of the other operation sequences is set so that it differs depending on the setting value.

In this case, the variation in the selection rate of the push order notifications for the first through sixth minor wins will be the same as the variation for each setting value for each push order notification, and if you want to predict the setting value, you will need to count the occurrence rate of each of the first through sixth minor wins. In other words, it becomes more difficult to predict the setting value, which makes it possible to increase the fairness of the game.

After executing the notification small win lottery process in step S4026, the process of storing the small win of the lottery result in the notification small win counter of the various counter area 106e in step S4027 is executed, and then this advantageous zone transition time process is terminated. In this case, if the first small win is selected as the processing result of step S4026, 1 is input to the notification small win counter, and if the second small win is selected, 2 is input to the notification small win counter, and so on, a value of 1 to 6 is input to the notification small win counter. Then, in step S618 in the lottery result response process in this modified example, the push order notification to be executed is determined by referring to the value of the notification small win counter. That is, if 1 is input to the notification small win counter, the push order notification of the first small win is executed and the push order notification command corresponding to the first small win is set (step S619), and if 2 is input to the notification small win counter, the push order notification of the second small win is executed and the push order notification command corresponding to the second small win is set.

By doing this, randomness is introduced into the push order notification, but there is no need to execute the notification small prize lottery process when a special prize is won, which reduces the processing load for each game.

As mentioned above, the notification small role lottery process is executed during the advantageous zone transition process, so that the notification small role when a special role is won will change every time a transition to an advantageous zone occurs (every time an advantageous zone ends). By doing this, the push order notification becomes more random, and it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as a special role being discovered and not winning due to a bias in the push order notification, and it is also possible to increase the difficulty of predicting the set values, making the game more interesting.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, a modified example of the notification small win lottery table will be described.

Figure 85 (a) shows an example where the push order notification corresponding to the first or second small win is not selected. In other words, the operation sequence corresponding to the first or second small win, which creates the possibility of the first operation mode when a special win is won, is not selected. By doing this, it is possible to minimize the possibility of winning the 33rd small win, which pays out fewer medals during AT mode, and achieve a smoother increase in medals.

Figure 85 (b) shows an example in which, in a configuration in which push order notifications for the first and second small prizes do not occur when a special prize is won as described above, the probability of winning the push order bell is adjusted to equalize the push order notifications.

That is, as shown in FIG. 85(b1), the special role has a probability of about 5% (about 1 in 20) in each game, so that the push order notification corresponding to the third to sixth minor roles triggered by the special role occurs with a probability of about 1.25% in each game during the AT mode. In contrast, the push order notification corresponding to the first to second minor roles triggered by the special role does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85(b2), the push order bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the first minor role and the pinch push bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the second minor role are set to be easier to win than the roles corresponding to the other third to sixth minor roles, so that the push order bells, which have a probability of about 64% (about 1 in 1.56) in each game, are set to be easier to win than the roles corresponding to the other third to sixth minor roles. In this modified example, 18% of all push order bells are allocated to the push order bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the first minor role and the pinch push bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the second minor role, and 16% is allocated to the other roles. As a result, in each game, the push order bell triggers push order notifications corresponding to the first and second small prizes with a probability of approximately 11.54% each, and push order notifications corresponding to the third through sixth small prizes with a probability of approximately 10.25% each.

When these push order notifications triggered by special roles and push order bells are added together, as shown in FIG. 85(b3), the push order notifications corresponding to the first and second minor roles occur with a probability of about 11.54%, and the push order notifications corresponding to the third to sixth minor roles occur with a probability of about 11.50%. As a result, it is possible to make the difference smaller (about 0.04%) than the difference in the occurrence rate of each notification in the special roles (about 1.25%). In this way, by compensating for the bias in the push order notifications triggered by special roles with push order notifications for other results, it is possible to appropriately equalize the push order notifications, and the inconvenience of predicting the game result from the push order notifications can be avoided.

<Modification 10>
In this modified example, even in the advantageous zone transition lottery process triggered by a special role, the contents of the lottery process are made different depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44. In the above embodiment, the advantageous zone transition lottery process was configured to be executed at the start of the game, but in this modified example, it is changed to be executed at the end of the game. Although a detailed explanation using figures is omitted regarding this point, in the lottery result response process in this modified example, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous zone flag is not set, the advantageous zone transition lottery process in step S605 is not executed, and the lottery result response process is terminated as it is. And, in this modified example, the advantageous zone transition lottery process is configured to be executed in the zone display second process in step S416 in the reel control process (FIG. 22).

Figure 86 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

In this modified example, if it is determined in step S4101 that the favorable zone flag is not set, the favorable zone transition lottery process is executed in step S4111, and then the second zone display process is terminated. Otherwise, the processes in steps S4101 to S4110 are the same as the processes in steps S1801 to S1810 described above.

Figure 87 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for transitioning to the advantageous zone in this modified example.

In this modified example, after the game lottery result is determined in step S4201, a process is executed to determine the operation state of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the current game in step S4202. Then, a process is executed to obtain a favorable zone transition lottery table in step S4203, a random number for the favorable zone transition lottery is obtained in step S4204, and the favorable zone transition lottery is executed in step S4205.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the advantageous zone transition lottery table in this modified example is different from that in the above embodiment in the probability of winning the transition lottery triggered by a special role, but the probability of winning the transition lottery triggered by other results is the same. Specifically, in this modified example, the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the special role winning game is set to have a higher probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery when the operation mode is the first operation mode than when the operation mode is the second operation mode, and there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery in the first operation mode, and a 0% probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery in the second operation mode. In other words, there is a setting such that there is no transition to the advantageous zone in the second operation mode.

After executing the advantageous zone transition lottery in step S4205, it is determined in step S4206 whether or not the transition lottery has been won, and if it has been won, a process is executed in step S4207 to set the advantageous zone winning game flag. This process sets the advantageous zone flag in the first zone display process for the next game.

After executing the processing of step S4207, the processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone is executed in step S4208. In other words, in this modified example, the processing at the time of transition to the favorable zone is not executed in step S1706 in the first zone display processing (FIG. 45), but is executed in step S4208. If a negative judgment is made in step S4206, or after executing the processing of step S4208, the processing for the lottery for transition to the favorable zone is terminated.

In other words, in this modified example, when a special role is won in the normal zone, if the player operates in the first operation mode, the game will move to the favorable zone, whereas if the player operates in the second operation mode when the special role is won, the game will not move to the favorable zone. As described above, when the player operates in the first operation mode, the 33rd small role is won and one medal is paid out, and when the player operates in the second operation mode, the 1st to 6th small roles are won and 8 medals are paid out. In the internal state, a lottery for moving to the favorable zone is held in a 3-bet game, and the lottery for moving to the favorable zone is won in all lottery results except for misses and special roles. Therefore, even if the player does not move to the favorable zone in the current game by winning the 1st to 6th small roles when a special role is won, if the player moves to the favorable zone in the next game, two medals will be added, which is advantageous for the player. In other words, in the normal zone, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode.

In the advantageous zone transition processing of step S4208, the ceiling game number is set according to the lottery results of each game. Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 88, in step S4301, a process is executed to grasp the lottery results of the current game. Then, in step S4302, a process is executed to obtain a ceiling game number table, and in step S4303, a ceiling game number lottery process is executed. Then, in step S4304, the process result of step S4303 is input to the ceiling counter, and in step S4305, a process is executed to set a ceiling command including information on the ceiling game number as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this advantageous zone transition processing is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the ceiling game number table in this modified example is set so that, except for ceiling game number lotteries triggered by special roles, the maximum ceiling is 700 games, and a ceiling game number less than the maximum ceiling game number can be selected depending on the lottery results. Specifically, the lower the occurrence rate of the game lottery result, the more likely it is that a smaller ceiling game number will be selected; for example, it is set so that a smaller ceiling game number is more likely to be selected for chance eye C than chance eye A.

The ceiling number of games selected in response to a special role is set to vary depending on the operation mode of the special role winning game, with 700 games being selected in the first operation mode, and 1000 games being selected as the ceiling number of games, which is more than 700 games, in the second operation mode. However, in this modified example, as described above, the special role winning game is set so that if the second operation mode is used, the advantageous zone transition lottery is not won, so the ceiling number of games when a transition to an advantageous zone is triggered by a special role is effectively 700 games.

In other words, in the normal zone, when a player is shifted to the advantageous zone in a game in which a special role is won, the player may be at a disadvantage in terms of the ceiling game number selected compared to when the player is shifted to the advantageous zone with another lottery result. When a player is shifted to the advantageous zone in a game in which a special role is won, the ceiling game number is 700 games, but when a player is shifted to the advantageous zone with another lottery result, a number of games less than 700 games may be selected as the ceiling game number. In this case, in the normal zone, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode when a special role is won, to avoid shifting to the advantageous zone in that game, and to shift to the advantageous zone with another lottery result in the next or subsequent games.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 89(b), depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42-44, the number of medals paid out differs, and in the special role in which the content of the processing related to the instruction function differs, which operation mode is more advantageous in the normal zone and the advantageous zone will differ. In other words, in the advantageous zone, if the first operation mode is used, the AT mode transition lottery and the additional lottery are executed in the processing related to the instruction function, but if the second operation mode is used, these AT mode transition lottery and additional lottery are not executed, so in the gameplay in which the player aims to increase medals by transitioning to the AT mode, if the special role winning game is performed in the first operation mode during the advantageous zone, it is more advantageous for the player to operate it than in the second operation mode. On the other hand, in the normal zone, if the first operation mode is used, the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in the processing related to the instruction function, but if the second operation mode is used, the advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed, so at first glance, it seems more advantageous to operate in the first operation mode than in the second operation mode in the gameplay in which the player aims to transition to the advantageous zone and transition to the AT mode. However, as described above, since the ceiling number of games is set to be smaller when a player moves to the advantageous zone due to another result than when a player moves to the advantageous zone due to a special role, it is essentially more advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode than in the first operation mode when a special role is won during the normal zone. Therefore, the operation mode that is advantageous when a special role is won differs between the normal zone and the advantageous zone, and by utilizing this configuration, it is possible to appropriately increase the interest of the game.

<Modification 11>
In this modified example, an example in which multiple types of special roles are provided will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), in this modified example, in a lottery table for a normal game state in a 3-bet game, special roles A, B, and C are set as special roles in which a first benefit is awarded and a first process is executed as a process related to the instruction function by operating the stop switches 42-44 in a first operation mode, and a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first process is awarded and a second process related to the instruction function is executed by operating the stop switches 42-44 in a second operation mode. Each of the special roles A-C is set to have a probability of winning of approximately 1 in 60, and the probability of winning any of the special roles A-C is approximately 1 in 20, which is the same as the above embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 90(b), in this modified example, the first and second operation modes set for each of the special roles A to C are different, and the winning results are different from those in the above embodiment.

Specifically, the first operation mode of the special role A is set to operate the left stop switch 42 first as a specific number, and the second operation mode is set to operate the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 first as a specific number. When operated in the first operation mode, one of the 9th to 33rd minor roles is won instead of the 33rd minor role, resulting in the payout of one medal, and when operated in the second operation mode, one of the 3rd to 6th minor roles is won, resulting in the payout of eight medals.

For special role B, the first operation mode is set to operate the center stop switch 43 first as a specific number, and the second operation mode is set to operate the left stop switch 42 or right stop switch 44 first as a specific number. When operated in the first operation mode, any of the 9th to 33rd minor roles will be won instead of the 33rd minor role, resulting in the payout of one medal. When operated in the second operation mode, any of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th minor roles will be won, resulting in the payout of eight medals.

Special role C is set as a first operation mode in which the right stop switch 44 is operated first as a specific number, and as a second operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 or the middle stop switch 43 is operated first as a specific number. When operated in the first operation mode, one of the 9th to 33rd minor roles is won instead of the 33rd minor role, and one medal is paid out. When operated in the second operation mode, one of the 1st to 4th minor roles is won and eight medals are paid out.

The first and second processes related to the instruction functions for each of the special roles A to C are the same as those in the above embodiment, and when operated in the first operation mode, there is a 10% probability of winning the AT mode transition in normal mode and a 50% probability of winning the AT mode transition in CZ mode, but when operated in the second operation mode, there is no winning the AT mode transition in either case. Also, during the AT mode, there is a 10% probability of winning an additional prize regardless of the operation mode.

In other words, in this modified example, for each of the special roles A to C, the first operation mode is set as the second operation mode for another special role, and the second operation mode is set as the first operation mode for another special role. Specifically, the first operation mode of special role A is the second operation mode for special role B and special role C, and the second operation mode of special role A is the first operation mode for special role B. Also, the first operation mode of special role B is the second operation mode for special role A and special role C, and the second operation mode of special role B is the first operation mode for special role C. And the first operation mode of special role C is the second operation mode for special role A and special role B, and the second operation mode of special role C is the first operation mode for special role A.

In addition, in the special roles A to C in this modified example, the first and second operation modes are all associated with the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not associated. In other words, by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the operation sequence associated with the first and second operation modes, the first and second operation modes are treated as if they were operated regardless of the operation timing, and the corresponding winning result is achieved, and processing related to the instruction function is executed.

By doing this, for example, even if the same stop switch is operated first every game, the operation mode when a special role is won can be not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode. In other words, in the above embodiment, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the operation mode can be either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, and when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the operation mode is always the second operation mode, not the first operation mode. In contrast, in this modified example, when any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first, the operation mode can be not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode. This makes it easier to ensure the fairness of the game.

However, when a special role is won, the player is free to choose whether to operate in the first operation mode to favorably advance the processing related to the instruction function, or to operate in the second operation mode to win more medals, and in this modified example, the player can also make this choice. The configuration for this purpose will be explained below.

Figure 92 is a flowchart showing part of the lottery result response processing in this modified example.

If it is determined in step S610 that the lottery result of this game is not a win for the push order bell, the process proceeds to step S4401. In step S4401, it is determined whether the lottery result of this game is a win for any of the special roles, and if it is not a win for any of the special roles, the lottery result response process ends. If it is a win for any of the special roles, the process proceeds to step S4402.

In step S4402, the AT mode flag is set and it is determined whether or not the AT mode is in progress. If the AT mode is not in progress, in step S4403, it is determined whether or not the currently won special role is special role A. If it is special role A, in step S4404, the indication monitor 68 is controlled so that a notification is given that the special role is special role A among the operation mode roles.

Here, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 90(d), "7", "8", and "9" are set as the display modes of the instruction monitor 68, and these "7", "8", and "9" are set as notifications of the types of operation mode roles, with "7" corresponding to special role A, "8" corresponding to special role B, and "9" corresponding to special role C. That is, when the operation mode role is a special role A, the first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7 are lit to display "7". When the operation mode role is a special role B, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are lit to display "8". When the operation mode role is a special role C, the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3 and the fifth display segment N5 to the seventh display segment N7 are lit to display "9". The "7" through "9" displays are all identifiable to the player, and the player can determine which of the special roles A through C he or she has won from the notification of the type of operation role.

In step S4404, the display monitor 68 is controlled to display "7" to notify the player that the special role A is selected from among the above operation mode roles. This allows the player to understand that the lottery result for this game is a win for special role A, and that the first operation mode can be achieved by first operating the left stop switch 42, and the second operation mode can be achieved by first operating the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the push order notification effect on the display control device 81 can occur even when not in AT mode.

That is, after executing the processing of step S4404, in step S4405, it is determined whether or not the A switching flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The A switching flag is a flag for adjusting the frequency of occurrence of each push order notification effect when performing the push order notification effect when the special role A is won. In other words, if it is determined that the A switching flag is not set, in step S4406, a process for setting the A switching flag is executed, and in the following step S4407, if it is a push order bell, a process for setting the push order notification command of the operation order (left → center → right) corresponding to the first minor role as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this lottery result response process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4405 that the A switching flag is set, a process is executed in step S4408 to clear the A switching flag, and in step S4409, if it is a push order bell, a process is executed to set the push order notification command for the operation order (left → right → middle) corresponding to the second minor role as the output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result response process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4403 that the special role is not special role A, the process proceeds to step S4410 to determine whether the currently won special role is special role B. If it is special role B, in step S4411, the display monitor 68 is controlled so that "8" is displayed as a notification that the special role is special role B among the operation mode roles. Then, in step S4412, it is determined whether the B switching flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If the B switching flag is not set, in step S4413, a process is executed to set the B switching flag, and in step S4414, if it is a push order bell, a process is executed to set the push order notification command of the operation order (middle → left → right) corresponding to the third minor role as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result response process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4412 that the B switching flag is set, a process is executed in step S4415 to clear the B switching flag, and in step S4416, if it is a push order bell, a process is executed to set the push order notification command for the operation order (center → right → left) corresponding to the fourth minor role as the output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result response process is terminated.

In addition, if it is determined in step S4410 that the special role is not special role B, it means that the special role this time is special role C. In this case, in step S4417, the display monitor 68 is controlled so that "9" is displayed as a notification that the special role is special role C among the operation mode roles. Then, in step S4418, it is determined whether or not the C switching flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If the C switching flag is not set, in step S4419, a process is executed to set the C switching flag, and in step S4420, if it is a push order bell, a process is executed to set the push order notification command of the operation order (right → left → center) corresponding to the 5th minor role as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result response process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4418 that the C switching flag is set, a process is executed in step S4421 to clear the C switching flag, and in step S4422, if it is a push order bell, a process is executed to set the push order notification command for the operation order (right → middle → left) corresponding to the 6th minor role as the output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result response process is terminated.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 90(c), when special roles A to C are won in normal mode or CZ mode, the indication monitor 68 notifies the player of the type of operation mode role, which is special roles A to C. This allows the player to understand, for example, that the lottery result of the current game is that special role A is won, and that the first operation mode is achieved by first operating the left stop switch 42, and that the second operation mode is achieved by first operating the center stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44; the lottery result of the current game is that special role B is won, and that the first operation mode is achieved by first operating the center stop switch 43, and that the second operation mode is achieved by first operating the left stop switch 42 or the right stop switch 44; and the lottery result of the current game is that special role C is won, and that the first operation mode is achieved by first operating the right stop switch 44, and that the second operation mode is achieved by first operating the left stop switch 42 or the center stop switch 43.

Here, in this modified example, as shown in Fig. 91, the notification mode of the push order notification effect when a special role or push order bell is won in the AT mode is different from the notification mode of the push order notification effect when a special role is won in the normal mode or CZ mode. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 91(a), in the push order notification effect when a special role or push order bell is won in the AT mode, for example, a number is added to a yellow character corresponding to a "bell" pattern to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, while as shown in Fig. 91(b), in the push order notification effect when a special role is won in the normal mode or CZ mode, the color of the numbered character is different from that in the AT mode, and for example, a number is added to a purple character to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 (displayed with a different hatch direction in the figure). By doing this, if a push order notification effect occurs before the transition to AT mode, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the push order notification effect does not correspond to the push order bell, but to a special role, and it is possible to avoid the player feeling uncomfortable that none of the first to sixth small roles are achieved despite operating according to the push order notification effect. Note that, even in this modified example, as described above, during the AT mode, the notification mode is the same for the push order notification effect when a special role is won and the push order notification effect when a push order bell is won, and by doing this, it is possible to expect the effect of confusing the win of a special role with the win of a push order bell.

Furthermore, as the push order notification effect on the display control device 81 side, in the case of special role A, the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the first minor role and the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the second minor role are alternately executed, in the case of special role B, the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the third minor role and the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth minor role are alternately executed, and in the case of special role C, the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the fifth minor role and the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the sixth minor role are alternately executed. By doing so, in the normal mode and CZ mode, it is possible to more reliably receive the AT mode transition lottery on the advantageous side when special roles A to C are won by the push order notification effect, and it is possible to suppress the bias of the generated push order notification effect.

If it is determined in step S4402 that a special role has been won in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S4423. In step S4423, it is determined whether the currently won special role is special role A. If it is special role A, it is determined in step S4424 whether the A switching flag is set. If the A switching flag is not set, a process for setting the A switching flag is executed in step S4425, and if it is a push order bell in step S4426, the push order notification of the operation order corresponding to the third minor role (middle → left → right) is controlled to be performed on the instruction monitor 68. Then, in step S4427, a process for setting the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the third minor role as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this lottery result response process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4424 that the A switching flag is set, a process for clearing the A switching flag is executed in step S4428, and in step S4429, if it is a push order bell, control is performed so that the push order notification of the operation order (center → right → left) corresponding to the fourth minor role is performed on the instruction monitor 68. Then, in step S4430, a process is executed to set the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the fourth minor role as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result response process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4423 that the special role is not special role A, it is determined in step S4431 whether the currently won special role is special role B. If it is special role B, it is determined in step S4432 whether the B switching flag is set. If the B switching flag is not set, a process for setting the B switching flag is executed in step S4433, and if it is a push order bell in step S4434, control is performed so that a push order notification of the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor role (right → left → center) is performed on the instruction monitor 68. Then, in step S4435, a process for setting the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor role as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this lottery result response process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4432 that the B switching flag is set, a process for clearing the B switching flag is executed in step S4436, and in step S4437, if it is a push order bell, control is performed so that the push order notification of the operation order (right → center → left) corresponding to the 6th minor role is performed on the instruction monitor 68. Then, in step S4438, a process is executed to set the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the 6th minor role as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result response process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S4431 that the special role is not B, it means that the special role that has been won this time is C. In this case, in step S4439, it is determined whether or not the switching flag for C is set. If the switching flag for C is not set, in step S4440, a process for setting the switching flag for C is executed, and in step S4441, if it is a push order bell, the push order notification of the operation order (left → center → right) corresponding to the first small role is controlled to be performed on the instruction monitor 68. Then, in step S4442, a process for setting the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the first small role as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this lottery result response process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4439 that the switching flag for C is set, in step S4443, a process for clearing the switching flag for C is executed, and in step S4443, if it is a push order bell, the push order notification of the operation order (left → right → center) corresponding to the second small role is controlled to be performed on the instruction monitor 68. Then, in step S4444, a process is executed to set the push order notification command for the operation sequence corresponding to the second minor win as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result response process is terminated.

That is, as shown in FIG. 90(c), in the AT mode, as the push order notification effect on the display control device 81 side, in the case of special role A, the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the third minor role and the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth minor role are alternately executed, in the case of special role B, the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the fifth minor role and the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the sixth minor role are alternately executed, and in the case of special role C, the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the first minor role and the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the second minor role are alternately executed. By doing so, in the AT mode, when special roles A to C are won, it is possible to establish a minor role winning with a large number of medals paid out by the push order notification effect, and it is possible to suppress the bias of the generated push order notification effect.

In this way, in this modified example, multiple types of special roles are provided, and the first and second operation modes are set to alternate for each special role. Therefore, if operation continues in the first operation mode corresponding to one special role, other special roles will be operated in the second operation mode. This makes it possible to play each special role equally in the first operation mode and in the second operation mode, making it easier to ensure fairness in the game.

In addition, when each special role is won, a push order notification corresponding to the first operation mode is generated in normal mode and CZ mode, and a push order notification corresponding to the second operation mode is generated in AT mode. Therefore, regardless of the special role, the player can operate in the first operation mode until the transition to AT mode, and then operate in the second operation mode after the transition to AT mode. This makes it possible to play the game in the above embodiment even with this modified example that has multiple special roles.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the first operation mode and the second operation mode correspond to an operation sequence that results in multiple small wins in the case of a push order bell, the operation sequence for notifying winning special prizes is switched. That is, for example, in the case of special prize A, before the transition to the AT mode, the push order notification effects corresponding to the operation sequence of the first and second small prizes in the case of a push order bell are alternately switched, and after the transition to the AT mode, the operation sequence corresponding to the third and fourth small prizes in the case of a push order bell is alternately switched. In this way, it is possible to eliminate bias in the push order notification effects with a relatively simple configuration.

<Modification 12>
In this modified example, an example will be described in which the mode of processing related to the instruction function is made different for each special role in a configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided as in the above modified example 11. Specifically, in this modified example, the processing related to the instruction function during the AT is made different for special roles A and B and special roles C.

As shown in FIG. 93(a), the first operation mode and second operation mode for special roles A to C are the same as those in modified example 11 above, with the first operation mode for special role A being the second operation mode for special roles B and C, the first operation mode for special role B being the second operation mode for special roles C and A, and the first operation mode for special role C being set as the second operation mode for special roles A and B. Also, before the AT mode transition, it is set so that any of special roles A to C can be operated in the first operation mode to receive the AT mode transition lottery, but cannot be operated in the second operation mode.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 94, if the special roles A and B are selected in the AT mode, the same AT addition lottery is executed regardless of the operation mode, as in the above modification 11. In other words, the probability of winning the addition lottery is the same whether the player operates in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. In contrast, for the special role C, even during the AT mode, the advantage of the addition lottery differs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, and the player can win the addition lottery when operating in the first operation mode, but the player cannot win the addition lottery when operating in the second operation mode. Note that the specific processing in this case will not be described in the figures, but for example, for the special roles A and B, the addition lottery is executed so that the player can win the addition lottery in the AT addition processing in FIG. 33, etc., and for the special role C, the addition lottery is executed so that the player can win the addition lottery according to the operation mode in the stop AT addition processing in FIG. 78, etc.

As a push order notification effect during the AT mode, for special roles A and B, a push order notification effect corresponding to the second operation mode is performed. On the other hand, for special role C, based on the pre-addition determination process of FIG. 81, etc., if an add-on win occurs when the special role C is operated in the first operation mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first operation mode is performed, whereas if an add-on win does not occur when the special role C is operated in the first operation mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the second operation mode is performed.

In this way, by varying the content of the processing related to the instruction function depending on the special role, it is possible to increase attention to which special role will be won, and the sense of expectation when the push order notification effect occurs can be made to differ depending on the operation order indicated by the push order notification effect.

That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 94, if the special roles A and B have a 30% probability of winning the additional prize in the start AT additional processing, and the special role C has a 30% probability of winning the additional prize in the stop AT additional processing, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the expected probability of winning the additional prize is equal in the push order notification performance of each operation sequence corresponding to the second operation mode for the special roles A and B, and it can be expected that about 30% of the push order notification performances that can occur as a result of the special roles A and B will be additional prizes. On the other hand, for the special role C, when the push order notification performance of the operation sequence corresponding to the first operation mode occurs, the probability of winning the additional prize is 100%, but when the push order notification performance corresponding to the other operation sequence occurs, the probability of winning the additional prize is 0%. By doing so, the expected probability of winning the additional prize varies greatly depending on the content of the push order notification performance, and the attention to the push order notification performance can be appropriately increased.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the description of each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples, or may be applied to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples in a combined form or in whole. In addition, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of the embodiments and the modified examples, or may be applied in a combined form or in whole.

(1) In the special role winning game, the bonus when the first operation mode is operated and the bonus when the second operation mode is operated are not limited to the above. In other words, when the first operation mode is operated, the 33rd small role winning or the 9th to 32nd small role winning is achieved and one medal is paid out, and when the second operation mode is operated, the 1st to 6th small roles winning is achieved and eight medals are paid out. However, when the first operation mode is operated, more than one medal may be paid out, or one medal may be paid out or more than one medal may be paid out, or neither of these results may result in a winning result and a miss may occur. At least, it is sufficient that the bonus (number of medals) is less than when the second operation mode is operated. And, when the second operation mode is operated, more than eight medals may be paid out, or fewer than eight medals may be paid out.

Furthermore, when the first operation mode is operated, the game state may not change or may change to the first state, and when the second operation mode is operated, the game state may change to a second state that is more advantageous to the player than the previous state or the first state. For example, the first state or the second state may be an RT state in which the probability of winning a replay is improved, and the second state may be configured to have a higher probability of winning a replay than the first state, or to have a larger number of continuing games in the RT state or a higher continuation rate. Also, the second state may be a bonus state with a different probability of winning a small prize, and the first state may be a bonus state with a lower advantage than the bonus state as the second state.

In any case, it is sufficient that the configuration is such that the bonus granted when the player operates in the second operating mode is more advantageous to the player than the bonus granted when the player operates in the first operating mode.

(2) In the special role winning game, the processing related to the instruction function when operated in the first operation mode and the processing related to the instruction function when operated in the second operation mode are not limited to the above. For example, the AT mode transition lottery is performed regardless of whether the operation is in the first operation mode or the second operation mode, but the probability of winning the AT mode transition may be higher in the first operation mode and lower in the second operation mode, and when the AT mode transition is won, the first operation mode may be more likely to transition to a more advantageous AT mode (more games, more sets, higher set continuation rate, easier to win additional prizes, etc.) than the second operation mode. Also, the first operation mode may be more likely to win additional prizes than the second operation mode, and the number of additional games or sets when the additional prize is won in the first operation mode may be greater than the number of additional prizes when the additional prize is won in the second operation mode. Furthermore, when operated in the first operation mode, an AT mode transition lottery and a CZ mode transition lottery are performed, while when operated in the second operation mode, only a CZ mode transition lottery is performed; or when operated in the first operation mode, an AT mode transition lottery is performed, while when operated in the second operation mode, a CZ mode transition lottery is performed. In this way, not only the degree of advantage of the processing related to the instruction function but also the type of processing may be different.

It is also possible to configure the AT mode transition lottery to be won more easily when operated in the first operation mode than when operated in the second operation mode, and to configure the AT mode triggered by the second operation mode to be more advantageous to the player than the AT mode triggered by the first operation mode. Also, it is also possible to configure the AT mode transition triggered by the second operation mode to be more advantageous to the player, such as by having a larger number of games added or a larger number of sets added, than the AT mode transition triggered by the first operation mode, and to configure the AT mode transition lottery to be won more easily than the AT mode triggered by the first operation mode. In these cases, taking into account the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery and the advantage of the AT mode to be transitioned to, and the probability of winning the add-on lottery and the advantage of the add-on when won, it is preferable to configure the first operation mode to be more advantageous to the player than the second operation mode.

(3) In a configuration in which the first operation mode is used in a special role winning game to grant the first bonus and execute the first processing for the instruction function, and the second operation mode is used to grant the second bonus and execute the second processing for the instruction function, the relationship between the difference in the degree of advantage between the first bonus and the second bonus and the difference in the degree of advantage between the first processing and the second processing is not limited to the above. In other words, in the above, one medal is paid out as the first bonus, eight medals are paid out as the second bonus, the first processing is highly likely to result in an AT mode transition win, and the second processing is not likely to result in an AT mode transition win, and so on, and it is set so that the first operation mode is more advantageous for the player in terms of aiming for an AT mode transition. This can be changed, for example, by making the difference in the degree of advantage between the first and second benefits larger than the above, and the difference in the degree of advantage between the first and second processes smaller than the above, so that it is more advantageous to aim for the ceiling by operating in the second operating mode rather than the first operating mode when aiming to transition to AT mode.

(4) In the special role winning game, when the first operation mode is used, the number of games up to the ceiling (ceiling counter) is subtracted, whereas when the second operation mode is used, the number of games up to the ceiling is not subtracted. However, when the second operation mode is used, the number of games up to the ceiling may be added. In this case, the number of games to be added may be a uniform number of games, or the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery or the like. Also, when the second operation mode is used, the number of games up to the ceiling may not be subtracted not only for the current game but also for a specific number of games thereafter (e.g., 5), and the specific number for which the subtraction is not performed may be determined by lottery. When the number of games to be added or the number of games for which subtraction is not performed is determined by lottery, the number of games to be added or the number of games for which subtraction is stopped may be different depending on the setting value. For example, the higher the setting, the smaller the number of games to be added or the number of games for which subtraction is stopped may be selected.

(5) In the above examples, the first and second operation modes are distinguished by the type of stop switch 42-44 that performs the first stop operation and its operation timing, and the first and second operation modes are distinguished by the type of stop switch 42-44 that performs the first stop operation, and the first and second operation modes are distinguished by the type of stop switch 42-44 that performs the first stop operation. The first stop operation is set as the branching timing for both operation modes, but the two operation modes may be distinguished by the type of stop switch 42-44 that performs the second or third stop operation and its operation timing, or the two operation modes may be distinguished by the type of stop switch 42-44 that performs the second or third stop operation. In these cases, the second or third stop operation that is distinguished may be applied to the above inventions as the branching timing for both operation modes.

(6) The percentage of winning AT mode transition triggered by a special role is approximately half the percentage of winning AT mode transition triggered by other results, but this is one example, and the percentage of winning AT mode transition triggered by a special role may be lower or higher than this. Also, the percentage of winning AT mode transition triggered by a special role in normal mode may be lower than others, and the percentage of winning AT mode transition triggered by a special role in CZ mode may be higher than others, or vice versa.

(7) The advantageousness of the AT mode to be entered may be different when a special role triggers a win to enter the AT mode and when another result triggers a win to enter the AT mode. When a special role triggers a win to enter the AT mode, the player may enter an AT mode that is more advantageous to the player than when another result triggers a win to enter the AT mode, or vice versa.

(8) The AT mode when the ceiling is reached may have a different degree of advantage from the AT mode to which a player transitions by winning the AT mode transition lottery before the ceiling is reached. By configuring the AT mode when the ceiling is reached to be more advantageous than the AT mode based on the transition lottery before the ceiling is reached, in a game in which a special role is won near the ceiling, it is more advantageous for the player to not take the AT mode transition lottery in the second operation mode than to take the AT mode transition lottery in the first operation mode. In this way, it is possible to realize gameplay that allows the player to select between the two operation modes when a special role is won in relation to the number of games to the ceiling.

(9) The presentation mode of each game in the CZ mode is not limited to the above. At least, by making the presentation mode a complete notification type in which the result of the AT mode transition lottery is announced in each game, the significance of announcing the result of the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the special role in the game in which the special role is won is enhanced. For example, in the bomb presentation, the bomb image BP may be switched to the explosion image EP or the misfire image NP based on the operation of a predetermined operation unit by the player. The predetermined operation unit may be the presentation switch 66 for presentation. In the case of the above-mentioned configuration in which the bomb image BP is switched to the explosion image EP or the misfire image NP based on the operation of the player, it is preferable that the above-mentioned switching is performed at least before the start lever 41 is operated in the game next to the game in which the bomb presentation is started, and the above-mentioned switching may be performed based on the betting operation of the next game, such as the first credit insertion switch 56 or the insertion of a medal from the medal insertion slot 45. Incidentally, even in the above embodiment, if a bet operation for the next game is performed such as inserting a medal from the first credit insertion switch 56 or medal insertion slot 45 after the bomb effect has started and before switching to the explosion image EP or non-explosion image NP, it is preferable to configure the game so that the image is switched to the planned image, an AT winning notification, etc. is performed based on the above bet operation.

(10) In a game in which a special role is won during CZ mode, if the AT mode is not won, the notification of the result of the lottery for transitioning to the AT mode for that game may be carried over to the next game or later. In this case, since the AT mode is not won, the AT mode will not start in the game following the game in which the special role was won.

(11) The AT mode winning notification during CZ mode may be configured to be executed before the double-digit performance following the third stop operation. In this case, notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery based on a result other than a special role can be executed after the operation of the start lever 41, and in the case of a special role, it is possible to notify the result of the AT mode transition lottery before the third stop operation by using a pre-determination process, etc. It is also preferable that the timing of the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery based on a special role may be the same as the timing of the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery based on a result other than a special role.

(12) In the double-digit effect executed when the AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, the type of the number character to be displayed may be associated with the lottery result of the current game or the lottery result that triggered the AT mode transition. For example, when the AT mode transition is won due to a specific role, an odd-numbered character is likely to be displayed as a double-digit effect, when the AT mode transition is won due to a normal role such as normal lip A to C, an even-numbered character is likely to be displayed as a double-digit effect, and when the AT mode transition is won due to a special role, a character with a specific number (for example, 0) is likely to be displayed as a double-digit effect. In this case, it is also possible to grasp the lottery result of the current game from the character that stops in the left variable area SP1 at the first stop, and it is possible to grasp the expectation of the AT mode transition lottery in relation to the number character, and the expectation of the AT mode transition lottery in relation to the operation mode performed this time, and a significant increase in the interest of the game can be expected.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the number characters stopped at the first stop are different depending on whether the first operation mode is the AT mode transition winning mode or the first operation mode is not the AT mode transition winning mode, depending on the pre-determination process performed when the special role is won. In other words, as described above, when the AT mode transition winning mode is triggered by a specific role, odd number characters are likely to be displayed as a double-digit effect, and when the AT mode transition winning mode is triggered by a special role, a predetermined number character is likely to be displayed as a double-digit effect. In addition, when the AT mode transition winning mode is the first operation mode, the predetermined number character is stopped in the left variable area SP1, while when the AT mode transition winning mode is not the first operation mode, an odd number character is stopped in the left variable area SP1. As described above, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the stop results when a special role is won are the same as the stop results for Cherries A to C among the specific roles. Therefore, even if the first operation mode is used when a special role is won and an AT mode transition win is not achieved, and an odd-numbered character stops in the left variable area SP1, the player can still hope that they have won the AT mode transition lottery triggered by Cherries A to C, and the anticipation of winning the AT mode transition win can be maintained.

(13) Regarding the special role and the push order bell, which may have the same stopping outcome, the special role is configured to be more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than the push order bell, but the push order bell may be configured to be more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than the special role, or the push order bell may be configured to be more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery even in the second operation mode when the special role is won.

(14) The pre-judgment process may not be performed in normal mode, but may be performed only during CZ mode. Also, it may be set so that there are cases where the pre-judgment process is performed in CZ mode and cases where it is not performed, and a configuration may be used in which the CZ mode is selected for pre-judgment processing and the CZ mode is selected for pre-judgment processing during the transition to CZ mode are determined by lottery or the like. For example, when the CZ mode is switched to based on Cherry A, the pre-judgment process is performed in the CZ mode, but when the CZ mode is switched to based on Cherry B, the pre-judgment process is not performed in the CZ mode. In this way, the configuration may be such that whether or not the pre-judgment process is performed during the CZ mode is determined according to the lottery result that triggered the transition to the CZ mode (the lottery result in the game that won the transition to the CZ mode). Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the player can select in advance whether or not to perform the pre-judgment process.

(15) If the advance judgment process specifies that the AT mode transition will be won by operating in the first operation mode when a special role is won, a notification that the AT mode transition will be won or that there is a high possibility of this may be made, for example, as a start-time performance, before the branching timing between the first and second operation modes. By doing so, when such a notification occurs, it is considered that the player will operate in the first operation mode more carefully, and it is possible to make the player feel the joy of confirming the AT mode transition win by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 themselves. In this case, it is preferable to configure the configuration so that a notification in the case where the AT mode transition is won in the start-time AT lottery process can be made in the same notification mode or a similar notification mode as the notification that the AT mode transition will be won or that there is a high possibility of this.

(16) If the advance judgment process specifies that the AT mode transition will be won when the special role is won, a notification (for example, FIG. 70 (c)) may be executed to allow the player to select between the first and second operation modes. This can give the player a strong impression of winning the AT mode transition by operating the first operation mode, which can be useful in improving the interest of the game. In this case, by making it possible to win the AT mode transition in both the first and second operation modes when the special role is won, it becomes possible to win the AT mode transition not only when the first operation mode is selected but also when the second operation mode is selected, and it is possible to give the player an impression of winning the AT mode transition not only by operating the player but also by selecting the second operation mode. In the above configuration, it is preferable to make it easier to win the AT mode transition when operating the first operation mode than when operating the second operation mode. Furthermore, in this case, by configuring the AT mode to be entered when the player operates in the second operation mode to be more advantageous to the player than the AT mode to be entered when the player operates in the first operation mode, it is possible to create a reason to select the second operation mode, thereby increasing the interest of the game in which the player makes the selection.

(17) Although the navigation mode is configured to be managed by the display control device 81, it may also be configured to be managed by the main control device 101. In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won even when the player operates in the first operation mode when a special role is won, the gameplay of operating in the second operation mode may be managed by the main control device 101, and the navigation mode process of FIG. 75 and the specific notification process of FIG. 76 may be executed by the main control device 101. In this case, for example, in the case of a push order bell, the specific notification performance may be configured to execute a push order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth small roles, and a push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 may also be executed.

(18) The start and end triggers of the navigation mode are not limited to the above. The start trigger may be, instead of or in addition to the transition to the favorable zone, a case where the player does not win an AT mode transition lottery or a CZ mode transition lottery that is performed at a predetermined trigger (for example, triggered by a special role), or a case where the number of times the player does not win an AT mode transition lottery or a CZ mode transition lottery reaches a predetermined number, or a case where the number of games reaches a predetermined number (preferably the number of games before the ceiling), and a configuration in which the player transitions to the navigation mode (through a lottery, etc.) at some of these start triggers may be configured. Also, the end trigger may be, instead of or in addition to the transition to the AT mode, the end trigger may be the end of the favorable zone, or a case where the number of games since the transition to the navigation mode or the number of occurrences of a specific notification performance (the number of times the player does not win an AT mode transition lottery triggered by a special role) reaches a predetermined number, and a configuration in which the navigation mode ends (through a lottery, etc.) at some of these end triggers may be configured.

(19) Although the configuration is such that a specific notification effect can occur by transitioning to the navigation mode, a configuration may also be adopted in which a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a specific notification effect when an AT mode is not won in a special role winning game even when operated in the first operation mode. In this case, for example, if an AT mode is not won in the previous special role winning game even when operated in the first operation mode, and an AT mode is not won in the current special role winning game even when operated in the first operation mode, that is, if an AT mode is not won twice in a row due to a special role, a specific notification effect may be generated by referring to the result of the AT mode transition lottery when a previous special role is won. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that whether or not a specific notification effect occurs when a special role is won this time is determined by the operation mode when the previous special role was won. For example, if the AT mode was not won after operating in the first operation mode in the previous special role winning game, and the AT mode was not won even when operating in the first operation mode in the current special role winning game, a specific notification effect is generated, whereas if the AT mode was not won after operating in the second operation mode in the previous special role winning game, and the AT mode was not won even when operating in the first operation mode in the current special role winning game, a specific notification effect is not generated.

(20) Although a set difference is set for the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to navigation mode, the transition to navigation mode may be made with a uniform probability regardless of the set value. In addition, the probability of winning the transition may be made different depending on the lottery result of the game in which the navigation mode transition lottery is held. For example, the configuration may be such that the transition to navigation mode is more likely to be won in the lottery for transitioning to navigation mode triggered by the push order bell than in the lottery for transitioning to navigation mode triggered by a specific role or special role, or vice versa.

(21) In navigation mode, if a special role is won and the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the player operates in the first operation mode, a specific notification effect is performed. However, instead of or in addition to the specific notification effect, a notification effect indicating that the player should operate in the second operation mode (for example, in the case of a push order bell, a push order notification effect in the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor roles) may be performed. In this case, a configuration may be used in which a specific notification effect is performed and a notification effect indicating that the player should operate in the second operation mode are performed are mixed. For example, the effects may be performed alternately, or a lottery may be used to determine which effect is to be performed.

(22) It has been explained that the processing related to the instruction function according to the operation mode in the special role winning game, such as the processing for the AT lottery at the time of stopping and the processing for the additional lottery at the time of stopping, is executed after the medal payout of the game is completed. However, it is sufficient that the processing is executed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and it may be executed before the medal payout starts, or after the medal payout starts but before it is completed.

(23) In a special role winning game, a freeze effect may be generated after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which processing related to an instruction function corresponding to the operation mode in the special role winning game, such as processing for a stop-time AT lottery or processing for a stop-time additional lottery, is executed before the start of the freeze effect or during the freeze effect. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which the results of the stop-time AT lottery processing or the stop-time additional lottery processing are notified during or in the freeze effect.

(24) If the push order bell is won outside the AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 is configured to notify the push order bell group, but this is not essential and the push order bell group notification may not be executed when the push order bell is won. In addition, if the push order bell is won, a lottery result command for the push order bell group is output, but outside the AT mode, the lottery result command may not be output even if the push order bell is won. At the very least, it is sufficient that the display control device 81 cannot identify the advantageous operation sequence when the push order bell is won (the operation sequence corresponding to the winning of the first to sixth minor roles) outside the AT mode.

(25) When the push order bell is won, the lottery result command for the push order bell group is output, but the lottery result command for the push order bell group may also be output when other lottery results are won. In other words, the lottery results may be grouped into specific roles, special roles, and other normal roles (normal bells A to C, push order bell), and the lottery result command for the specific roles, the lottery result command for the special roles, and the lottery result command for the normal roles may be output to the display control device 81.

(26) In the special role winning game before the transition to the AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 is configured to notify the player of the special role, but the instruction monitor 68 may be configured to notify the player to operate in the first operation mode. Specifically, for example, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which "9" is executed as the special role notification as in the above embodiment, the operation sequence in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first may be configured to display "1" or "2" indicating the operation sequence corresponding to the first small role winning or the second small role winning in the case of a push order bell. The same applies to the special role A notification, special role B notification, and special role C notification. When a special role A notification is made, a configuration may be made in which "1" or "2" is displayed to indicate the operation sequence corresponding to the first small role winning or the second small role winning, when a special role B notification is made, a configuration may be made in which "3" or "4" is displayed to indicate the operation sequence corresponding to the third small role winning or the fourth small role winning, and when a special role C notification is made, a configuration may be made in which "5" or "6" is displayed to indicate the operation sequence corresponding to the fifth small role winning or the sixth small role winning. However, in the case of these special roles A to C, it is preferable to control the instruction monitor 68 so that a push order notification corresponding to the same operation order as the push order notification performance displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed.

(27) When a special role is won before the transition to the AT mode, the display control device 81 executes a push order notification effect corresponding to the first operation mode. However, the push order notification effect may be in the same notification mode as the push order bell, or there may be cases where the push order notification effect is in the same notification mode as the push order bell and cases where the push order notification effect is in a different notification mode from the push order bell.

(28) When the push order bell is won during the AT mode, the push order notification command indicating the operation sequence corresponding to the first to sixth small roles is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 as the push order notification command. However, the main control device 101 may output commands corresponding to the first to sixth small roles to the display control device 81. Also, the main control device 101 may output a command indicating which of the push order bells is the lottery result. In these cases, in order to operate in the second operation mode when a special role is won to establish the first to sixth small roles, it is preferable to output the corresponding command (a command corresponding to the first to sixth small roles or a command indicating the result of the push order bell corresponding to the first to sixth small roles to be won) from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. Then, it is preferable to store the table of FIG. 23 in the display control device 81 so that the operation sequence to be notified can be specified based on the received command.

(29) When the displayed ceiling game number is reached, the premonition effect is determined according to the time lag until the ceiling counter reaches 0. However, the premonition effect may be determined after the ceiling counter reaches 0.

(30) In a configuration in which a premonition effect is determined according to the difference until the ceiling counter reaches 0 when the displayed ceiling number of games is reached, a premonition effect may be set when the difference reaches a predetermined number of games for the premonition effect. That is, in the above embodiment, the premonition mode in normal times is a maximum of 40 games, but when the displayed ceiling number of games is reached, if the difference until the ceiling counter reaches 0 is within 40 games, a premonition effect may be set when the displayed ceiling number of games is reached, and if the difference is more than 40 games, a premonition effect may be set when games are played until the difference is within 40 games. In this way, it is possible to reduce the number of premonition effect patterns to be stored.

(31) The displayed ceiling game number is configured to be updated regardless of the operation mode when a special role is won, but it may or may not be updated depending on the operation mode, and may be updated in some cases when the ceiling counter is not decremented by operation in the second operation mode, and may be updated even when the ceiling counter is not decremented by operation in the second operation mode. Even in these cases, when considering cases where a value greater than 1 is decremented from the ceiling counter by the subtraction value lottery process, a discrepancy may occur between games in which the displayed ceiling game number reaches the ceiling and games in which the ceiling counter becomes 0.

(32) Even in games other than those involving special roles, the ceiling counter may not be decremented depending on the operation mode or by lottery, for example.

(33) The ceiling number of games is determined by lottery when the advantageous zone is entered, but the ceiling number of games may be set as a uniform number of games (e.g., 700 games).

(34) The advantageous zone transition lottery is performed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the winning probability of the advantageous zone transition lottery is different depending on the operation mode in the special role winning game. However, the advantageous zone transition lottery may be performed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the winning probability of the advantageous zone transition lottery may be the same (same processing) regardless of the operation mode in the special role winning game. In this case, when a special role is won in the normal zone, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like may be configured to notify the fact that the special role has been won so that the player can understand that the special role has been won. By doing this, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the operation mode, even in a scene where a common process is performed regardless of the operation mode of the special role winning, and it is possible to increase interest without complicating the processing configuration. Note that even in such a configuration, if the advantageous zone transition lottery is performed regardless of the operation mode when the special role is won, it is more advantageous to operate in the second operation mode when the special role is won in the normal zone, and the advantageous operation mode is reversed from the advantageous zone. Incidentally, as described above, the effect of notifying the player that a special role has been won in a situation where common processing is performed regardless of the operation mode for winning a special role can also be expected during AT mode, and a configuration may be adopted in which a notification that a special role has been won is given in a special role winning game during AT mode.

(35) When multiple special roles are provided, the number of types of special roles is not limited to three, and may be two, or may be four or more. In this case, if the first operation mode for one special role becomes the second operation mode for another special role, and the first operation mode for the other special role becomes the second operation mode for the one special role, when a game is played in which operation is continued in the first operation mode for the one special role, the other special roles will be operated in the second operation mode, and the effect of operating the first operation mode and the second operation mode evenly can be expected.

(36) In a configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, the first privilege granted when one special role is operated in the first operation mode and the second privilege granted when the special role is operated in the second operation mode may be different from the first privilege granted when another special role is operated in the first operation mode and the second privilege granted when the other special role is operated in the second operation mode. In this case, the first privileges may be different from each other while the second privileges are the same, the first privileges may be the same from each other while the second privileges are different, or both the first privileges and the second privileges may be different from each other. In addition, in a configuration in which three or more types of special roles are provided, not only may the first privileges and second privileges be all different, but the first privileges for the first special role and the second special role are the same, while the first privilege for the third special role is different from that of the first special role and the second special role, so that the privileges of some special roles are the same, but may be different from the privileges of other special roles. In these cases, the first and second bonuses may be different from other special roles, but the difference in the degree of advantage (e.g., the number of medals paid out) between the first and second bonuses may be the same.

(37) In a configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, the first processing related to the instruction function executed when one special role is operated in the first operation mode and the second processing related to the instruction function executed when the special role is operated in the second operation mode may be different from the first processing related to the instruction function executed when another special role is operated in the first operation mode and the second processing related to the instruction function executed when the special role is operated in the second operation mode. In this case, the first processing may be different from each other while the second processing is the same, the first processing may be the same from each other while the second processing is different from each other, or both the first processing and the second processing may be different from each other. In addition, in a configuration in which three or more types of special roles are provided, not only the first processing and the second processing may be all different, but also the first processing for the first special role and the second special role may be the same, while the first processing for the third special role may be different from that for the first special role and the second special role, so that the processing between some special roles is the same, while the processing between other special roles may be different. In these cases, the first process and the second process may be different from other special roles, but the difference in the degree of advantage (e.g., the probability of winning in AT mode) between the first process and the second process may be the same.

(38) As a special role, when the player operates in the first operation mode, the first privilege is granted and the first process related to the instruction function is executed, and when the player operates in the second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege is granted and the second process related to the instruction function that is less advantageous than the first process is executed. However, when the player operates in a third operation mode different from the first operation mode or the second operation mode, in addition to the first operation mode or the second operation mode, a special role may be provided in which the third privilege is granted and the third process related to the instruction function is executed. In this case, the third privilege may be configured differently from both the first privilege and the second privilege, or may be configured differently from the first privilege but the same as the second privilege, or may be configured the same as the first privilege but different from the second privilege, and the third process may be configured differently from both the first process and the second process, or may be configured differently from the first process but the same as the second process, or may be configured the same as the first process but different from the second process. In any case, the set of the third benefit and the third process may have different contents from the set of the first benefit and the first process and the set of the second benefit and the second process, and some of the contents may be the same. It is preferable that the content of the third benefit is different from the content of the first benefit or the second benefit, or that the content of the third process is different from the content of the first process or the second process, so that the degree of advantage for the player is different, and it is preferable that the profit obtained from the set of the third benefit and the third process is different from the profit obtained from the set of the first benefit and the first process, and different from the profit obtained from the set of the second benefit and the second process.

More specifically, for example, in a configuration in which, when operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd small win is achieved and one medal is paid out, and a first process is a lottery for transition to the AT mode with a 50% probability of winning, and when operated in the second operation mode, the 1st to 6th small wins are achieved and eight medals are paid out, and a second process is a lottery for transition to the AT mode with a 0% probability of winning, and when operated in the third operation mode, the 7th or 8th small win is achieved and three medals are paid out, and a third process is a lottery for transition to the AT mode with a 25% probability of winning.

(39) When a special role is won, different small role winnings can be achieved when the first operation mode is operated and when the second operation mode is operated. However, it is also possible to configure the following: when the first operation mode is operated, a predetermined replay winning is achieved, while when the second operation mode is operated, a predetermined small role winning is achieved; when the first operation mode is operated, a predetermined small role winning is achieved, while when the second operation mode is operated, a predetermined replay winning is achieved; when the first operation mode is operated, a predetermined small role winning is achieved, while when the second operation mode is operated, a predetermined bonus winning is achieved; or when the first operation mode is operated, no winning is achieved, while when the second operation mode is operated, a predetermined small role, replay, or bonus winning is achieved.

(40) When a special role is won, the process related to the instruction function is executed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed. However, when a special role is won, the process related to the instruction function may be executed when the start lever 41 is operated and after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed.

For example, in the start-time AT lottery process when a special role is won, a first lottery for an AT mode transition lottery is held, and if the first lottery is won and the first operation mode is used, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed by setting the AT mode winning flag in the stop-time AT lottery process, while if the first lottery at the start is not won, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the stop-time AT lottery process even if the first operation mode is used, and if the first lottery at the start is won, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the stop-time AT lottery process even if the second operation mode is used, and if the first lottery at the start is not won, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the stop-time AT lottery process even if the second operation mode is used.

Furthermore, in the start-time AT lottery process when a special role is won, a first lottery for an AT mode transition lottery is performed, and if the result of the first lottery is the first result, and if the first operation mode is used, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed by setting the AT mode winning flag in the stop-time AT lottery process, while if the result of the first lottery at the start is a second result different from the first result, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the stop-time AT lottery process even if the first operation mode is used, and if the result of the first lottery at the start is the second result, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed by setting the AT mode winning flag in the stop-time AT lottery process if the second operation mode is used, while if the result of the first lottery at the start is the second result, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the stop-time AT lottery process even if the first operation mode is used.

(41) In the configuration in which multiple special roles are provided, the winning probability of each special role in each game has been described as the same probability, but the winning probabilities may be different. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which special roles A to C are provided, the winning probabilities of some special roles may be different, such as the winning probabilities of special roles A and B being the same but the winning probability of special role C being different, or the winning probabilities of all of special roles A to C may be different from each other.

(42) The probability of winning a special role may differ depending on the game state. For example, when a transition is made to an RT state in which the probability of winning a replay is increased, the probability of winning a special role may change (become higher or lower) compared to the normal state before the transition. In addition, in a configuration in which multiple special roles are provided, the probability of winning special role A may be higher than that of special role B in the first state, but the probability of winning special role B is lower than that of special role A, and in the second state, the probability of winning special role B is higher than that of special role A, but the probability of winning special role A is lower than that of special role B, and so on. In this manner, the special roles that are more likely to be won may differ depending on the state.

(43) Even in a configuration in which multiple special roles are provided, the first and second operation modes may be distinguished not only by the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 but also by the operation timing.

(44) The AT lottery based on the special role is executed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (stop time AT lottery processing, etc.), and the AT lottery based on the other results is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (when the start lever 41 is operated, start time AT lottery processing, etc.). However, even if the result is other than the special role, the AT lottery may be executed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (stop time AT lottery processing), or even if the result is a special role, the AT lottery may be executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (start time AT lottery processing). Even in these cases, for example, the performance control as the result notification of the AT lottery during the CZ mode may be configured differently depending on whether it is based on the AT lottery after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (stop time CZ performance setting processing) or based on the AT lottery before the operation (start time CZ performance setting processing).

(45) The net increase in medals per game in the first BB state and the second BB state is set to approximately +0.00, and medals do not increase or decrease in the first BB state and the second BB state, but the number of medals may increase or decrease. In this case, the net increase in medals in the first BB state and the second BB state should be at least greater than the net increase in medals when playing a 3-bet game in the internal state or the non-internal state.

(46) Although the configuration is such that the execution of each process related to the instruction function transitions from a permitted state to a restricted state when the player plays the internal state or non-internal state in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, or when the player achieves the first BB win or the second BB win, the gaming machine may be configured to transition from a permitted state to a restricted state when a predetermined number of games are played, for example.

(47) The ball output rate is changed depending on each setting value, and setting 1 has the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 has the highest ball output rate. However, any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of ball output (game media) changes depending on the setting value. For example, the ball output rates of some setting values may be the same, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball output rate, and the ball output rates of other setting values may be different. Also, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase or decrease of ball output, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase or decrease of ball output. Also, settings 1 and 5 may increase the ball output by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the ball output by a predetermined amount in a long time, settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5 and take a shorter time to decrease the predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 hardly increases or decreases the ball output. In these cases, the ball output rates of each setting value may be the same.

(48) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be, for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the viewpoint of preventing erroneous operations when stopping the reels, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, although a slot machine in which the number of active lines is set to one when the number of bets is three has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be, for example, five active lines.

(49) Although a specific example of a slot machine 10 has been shown, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. In other words, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the present invention may be a gaming machine that has a ball insertion and ball payout function like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only balls as gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value, and restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

(50) In the above embodiment, a gaming machine in which a game can be started by inserting medals as gaming media, setting the number of bets, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out as a prize corresponding to winning the game has been exemplified, but this does not deny medal-less gaming machines that do not use medals. In such medal-less gaming machines, for example, a configuration may be used in which a game can be started by setting the number of bets for a game using virtual gaming media (predetermined gaming value), and virtual gaming media (predetermined gaming value) corresponding to the predetermined number of medals is awarded as a prize corresponding to winning the game. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

The above-mentioned pachinko machines may be not only pachinko machines that dispense game balls, but also sealed-in type pachinko machines in which game balls are not discharged outside the machine. In such sealed-in type pachinko machines, it is preferable to configure the machine to notify information indicating the number of winning balls, for example.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a special result (special role) is set in which the bonus awarding means awards a second bonus (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
A mode notifying means for notifying the mode of operation of the stop operation means by a predetermined notifying means (for example, a function for notifying the push order by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
A specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of the status notification by the status notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
the specific processing means is set to execute a first specific processing as the specific processing when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and to execute a second specific processing as the specific processing which is more disadvantageous to a player than the first specific processing as the specific processing when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or to not execute the specific processing;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the special game, it is equipped with a specific notification means (a function of executing a stop-time CZ performance setting process by a display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification corresponding to the specific processing at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means is executed.

The above configuration allows a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of a start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at a valid position based on the operation of a stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. When the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first bonus is awarded and a first specific process is executed as a specific process related to the function of the mode notification. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, a second bonus is awarded and a second specific process is executed as a specific process related to the function of the mode notification. Since the second bonus is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus, and the first specific process is more advantageous to the player than the second specific process, when a special result is reached, it is possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which the player is left to choose between the more advantageous side of the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means (second operation mode) and the more advantageous side of the function of the mode notification (first operation mode).

Moreover, in the above configuration, in a game in which a special result in which different bonuses or special processes are awarded depending on such operation modes is won, a special notification corresponding to the result of the special process can be executed after the operation of the stop operation means is executed, so that the result of the special process based on the special result is notified within the game in which the special result was won. Therefore, even in a so-called fully notified type gaming machine that notifies the result of the special process in each game, it is possible to set a special result, which can be very useful in increasing the interest of the game.

Feature A2. The specific processing means is
A means for executing a process for generating a specific event (AT mode transition winning, CZ mode transition, AT additional winning, ceiling counter decrement) that makes it easier to execute the mode notification by the mode notification means as the specific process,
The specific event is more likely to occur when the first specific process is executed than when the second specific process is executed,
the specific notification means executes the specific notification as a notification corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event,
A specific event control means (processing for setting a precursor mode by the main control device 101) is provided for causing the specific event when the result of the specific processing by the specific processing means is a corresponding result (AT mode transition winning, CZ mode transition winning) corresponding to causing the specific event,
The gaming machine described in feature A1 is characterized in that the specific event control means is equipped with a means (a function of executing a process by the main control unit 101 to set the number of premonition games to 0) that can cause the specific event in the next play after the special game that resulted in the special result when the result of the specific processing triggered by the special result becomes the corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won, a first specific process is executed in which a specific event is more likely to occur when the first operation mode is operated, and a second specific process is executed in which a specific event is less likely to occur than in the first operation mode when the second operation mode is operated. In this configuration, a specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of a specific event is executed in the game that resulted in the special result. In addition, since a specific event occurs in the game following the special game that resulted in the special result, the need to execute a specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of a specific event in the game that resulted in the corresponding result that the specific event will occur is increased. In this way, even if a configuration in which a specific process is executed after the operation of the stop operation means is performed and a specific event may occur in the next game, it is possible to avoid the specific event occurring without being notified of the occurrence of the specific event, and it is possible to suppress surprise attacks by the specific event, and the period during which the specific notification can be executed is more limited, so that the player's attention to the game can be focused on that period and the attention to the game can be increased to the maximum.

Feature A3. A gaming machine according to Feature A2, characterized in that when the specific event is caused by the specific event control means, the game (AT mode) following the game in which the specific event occurred is more advantageous to the player than the game (CZ mode, normal mode) before the specific event occurred.

According to the above configuration, the player's advantage increases from the special game in which the result of the specific process triggered by the special result becomes the corresponding result, so there is a high need to perform the specific notification in the special game. Therefore, by applying the configuration of feature A1 in such a situation, it is expected that the excellent effect of feature A1 will be more effectively achieved.

The expression "highly advantageous for the player" may also be expressed as "the bonus granted by the bonus granting means has a large expected bonus (net increase in number of coins) per game" or "the result of the specific process is likely to be advantageous for the player."

Feature A4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing a process to cause the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) capable of making the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means in the play following the special game higher than the frequency of execution in the play up to the special game, based on the result of the specific processing by the specific processing means.

According to the above configuration, based on the result of the specific process triggered by the special result, the frequency of the mode notification increases in the next game after the special game that resulted in the special result. Therefore, by following the mode notification, the player can achieve the desired result and efficiently obtain the bonus based on the desired result. Furthermore, because the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is made within the special game, the player is notified by the specific notification at least before the frequency of the mode notification increases, making it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature A5. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result winning can be established, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a mode result (push order bell) is set in which a second result winning can be established in which the benefit given by the benefit giving means is different from the case in which the first result winning is established;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the mode notification means is configured to be able to execute an operation mode including the first operation mode and the second operation mode as the mode notification based on the operation of the start operation means.

According to the above configuration, when the game following a special game that has won a special result wins a pattern result and a pattern notification is made based on the pattern result, if at least a specific notification corresponding to the result of a specific process triggered by the special result is executed within the special game, the pattern notification executed at the start of the game that has won the pattern result and the specific notification are unlikely to overlap. In this way, it is possible to avoid confusing the player due to overlapping notifications.

In particular, in a configuration such as feature A4 where the frequency of execution of the status notification increases from the game following the special game, there is a high possibility that the status notification will be performed at the start of the game following the game in which the special result was won as described above, and there is great significance in executing the specific notification within the special game.

Feature A6. The specific processing means is provided with a means for executing a third specific processing as the specific processing before the stop operation means is operated in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific role) different from the special result (a function for executing a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101),
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the gaming machine is equipped with a second specific notification means (a function of executing a start-time CZ performance setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a notification corresponding to the result of the third specific processing at least by the specific timing.

According to the above configuration, in a game with a specific result, the third specific process is performed before the operation of the stop operation means. In such a case, it is possible to easily make a notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process within the game. In other words, the specific notification can be said to be set to be executed at a specific timing to coincide with the notification in the case of the specific result. In this way, it is possible to avoid the sense of incongruity caused by the timing of the notification of the result of the specific process differing depending on the lottery result of the lottery process, and it is also possible to prevent the result of the specific process from being discovered due to the difference in the notification timing.

In relation to the "second specific notification means," the "specific notification means" in feature A1 may be rephrased as the "first specific notification means."

Feature A7. The gaming machine described in Feature A6, characterized in that the second specific notification means is capable of executing a notification (tenpai presentation) corresponding to the result of the third specific process at a timing prior to the specific timing.

According to the above configuration, in a game with a specific result, the third specific process is performed before the operation of the stop operation means, and a notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process is executed at a timing prior to the specific timing. In other words, when the first specific process or the second specific process is executed as the specific process, it is assumed that a notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is executed at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means, and when a specific result is won, a notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process as the specific process is executed before the specific timing. In this way, the timing at which the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is executed is diversified, and it is also possible to realize a game in which the result of the specific process can be predicted based on the relationship between the lottery result that triggers the specific process and the notification timing, which can contribute to improving the interest of the game.

Feature A8. The specific processing means is
A means for executing a process for generating a specific event (AT mode transition winning, CZ mode transition, AT additional winning, ceiling counter decrement) that makes it easier to execute the mode notification by the mode notification means as the specific process,
A gaming machine as described in feature A6 or feature A7, characterized in that the specific processing in the case of the special result is set so that the specific event is more likely to occur than the specific processing in the case of a predetermined specific result (e.g., Cherry A).

According to the above configuration, a specific event is more likely to occur when a specific process such as the first specific process or the second specific process is performed based on a special result than when a specific process such as the third specific process is performed based on a specific result. Therefore, although a notification corresponding to the result of a specific process is overwhelmingly easier to execute in a game in which a specific result is won, a notification that leads to a specific event desired by a player is more likely to occur in a game in which a special result is won. Therefore, by deliberately executing a notification corresponding to the result of a specific process in a game in which the specific process is performed even if the result is a special result, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for a notification corresponding to the result of a specific process even in a game in which a specific result is won.

Feature A9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A6 to A8, characterized in that the probability that the lottery result selected by the lottery means will be one of the other specific results (normal lip A-C, chance eyes A-C, cherries A-C, watermelon) is set to be higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the special result.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of special results is lower than that of other specific results, so if the timing of the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is timed to coincide with the special result, inconveniences such as the notification of other specific results not being made until after the specific process is executed can easily occur. In this regard, by notifying the result of the specific process in accordance with the other specific results, it is possible to blend in the special result with the other specific results, preventing the content of the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process from being discerned from the notification timing, and it is possible to appropriately increase the attention to the notification.

Feature A10. The specific processing means is provided with a means for executing a third specific processing as the specific processing before the stop operation means is operated in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific role) different from the special result (a function for executing a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101),
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A9, characterized in that the execution of the first specific process in response to the special result is set to be more advantageous to the player than the execution of the third specific process in response to a predetermined specific result.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won, the first specific process is executed by operating in the first operation mode, which is more advantageous than the third specific process that is executed regardless of the operation mode when another special result is won. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player more careful in the operation mode when a special result is won, and it is possible to make the player want to know the result of the first specific process based on that operation sooner, which enhances the significance of the specific notification in the special game that results in a special result as in feature A1.

Feature A11. The specific processing means is provided with a means for executing a third specific processing as the specific processing before the stop operation means is operated in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific role) different from the special result (a function for executing a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101),
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A10, characterized in that it is set up so that it is more advantageous for a player to execute the third specific process in response to a predetermined specific result than to execute the second specific process in response to the special result.

According to the above configuration, if the second operation mode is used when a special result is won, the second specific process is executed, which is less favorable than the third specific process that is executed regardless of the operation mode when another special result is won. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player more careful with the operation mode when a special result is won. In particular, in relation to feature A10, this makes the player want to know the result of the second specific process based on that operation sooner, which enhances the significance of providing a specific notification in a special game that results in a special result, as in feature A1.

Feature A12. Equipped with a pre-announcement means capable of executing pre-announcements (ten-pair effects, confirmation effects, and specific notification effects) corresponding to the results of the specific processing (a function for executing a process to cause a ten-pair effect or a specific notification effect to be performed in response to a special role in the start-time CZ effect setting process by the display control device 81, and a function for executing a process to cause a confirmation effect to be performed when a cherry is won),
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A11, characterized in that the advance notification means is equipped with a means capable of executing the advance notification at a timing prior to the specific timing in the special game (a function of executing a process in the start CZ performance setting process by the display control device 81 so that a tenpai performance or a specific notification performance is performed in response to a special role).

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the specific processing differs depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, a pre-notification corresponding to the specific processing may be made at a timing prior to the specific timing at which the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is made. This allows the player to know in advance that a specific notification will be made, and even for specific notifications with limited notification timing, it is possible to ensure a longer period, thereby optimizing the game presentation.

Feature A13: The specific notification means is capable of executing, as the specific notification, either a content notification including advantageous content that is advantageous to the player or a content notification including unadvantageous content that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous content being performed, depending on the result of the specific processing;
The system is configured such that, after the advance notification is performed by the advance notification means, the specific notification of the advantageous content may be performed, and, after the advance notification is performed by the advance notification means, the specific notification of the non-advantageous content may be performed,
Furthermore, the gaming machine described in feature A12 is configured such that after the advance notification is made by the advance notification means, the specific notification of the advantageous content is more likely to be made than the specific notification of the non-advantageous content.

According to the above configuration, even if an advance notification is given before the execution of a specific process, the subsequent specific notification may be advantageous or unadvantageous, so that even if an advance notification is given, there is less risk of inconsistency in the subsequent specific notification. Furthermore, when an advance notification is given, it is likely to be advantageous, so it is possible to favorably increase the attention given to the advance notification.

Feature A14. A gaming machine according to Feature A12 or Feature A13, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing a process for performing a tenpai effect by the display control device 81) for making the advance notification by the advance notification means after a branching timing (first stop ON operation) in the operation of each of the stop operation means to determine whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the advance notification by the advance notification means prevents the player from deciding which operation mode to use. In other words, for example, if the content of the specific notification could be detected in advance, the second specific process would be performed if the detected content was not favorable to the player, but it is conceivable that the player could operate in the second operation mode to obtain the second benefit. However, by generating the advance notification after the timing of branching between the first operation mode and the second operation mode as described above, it becomes difficult for the player to perform the above action.

Feature A15. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A12 to A14, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing a process for performing a specific notification effect by the display control device 81) for making the advance notification by the advance notification means prior to a branching timing (first stop ON operation) in the operation of each of the stop operation means to determine whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the player can decide which operation mode to use based on the advance notification from the advance notification means. In other words, for example, if the content of the specific notification can be detected in advance, if the detected content is not favorable to the player, the player can operate in the second operation mode to obtain the second special processing, and if the detected content is favorable to the player, the player can operate the stop operation means more carefully. By generating the advance notification as described above before the timing of the branch between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the player can determine whether to operate in the first operation mode or the second operation mode based on the advance notification, and can efficiently obtain the special benefit. It is also possible to greatly enhance the performance leading up to the specific notification.

Feature A16. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A12 to A15, characterized in that it is provided with a second advance notification means (a function of executing a process to perform a ready-to-play effect or a specific notification effect when the special role is not won by the display control device 81) that performs the advance notification or a notification having a notification mode common to the advance notification in a game in which the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result.

With the above configuration, the advance notification occurs even if another specific result is obtained, so the advance notification is less likely to be a sign of a special result. This makes it more difficult to predict the game result from the notification content, and allows players to enjoy the notification more purely.

Feature A17: The specific processing means is configured to execute the specific processing using specific numerical information (random numbers for AT lottery or random numbers for additional lottery) acquired before executing the specific processing;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a pre-determination process by the main control device 101) capable of specifying a result of the specific process when the specific numerical information is used in the specific process before the specific process is performed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A16, wherein the advance notification is executed based on the result of the advance determination means.

With the above configuration, even if the special result is one that is processed differently depending on the operation mode, it is possible to specify in advance the result of the first specific process when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, or the result of the second specific process when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, and advance notification is performed based on the result that has been specified in advance, thereby making it possible to increase the reliability of advance notification.

Feature A18. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a specific pattern stops at a specific position of a specific reel (left reel 32L) among the reels, and the first pattern combination stops at the activated position;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (Cherry A to C) different from the special result, the specific symbols stop at the specific position of the specific rotating body, and a third symbol combination different from the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination stops at the valid position, whereby a bonus corresponding to the specific result is awarded by the bonus awarding means;
The gaming machine described in any one of features A12 to A17, characterized in that the advance notification means is equipped with a determination means (a function of executing processing for performing a confirmation presentation when a cherry is won by the display control device 81) that can execute the advance notification when the specific pattern stops at a specific position of the specific orbiting body and other orbiting bodies are not stopped.

When a specific pattern stops at a specific position on a specific rotating body, it is not possible to determine from the stop result whether this is based on a specific result or due to the first operation mode when the special role result is won. In this configuration, since an advance notification may be made when a specific pattern stops at a specific position on the specific rotating body, it is not possible to determine whether the advance notification corresponds to a specific process based on a specific result or to the subsequent first or second specific process, and the options for predicting the outcome when an advance notification is made are increased, making it possible to favorably increase the attention paid to the advance notification and the specific notification.

Feature A19. The specific processing means is provided with a means for executing a third specific processing as the specific processing before the stop operation means is operated in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result (a function for executing a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101, etc.);
The gaming machine described in feature A18, wherein the determination means executes, as the advance notification, a notification corresponding to the result of the third determination process based on the determination result.

According to the above configuration, the third specific process is performed before the stop operation, and the notification corresponding to the result is executed as an advance notification when a specific pattern stops at a specific position on the specific rotating body. By doing so, if the scene in which the advance notification is performed is a special result, the situation is still the same as the stop result before the execution of the specific process, but there is no inconsistency in the content of the advance notification, making it possible to increase the reliability of the advance notification.

Feature A20. The gaming machine described in Feature A18 or Feature A19, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result, the specific pattern does not stop at the specific position of the specific rotating body, and the second pattern combination stops at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won, if the first operation mode is used, a specific image stops at a specific position on a specific rotating body, but if the second operation mode is used, the specific image does not stop, so it is possible to give a strong impression that the advance notification was performed as a result of the selection of the operation mode. In this way, it is possible to increase the attention paid to the advance notification.

The above configuration is limited to the configuration in which "when each of the stop operation means is operated, a branching timing (first stop ON operation) is set to determine whether the first operation mode or the second operation mode will be selected, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific rotating body at the branching timing by operating in the first operation mode, while when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific pattern does not stop at the specific position of the specific rotating body at the branching timing by operating in the second operation mode, and other patterns stop instead," making it clearer that whether the specific pattern stops or not differs at the branching timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

Feature A21. The stop operation means is provided in a plurality of units corresponding to the number of the rotating bodies,
The specific processing means executes the first specific processing or the second specific processing after all of the stop operation means have been operated,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A20, characterized in that the specific notification means executes the specific notification after the first specific process or the second specific process is executed in the special game.

According to the above configuration, after all operations of the multiple stop operation means are completed, the first specific process and the second specific process are executed and a specific notification is made. This configuration encourages more careful operation of the stop operation means when a special result is won, and the timing of the specific notification in the special game in which the special result is won is more limited. This makes it possible to concentrate the timing at which attention should be paid to the specific notification, and to appropriately increase the level of attention to the specific notification.

Feature A22. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A21, characterized in that the specific notification means executes the specific notification before the start of a game following the special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means has become the special result.

The above configuration clarifies that the special notification is executed within the special game in which the special result was won, and the special notification is not carried over to the next game. With this configuration, the specific timing at which the special notification is executed is further limited, making it possible to appropriately increase the attention to the special notification.

The invention described in the above features A1 to A22 has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features A1 to A22 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a special result (special role) is set in which the bonus awarding means awards a second bonus (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
A mode notifying means for executing a mode notifying of an operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notifying means (for example, a function for executing a push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
An advantage determination means for executing an advantage determination that generates an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player (for example, a function for executing a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101);
A specific notification means capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment by a predetermined notification means (a function of executing a start time CZ performance setting process and a stop time CZ performance setting process by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The advantage determination means
A first advantageous judgment means (a function of executing a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a first advantageous judgment as the advantageous judgment when the start operation means is operated;
A second advantageous judgment means (a function of executing a process for AT lottery at the time of stopping by the main control device 101) that executes a second advantageous judgment as the advantageous judgment after the stop operation means is operated;
Equipped with
The specific notification means is
A first specific notification means (a function of executing a start time CZ presentation setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a first specific notification (a tenpai presentation based on a specific combination) corresponding to the result of the first advantageous judgment as the specific notification at a specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means;
A second specific notification means (a function of executing a stop time CZ effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a second specific notification (a Tenpai effect based on a special role) corresponding to the result of the second advantageous judgment at the specific timing as the specific notification;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a special result is set in which a first bonus is awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, and a second bonus is awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, and a mode notification of the operation mode including the first operation mode and the second operation mode may be performed, thereby realizing a gameplay in which the bonus obtained is different even for the same result depending on whether or not the mode notification is given.

Thus, while the premise of the gameplay is that the bonus obtained by operating the stop operation means may differ, the advantageous judgment that produces an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player may be made based on the operation of the start operation means before the operation of the stop operation means, or it may be made after the operation of the stop operation means. This means that the gameplay is not simply about whether the first bonus or the second bonus can be obtained depending on the mode of operation, but also includes advantageous judgments before and after the operation, thereby diversifying the game.

In addition, while the first specific notification corresponding to the result of the first advantageous judgment before the operation of the stop operation means is made at a specific timing before the operation of a specified stop operation means, the second specific notification corresponding to the result of the second advantageous judgment after the operation of the stop operation means is also made at a specific timing. This makes it difficult to distinguish whether the executed specific notification corresponds to the first advantageous judgment or the second advantageous judgment, and even if the second specific notification is made before the execution of an advantageous judgment, the reliability of the second specific notification can be increased by the first specific notification made after the execution of an advantageous judgment, thereby increasing the attention paid to the specific notification.

Feature B2. The stop operation means is provided in a specific number,
The gaming machine described in feature B1, wherein the second advantageous judgment means executes the second advantageous judgment after the specific number of the stop operation means are operated.

According to the above configuration, the second advantageous judgment is executed after all of the stop operation means have been operated. In this way, it is made clear that the specific timing, which is the timing before a specific stop operation means is operated, is the timing before the operation of all of the stop operation means is completed. Therefore, it is also made clear that the second specific notification is an advance notification before the second advantageous judgment is executed, and the effect of feature B1, which uses the first specific notification to increase the reliability of such an advance notification, can be highlighted.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, characterized in that the second specific notification means is provided with a means (a function for executing processing for performing a tenpai effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the second specific notification at the specific timing, which is before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means (a stop switch corresponding to the third reel) and after the operation of a specific stop operation means (a stop switch corresponding to the first reel).

According to the above configuration, the second specific notification is executed at least after the specific stop operation means is operated. Therefore, in a configuration in which the content or result of the second advantageous judgment differs depending on the order of operation of the stop operation means, for example, it is possible to narrow down the second specific notification to a certain extent before issuing the second specific notification. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the second specific notification itself.

Feature B4. The gaming machine described in Feature B3, characterized in that the second specific notification means is provided with a means (a function of executing a performance setting process when the first stop is ON by the display control device 81) that executes the second specific notification when the specific stop operation means is operated in a first mode (first stop and a specified location), while not executing the second specific notification when the specific stop operation means is operated in a second mode (other than the second or third stop, or the first stop and a specified location) that is different from the first mode.

With the above configuration, the second advantageous judgment executed after the operation of the stop operation means can give the player a different impression depending on whether the specific stop operation means is operated in the first mode or the second mode, and the second specific notification can cause the player to operate the stop operation means more carefully and with a sense of expectation.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the second advantage determination means is configured such that, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the second advantage determination can be executed if the specific stop operation means is operated in the first manner, and the second advantage determination cannot be executed if the specific stop operation means is operated in the second manner.

The above configuration ensures consistency with the fact that whether or not the second specific notification is executed varies depending on the operation mode, as in feature B4. This increases the reliability of the specific notification, making it possible to attract interest in the specific notification.

Feature B6. In each game, when the advantageous judgment is made or when the advantageous judgment is made, the predetermined notification means starts a predetermined notification, and ends the predetermined notification by making a result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment (a function of executing a variable display by a character of a number in each variable area SP1 to SP3 by the display control device 81);
the first specific notification means executes the first specific notification at the specific timing in the predetermined notification, and then executes the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means so that the result notification corresponds to a result of the first advantageous determination;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the second specific notification means executes the second specific notification at the specific timing in the specified notification, and then executes the specified notification by the specified notification means so that the result notification corresponds to the result of the second advantageous judgment.

According to the above configuration, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are effects that occur during the specified notification, and after each of these specific notifications is made, a result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment is made. In this way, even if the second specific notification is made before the second advantageous judgment is made, it is possible to compensate for the notification content of the second specific notification by making a result notification afterwards. In other words, it becomes possible to treat the second specific notification as a pre-notification, and the degree of freedom in the notification content of the second specific notification is greatly increased.

Feature B7: A normal state (normal section) and an advantageous state (advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set;
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, a termination means for terminating the advantageous state (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous zone based on reaching the upper limit game number or the upper limit increase number in the second process for displaying the zone by the main control device 101);
A specifying means for executing the second specific notification by the second specific notification means in a situation where the end of the advantageous state is specified by the end means before the end condition is satisfied (a function for executing a process for performing a push order notification performance for the first small role to the sixth small role instead of a specific notification performance during AT when a special role is won by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, the second specific notification corresponding to the second advantageous judgment made after the operation of the stop operation means can be made in advance as a signal that the upper limit of the advantageous state has been reached. In this way, it is possible to make the second specific notification have a function not only of simply notifying in advance of the second advantageous judgment, but also of notifying in advance that the upper limit of the advantageous state has been reached, and it is possible to increase the attention paid to the second specific notification through the consolidation of functions.

Feature B8. The second specific notification means is capable of executing the second specific notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result;
The gaming machine described in feature B7, wherein the second specific notification includes a notification whose content corresponds to the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, when a second specific notification is issued in a situation where it is specified that the upper limit of the advantageous state will be reached, a second operation mode in which a second benefit is awarded is displayed. In this way, even when the advantageous state ends, the player can obtain more benefits, and in a configuration in which an upper limit is set for the number of benefits that can be obtained in an advantageous state, the upper limit can be reached more quickly.

The invention described in Features B1 to B8 above was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as gaming media betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features B1 to B8 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a special result (special role) is set in which the bonus awarding means awards a second bonus (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
A mode notifying means for notifying the mode of operation of the stop operation means by a predetermined notifying means (for example, a function for notifying the push order by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
A specific judgment means for executing a specific judgment of causing a specific event that makes it easier to execute the mode notification by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function, such as a process for a start-time AT lottery by the main control device 101 or a process for a stop-time AT lottery),
Equipped with
The identification determination means includes:
In a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a first specific judgment is executed as the specific judgment, and when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific judgment that makes the specific event less likely to occur than the first specific judgment is executed as the specific judgment, or the specific judgment is not executed;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the result of the specific judgment by the specific judgment means is a corresponding result corresponding to causing the specific event, a specific notification means (a function for outputting a premonition command based on a delay flag by the main control unit 101, and a function for performing a double-digit presentation based on the premonition command in the start-time CZ presentation setting process by the display control unit 81) is capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result in the special game subsequent to the game.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of a start operation means, a lottery is performed for the game, and when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at a valid position based on the operation of a stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. When the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first bonus is awarded and a first specific judgment is made to cause a specific event that makes it easier to execute a mode notification, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, a special result is set in which a second bonus is awarded and a second specific judgment is made to cause a specific event, and the second bonus is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus, while the first specific judgment is more likely to cause a specific event than the second specific judgment. Therefore, when a special result is obtained, it is possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which the player is left to choose between the advantageous side of the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side for causing a specific event (first operation mode).

Moreover, in the above configuration, if the result of the specific judgment is a corresponding result that causes a specific event, the specific notification of the corresponding result may be executed not in the current game, but in a subsequent special game in which the special result is won. In other words, in a special game in which a special result is won, there may be an inconvenience that the specific notification can only be made after a stop operation is performed, but this configuration addresses this inconvenience by notifying the result of the specific judgment in an earlier game in the special game. In this way, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of freedom of specific notification in a special game in which a special result is won, while still enjoying the benefits of improved playability that come from providing a special result.

Feature C2. The specific determination means is configured to be able to execute a third specific determination as the specific determination in a specific game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result, regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means;
The gaming machine described in feature C1 is characterized in that, when the result of the third specific judgment by the specific judgment means becomes the corresponding result, the specific notification means is capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result in the special game after the specific game.

According to the above configuration, instead of issuing a specific notification in a specific game in which the third specific judgment is made regardless of the operation mode, a specific notification is issued in a special game in which the first specific judgment or the second specific judgment is made depending on the operation mode, and the correlation between the operation mode and the specific notification is strengthened. This makes it possible to give a strong impression that the corresponding result was won by one's own operation mode, which can contribute to improving the enjoyment of the game.

Feature C3. The gaming machine described in Feature C2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second specific notification means (a function for executing a process for setting the display control device 81 to perform a double-digit effect in a start-time CZ effect setting process) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result during the specific game when the result of the third specific determination by the specific determination means becomes the corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, there are cases where a specific notification is made in a specific game in which a third specific judgment is made regardless of the operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to expect the excellent effect of increasing the degree of freedom of specific notifications in special games while not lowering the attention level of the specific game too much.

Feature C4. A gaming machine according to Feature C2 or Feature C3, characterized in that it is equipped with a third specific notification means (a function for outputting a premonition command based on a delay flag and the end of CZ mode by the main control device 101, and a function for performing a double-digit presentation based on a premonition command in a start-time CZ presentation setting process by the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result in a game that follows the specific game and is different from the special game when the result of the third specific determination by the specific determination means becomes the corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, if a specific notification is not made in a specific game in which a third specific judgment is made regardless of the operation mode, the specific notification can be executed even if a special result is not won, so it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience of the specific notification not being made for a long time.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C4, characterized in that the specific notification means is capable of executing the specific notification when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode during the special game, and is capable of executing the specific notification when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

Even in the case of a special result in which the first and second specific judgments are made depending on the operation mode, the configuration is such that a specific notification corresponding to the result of the previous specific judgment is made in the special game in which the special result was won, so that the specific notification can be made regardless of the operation mode. Therefore, by making the specific notification possible regardless of the operation mode as in the above configuration, it is possible to give the impression that the probability that the result of the first specific judgment or the second specific judgment (particularly the second specific judgment) will be the corresponding result is higher than it actually is. In this way, it is possible to create anticipation of the occurrence of a specific event, especially when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the second operation mode.

Feature C6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C5, characterized in that the second pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position even if the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell) different from the special result.

According to the above configuration, when a special notification corresponding to the result of a previous special judgment is made in a special game that results in a special result win, it becomes difficult to determine from the stop result in that special game whether it was a special result win or a special result win. In other words, by utilizing the configuration that makes a special notification in a special game, it is possible to not only give the impression that a special event will occur as a result of a special result, but also to give the impression that a special event will occur as a result of a special result. This can increase the interest in the game.

Feature C7. The gaming machine described in Feature C6, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result, if the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the second pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position, and if the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a third pattern combination different from the first pattern combination and the second pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the special notification increases the level of attention in the game in which the special result is won. Depending on the operation mode at the time of winning the special result, the second pattern combination may or may not stop, so it is possible to give the impression that the second pattern combination stopping and the special notification at the time of winning the special result was only possible because the operation mode at the time of winning the special result was the first operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the level of attention when the special result is won by making good use of the commonality between the stop numbers of the existing special result, which is the so-called push order role, and the special result.

Feature C8. The gaming machine described in Feature C6 or Feature C7, characterized in that when the specific judgment means executes the specific judgment based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being the special result, the specific judgment means executes the specific judgment so as to make the corresponding result less likely to occur than the first specific judgment.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won, a specific notification is made based on the result of the specific process that preceded it, and it is also possible to give the impression that a corresponding result will be obtained by a specific process based on a special result by utilizing the commonality between the stop results when the second operation mode is used when a special result is won and the stop results of the special result. In other words, by simply making a specific notification when a special result is won, it is not only possible to give the impression that a corresponding result will be obtained even if the result is a special result, but also possible to reduce the falseness of the impression that a corresponding result will be obtained even if the result is a special result by utilizing the commonality between the stop results and the special result.

Feature C9. A special effect execution means (FIG. 70(c)) is provided for executing a predetermined notification (push order prediction effect) based on the operation of the start operation means, executing a first special notification (correct effect) suggesting that the result of the specific judgment is the corresponding result when the stop operation means is operated in a first specific order, and executing a second special notification (incorrect effect) suggesting that the result of the specific judgment is a result different from the corresponding result when the stop operation means is operated in a second specific order different from the first specific order;
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that the special effect execution means executes the specified notification during the special game in which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means, and is capable of executing the first special notification when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

As in the above configuration, after a predetermined notification is executed, a first special notification is executed to suggest that the result of the specific judgment is a specific result, or a second special notification is executed to suggest that it is not a specific result, depending on the operation order of the stop operation means. In such a configuration, when a specific notification is executed in a special game in which a special result has been won, even if the operation is performed in the unfavorable second operation mode, such as when the second specific judgment is executed as the specific judgment, by executing the first special notification to suggest that it is a specific result, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a specific event even if the operation is performed in the second operation mode and the second pattern combination is stopped.

Feature C10. The second pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position even if the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell) different from the special result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, if the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the second pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position, and if the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a third pattern combination different from the first pattern combination and the second pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position,
The gaming machine described in feature C9 is characterized in that the special effect execution means executes the specified notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and is capable of executing the first special notification when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

According to the above configuration, when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the first operation mode when the special result is won, a first special notification may be issued, suggesting that the result of the specific judgment is a specific result. In this way, when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the second operation mode when the special result is won, the first special notification is issued, and in relation to feature C9 in which a specific notification is issued, it is possible to give the impression that the first special notification was issued (a specific result was won) by successfully stopping the second pattern combination when the special result is won. As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the attention not only to games in which the special result is won, but also to games in which the special result is won, and it is possible to appropriately increase the interest in the game.

Feature C11. The gaming machine described in Feature C10, characterized in that the special effect execution means executes the predetermined notification when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result, and is capable of executing the second special notification when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, in the event of a winning special result, the first special notification is executed if the second symbol combination is successfully stopped, while the second special notification is executed if the second symbol combination fails to be stopped. This further strengthens the impression that the first special notification is being executed in relation to the operation sequence and the stop number result.

Feature C12. The gaming machine described in Feature C10 or Feature C11, wherein the specific notification means is capable of preventing the specific notification from being executed in a game in which the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and the first special notification is executed by the special performance execution means (FIG. 70(d)).

According to the above configuration, even if the second pattern combination is successfully stopped when a special result is won and the first special notification is executed, there are cases where a specific notification indicating that it is a corresponding result is not executed. In other words, in some cases where the second pattern combination is stopped and the first special notification is executed, the specific notification is executed. In this way, it is possible to resolve the contradiction between the second pattern combination being stopped when a special result is won and the specific notification not being executed (the specific event not occurring).

The invention described in Features C1 to C12 above was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features C1 to C12 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process by the main control device 101) for awarding a number of bonuses corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second picture combination different from the first picture combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a special result (special role) is set in which the bonus awarding means awards a second bonus (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
the bonus awarding means is configured to require a first period when the first symbol combination stops at the valid position to award the first bonus, and to require a second period longer than the first period when the second symbol combination stops at the valid position to award the second bonus,
An advantage determination means for executing an advantage determination that generates an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player (for example, a function for executing an AT mode transition lottery or an AT addition lottery by the main control device 101);
When the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, advantageous event means for causing the advantageous event (for example, a function for executing a process of switching to the AT mode by the main control device 101 or a process of adding on);
a specific notification means (a function of executing start-time CZ presentation setting processing and stop-time CZ presentation setting processing by the display control device 81) which executes a specific notification (presentation of each game in the CZ mode) by a specific notification means, which notifies a user of a content including advantageous content (explosion presentation) corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means being the advantageous result after starting a predetermined notification (bomb presentation), and non-advantageous content (non-explosion presentation) corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means being a result different from the advantageous result;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be more likely to be executed as the advantageous content at a first timing when the first period has elapsed after each of the orbiting bodies has stopped than at a second timing when the second period has elapsed after each of the orbiting bodies has stopped.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a game value of an amount corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. If the lottery result is a special result, a first bonus is awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, whereas a second bonus that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus is awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode. Therefore, when a special result is reached, it may be more advantageous for the player to select the operation with the more advantageous bonus (the second operation mode).

In addition, an advantageous judgment is made that will cause an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, and the result of this advantageous judgment is announced as a specific notification. The specific notification is set to announce either advantageous content that corresponds to the occurrence of an advantageous event or non-advantageous content that does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event after a predetermined notification is executed, so a player hoping for an advantageous event to occur will likely expect the specific notification to have advantageous content.

The specific notification is set so that it is more likely to be advantageous after the first period during which the first benefit is awarded has elapsed after each rotating body has stopped rotating, than after the second period during which the second benefit is awarded has elapsed.

By doing this, it is possible to take advantage of the conflicting desires of wanting to obtain a more advantageous bonus and wanting the specific notification to have advantageous content to confirm the occurrence of an advantageous event, dramatically improving the playability of games that have resulted in a special result win.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the advantage determination means is set to execute a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and to execute a second advantage determination, which is less likely to result in the advantage result than the first advantage determination, as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or to not execute the advantage determination.

According to the above configuration, in a special game in which a special role is won, the content of the advantageous judgment and whether or not it is executed differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, and the first operation mode on the side to which the first benefit is granted is more likely to cause an advantageous event than the second operation mode on the side to which the second benefit is granted. As described above, the first timing at which the first period at which the first benefit is granted elapses and the second timing at which the second period at which the second benefit is granted elapses are more likely to have advantageous content corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event. Therefore, with this configuration, the relationship between the content of the advantageous judgment in the special game, whether or not it is executed, and the benefit granted matches the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a contradiction to occur between the advantageous judgment and the specific notification, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the specific notification and greatly contribute to improving the interest of the game.

Feature D3: When the bonus awarding means awards a third bonus that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus and less advantageous to the player than the second bonus, the bonus awarding means requires a third period that is longer than the first period and shorter than the second period;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result and a picture combination corresponding to the specific result stops at the pay position, the third benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means as a benefit corresponding to the specific result;
A gaming machine as described in feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that at a third timing when the third period has elapsed after each of the orbiting bodies has stopped, the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is less likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the first timing, and the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the second timing.

According to the above configuration, not only the first and second benefits that can be granted when a special result is won, but also the third benefit that can be granted when another specific result is won, the likelihood of advantageous content being obtained is associated with the length of time required for the benefit to be granted. In this way, it is possible to break away from the conventional game of trying to obtain a more advantageous benefit, and to realize a novel gameplay in which a different advantageous event is more likely to occur by obtaining a less advantageous benefit.

Feature D4. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a special result, the second symbol combination can be stopped at the active position, and the second benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that at the second timing when the second period has elapsed after each of the rotating bodies has stopped, if the second period is a period triggered by the special result, the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be less likely to be executed as the advantageous content or is set to not be the advantageous content, compared to when the period is triggered by the special result.

According to the above configuration, even if the time required for the award of the bonus is the same for the second period, the likelihood of the advantageous content differs depending on the lottery result. In particular, the stopping results are the same for the case where the second bonus is awarded in the event of a special result and the case where the second bonus is awarded in the event of a special result, and it is not possible to determine the likelihood of the advantageous content from the stopping results. In this way, it is possible to realize a gameplay feature in which the type of content notification can be predicted from the lottery result and the length of the time required for the award of the bonus.

Feature D5. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a special result, a third symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at the active position, and the first benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that at the first timing when the first period has elapsed after each of the rotating bodies has stopped, if the first period is a period triggered by the special result, the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be less likely to be executed as the advantageous content or is set to not be the advantageous content, compared to when the first period is a period triggered by the special result.

According to the above configuration, even if the time required for the award of the bonus is the same for the first period, the likelihood of the advantageous content differs depending on the lottery result. In particular, since the stop results differ between when the first bonus is awarded in the event of a special result and when the first bonus is awarded in the event of a special result, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the type of content notification can be predicted from the stop results and the length of the time required for the award of the bonus.

Feature D6. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a replay result and a picture combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the active position, the bonus granting means executes a replay process in which the same number of bets as the game resulting in the replay result are set as the bonus;
In the case of a predetermined replay result (e.g., Cherry A to C), a fourth period is required when a predetermined number of bets are set in the replay process, and in the case of a specific replay result (e.g., normal lip A to C), a fifth period longer than the fourth period is required when the predetermined number of bets are set in the replay process.
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be more likely to be executed as the advantageous content at a fourth timing, when the fourth period has elapsed after each of the orbiting bodies has stopped, than at a fifth timing, when the fifth period has elapsed after each of the orbiting bodies has stopped.

According to the above configuration, the likelihood that a specific notification will be advantageous varies depending on the length of the period for which the bet amount is set based on winning the replay result, and the notification is more likely to be advantageous when the bet amount is set over a shorter period. In this way, there is no need to significantly differ the presentation content when the first or second bonus is awarded, as with other special results, from the presentation content for the replay result, and it is possible to realize the innovative playability of feature D1 with a relatively simple configuration even for the replay result.

Feature D7: When the bonus awarding means awards a third bonus that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus and less advantageous to the player than the second bonus, the bonus awarding means requires a third period that is longer than the first period and shorter than the second period;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result and a picture combination corresponding to the specific result stops at the pay position, the third benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means as a benefit corresponding to the specific result;
At a third timing when the third period has elapsed after each of the rotating bodies has stopped, the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is less likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the first timing, and the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the second timing,
The fourth period is set to be a period having the same or substantially the same length as the third period,
The gaming machine described in feature D6 is characterized in that the likelihood of the advantageous content being executed in the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be the same or to the same extent when the fourth timing occurs after each of the orbiting bodies has stopped based on the specified re-play result and when the third timing occurs after each of the orbiting bodies has stopped based on the specific result.

According to the above configuration, not only the first and second benefits that can be granted when a special result is won, but also the third benefit that can be granted when another specific result is won, the likelihood of it becoming advantageous is associated with the length of time required for the benefit to be granted. In this way, it is possible to break away from the conventional game of trying to obtain a more advantageous benefit, and to realize a novel gameplay in which a different advantageous event is more likely to occur by obtaining a less advantageous benefit.

Furthermore, the fourth period, in which a predetermined number of bets is set based on a predetermined replay result, is set to be the same or approximately the same length as the third period, and the likelihood of advantageous content occurring when the third or fourth period has passed since the orbiting body stopped is the same whether the result is a predetermined replay result or a specific result. In this way, it is possible to realize the innovative gameplay of feature D1, in which the likelihood of advantageous content occurring varies depending on the period since the orbiting body stopped, regardless of the type of so-called small winnings result or replay result, and this can be of great help in increasing the interest of the game.

Feature D8. When the bonus awarding means awards a third bonus that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus and less advantageous to the player than the second bonus, the bonus awarding means requires a third period that is longer than the first period and shorter than the second period;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result and a picture combination corresponding to the specific result stops at the pay position, the third benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means as a benefit corresponding to the specific result;
At a third timing when the third period has elapsed after each of the rotating bodies has stopped, the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is less likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the first timing, and the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the second timing,
The fifth period is set to be longer than the third period,
The gaming machine described in feature D6 or feature D7 is characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be the advantageous content when the third timing occurs after each of the orbiting bodies have stopped based on the specific re-play result than when the fifth timing occurs after each of the orbiting bodies have stopped based on the specific re-play result.

According to the above configuration, not only the first and second benefits that can be granted when a special result is won, but also the third benefit that can be granted when another specific result is won, the likelihood of advantageous content being obtained is associated with the length of time required for the benefit to be granted. In this way, it is possible to break away from the conventional game of trying to obtain a more advantageous benefit, and to realize a novel gameplay in which a different advantageous event is more likely to occur by obtaining a less advantageous benefit.

Furthermore, the fifth period, in which a predetermined number of bets are set based on a specific replay result, is set to be a period longer than the third period, and it is set so that if the fifth period has passed since the circling body stopped in the case of a specific replay result, it is less likely to be advantageous than if the third period has passed since the circling body stopped in the case of a specific result. In this way, it is possible to realize the innovative gameplay of feature D1, in which the ease of advantageous content varies depending on the period since the circling body stopped, regardless of the type of so-called small prize result or replay result, and this can be of great help in increasing the interest of the game.

Feature D9. The stop operation means is provided in a specific number,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that the specific notification means initiates the specified notification when a specific number of the stop operation means are operated among the multiple stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, the period from when the specified notification starts in the specific notification to when the content notification becomes advantageous corresponds to the period from when all the rotating bodies stop to when the awarding of the bonus is completed. In this way, even the period after the rotating bodies stop can be incorporated into the game, and this configuration can be used to ideally increase the interest of the game.

Feature D10. The gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D9, characterized in that the specific notification means, after executing the content notification of the non-advantageous content, executes a result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means, while, after executing the content notification of the advantageous content, it is capable of executing a corresponding notification (AT winning notification) corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event before or after the result notification.

As in the above configuration, when advantageous content is notified, a corresponding notification and a result notification are made as a set, and when non-advantageous content is notified, only a result notification is made. In this configuration, if the shorter the period after the orbiting body stops, as in feature D1, the more likely it is that the advantageous content will be, it is possible to effectively secure the period for the corresponding notification, and there is no need to vary the length of the period for presentation depending on the result of the advantageous judgment. It is possible to expect the excellent effects of feature D1 while optimizing the game progress.

The invention described in the above features D1 to D10 has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to rotate. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features D1 to D10 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second picture combination different from the first picture combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a special result (special role) is set in which the bonus awarding means awards a second bonus (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
The game device is provided with an advantage determination means (for example, a function of executing processing related to instruction functions such as a process for a start time AT lottery by the main control device 101 and a process for a stop time AT lottery by the main control device 101) that executes an advantage determination to generate an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (a random number for an AT lottery and a random number for an additional lottery),
the advantage determination means is set to execute a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and to execute a second advantage determination, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage determination, as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or to not execute the advantage determination;
a pre-determination means (a function of executing a pre-determination process by the main control device 101) capable of determining the result of the advantageous judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the advantageous judgment before the advantageous judgment is made;
the first determining means includes a first determining means capable of determining a result of the first advantageous determination when the specific numerical information is used for the first advantageous determination when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the special game, it is equipped with a specific notification means (a function of executing a presentation setting process when the first stop is ON by the display control device 81, and a process for performing a specific notification presentation) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to a specific result by the first destination identification means at a specific timing before the operation of a specified stop operation means is executed.

The above configuration allows a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of a start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of a stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. When the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first bonus is awarded and a first advantageous judgment is executed as an advantageous judgment that generates an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, a special result is set in which a second bonus is awarded and a second advantageous judgment is executed as an advantageous judgment, and while the second bonus is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment. Therefore, when a special result is reached, it is possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which the player is left to choose between the advantageous side of the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the advantageous judgment (first operation mode).

Moreover, in the above configuration, in a game in which a special result in which different benefits or advantageous judgments are awarded are won depending on such operation modes, it is assumed that at least the first operation mode was operated before the advantageous judgment is made, and the result of the first advantageous judgment when it is made is identified, and a specific notification corresponding to the identified result may be made before the advantageous judgment is made.

By doing this, the result of the first advantageous judgment on the side that is advantageous to the player can be identified in advance, and it becomes possible to perform a presentation according to the result of that advantageous side in advance, making it possible to set a presentation that greatly heightens the result of that advantageous judgment in advance. This greatly increases the freedom of presentation design, and makes it possible to ideally increase the interest of the game.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, characterized in that the specific notification means includes a means (a function of executing processing for performing a tenpai presentation by the display control device 81) for making the specific notification at a timing after a branching timing (first stop ON operation) in the operation of each of the stop operation means to determine whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification makes it impossible for the player to decide which operation mode to use. In other words, for example, if the content of the specific notification could be completely perceived before operation, if the perceived content was not favorable to the player, a second advantageous judgment would be made, but it is conceivable that the player could operate in the second operation mode to obtain the second benefit. However, if the specific notification is generated after the timing at which the first and second operation modes branch off as described above, it is possible to start a presentation corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment before the advantageous judgment, while preventing the player from deciding which operation mode to use based on the specific notification.

Feature E3. The gaming machine described in Feature E2, characterized in that the first operation mode is achieved by operating a specific stop operation means (left stop switch 42) in a specific order (first order) among the multiple stop operation means provided, and the second operation mode is achieved by operating a predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means in the specific order, and the branching timing is the timing at which the specific order stop operation means is operated.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature E2, and by doing so, it is possible to determine which advantageous judgment will be executed simply by determining which stop operation means will be operated in a specific order, making it possible to perform an advantageous judgment when a special result is won with a relatively simple configuration, and also making it possible to perform identification by a prior identification means when a special result is won.

Feature E4. The gaming machine described in Feature E3, characterized in that the first operation mode is set to operate the specific stop operation means in the specific order and to operate the specific stop operation means at a timing when the specific pattern on the specific rotating body corresponding to the specific stop operation means is present within a specific range, and the second operation mode is set to operate a predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means in the specific order, and to operate the specific stop operation means in the specific order and to operate the specific stop operation means at a timing when the specific pattern on the specific rotating body is not present within the specific range.

According to the above configuration, the first operation mode and the second operation mode are not only determined by operating a specific stop operation means in a specific order, but also by the operation timing of the specific stop operation means, and whether the first operation mode or the second operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode is different. In this way, the difficulty of performing the first operation mode is increased, and the playability is improved, including the operation for making the first advantageous judgment, and when operating without being bound by the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the probability of the second operation mode being obtained is increased, making it easier to obtain the second advantageous benefit. Therefore, the playability that prioritizes making an advantageous judgment and the playability that does not prioritize making an advantageous judgment are greatly different, and the fun of deciding which to select can be improved.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to Feature E3 or Feature E4, characterized in that the specific notification means is capable of executing the specific notification based on an operation of the stop operation means subsequent to the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is executed based on an operation that occurs after the specific operation, which is the branching timing of the operation mode. This makes it possible to ensure a time leeway for issuing a specific notification without using a restrictive processing configuration in which the destination identification means identifies the operation at the branching timing and then executes the specific notification. Furthermore, since the specific operation is the branching timing of the operation mode, it is thought that the player will be trying to operate more carefully, and if the specific notification is issued at such a timing, there is a possibility that the special notification will be missed. In this regard, by generating the specific notification after the branching timing as described above, it is possible to preferably prevent the specific notification from being missed.

Feature E6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E5, characterized in that it is provided with a second specific notification means (a function of executing a process to perform a ready effect or a specific notification effect when a special role is not won by the display control device 81) that causes the specific notification to be performed at the specific timing in a game in which the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result.

With the above configuration, the specific notification will occur even if another specific result occurs, making it less likely that the specific notification will be a sign of a special result. This makes it more difficult to predict the game result from the notification content, making it possible to enjoy the notification more purely.

Feature E7. The advantage determination means is configured to execute a third advantage determination as the advantage determination before the stop operation means is operated when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result;
A gaming machine described in feature E6, characterized in that the second specific notification means executes the specific notification based on the result of the third advantageous judgment.

According to the above configuration, unlike special results in which the content of the advantageous judgment and whether or not it is executed varies depending on the operation mode, if there is a special result, the third advantageous judgment is executed before the operation of the stop operation means. And since the specific notification based on the special result is a notification based on the result of the third advantageous judgment, it is not a prior notification even at a specific timing, and there is no need to go through special processing such as a prior notification means. In other words, based on this configuration, it is possible to match the execution timing of the specific notification for a special game that has won a special result with the execution timing of the specific notification at the time of winning the special result, thereby preventing the sense of incongruity that only the special game has a different notification mode.

Feature E8. The gaming machine described in Feature E7, wherein the advantage determination means uses the same specific numerical information when executing the first advantage determination, when executing the second advantage determination, and when executing the third advantage determination.

According to the above configuration, common specific numerical information is used regardless of which advantageous judgment is made, so memory capacity can be reduced compared to preparing specific numerical information for each advantageous judgment. Furthermore, even if it is not clear which lottery result is obtained at the time of acquisition, or which operation mode will be obtained, it is possible to perform an advantageous judgment using a common acquisition process without changing the acquisition process, which greatly simplifies the processing configuration.

Feature E9. The gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E8, characterized in that the destination determination means includes a second destination determination means capable of determining the result of the second advantageous judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the second advantageous judgment when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result.

According to the above configuration, not only the first advantageous judgment on the advantageous side, but also the second advantageous judgment side is identified in advance, so that it is possible to cover situations where an advantageous event occurs by operating in the second operation mode, and to issue a specific notification or a different notification, making it possible to diversify notifications in special games that result in special results and the gameplay based on those notifications.

Feature E10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E9, characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing the specific notification by the specific notification means in a notification mode that can be executed even when the specific result by the destination determination means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made, and when the result of the first advantageous judgment is a result that corresponds to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made (a function for executing a process to generate a ready-to-play effect even when a first operation winning notice command, etc., is not received by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the specific notification does not indicate that an advantageous event will not occur if the player operates in the first operation mode, i.e., it is not determined that the player should operate in the second operation mode rather than the first operation mode. In this way, the specific notification is less likely to be an indicator that makes it easier to obtain the second benefit, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Feature E11. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a special result (special role) is set in which the bonus awarding means awards a second bonus (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
The game device is provided with an advantage determination means (for example, a function of executing processing related to instruction functions such as a process for a start time AT lottery by the main control device 101 and a process for a stop time AT lottery by the main control device 101) that executes an advantage determination to generate an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (a random number for an AT lottery and a random number for an additional lottery),
the advantage determination means is set to execute a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and to execute a second advantage determination, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage determination, as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or to not execute the advantage determination;
a pre-determination means (a function of executing a pre-determination process by the main control device 101) capable of determining the result of the advantageous judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the advantageous judgment before the advantageous judgment is made;
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the special game, it is equipped with a specific notification means (a function of executing a presentation setting process when the first stop is ON by the display control device 81, and a process for performing a specific notification presentation) that can execute a specific notification corresponding to a specific result by the prior identification means at a specific timing before the operation of a specified stop operation means is executed.

The above configuration allows a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of a start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of a stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. When the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first bonus is awarded and a first advantageous judgment is executed as an advantageous judgment that generates an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, a special result is set in which a second bonus is awarded and a second advantageous judgment is executed as an advantageous judgment, and while the second bonus is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment. Therefore, when a special result is reached, it is possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which the player is left to choose between the advantageous side of the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the advantageous judgment (first operation mode).

Moreover, in the above configuration, in a game in which a special result in which different benefits or advantageous judgments are awarded depending on such operation modes is won, the result of the advantageous judgment when it is executed may be identified before the advantageous judgment is made, and a specific notification corresponding to the identified result may be executed before the timing of the advantageous judgment being executed.

By doing this, it is possible to perform effects in advance that correspond to the results of advantageous judgments, so it is possible to set effects that greatly heighten the results of the advantageous judgments. This greatly increases the freedom of effect design, and makes it possible to ideally increase the interest of the game.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features E1 to E10 individually to feature E11 above, or to apply a combination of some or all of the respective technical ideas.

The invention described in Features E1 to E11 above was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to rotate. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features E1 to E11 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second picture combination different from the first picture combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a special result (special role) is set in which the bonus awarding means awards a second bonus (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
The game device is provided with an advantage determination means (for example, a function of executing processing related to instruction functions such as a process for a start time AT lottery by the main control device 101 and a process for a stop time AT lottery by the main control device 101) that executes an advantage determination to generate an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (a random number for an AT lottery and a random number for an additional lottery),
the advantage determination means is set to execute a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and to execute a second advantage determination, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage determination, as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or to not execute the advantage determination;
A destination determination means (a function of executing a pre-determination process by the main control device 101) capable of determining the result of the favorable judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the favorable judgment before the favorable judgment is made;
In the special game, at a specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means is executed, a specific notification means (a function of executing a first stop ON time performance setting process by the display control device 81 and a process for performing a specific notification performance) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to a specific result by the prior specification means;
a limiting means for executing the specific notification by the specific notification means in a notification mode that can be executed even when the specific result by the destination specification means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made, or a result that corresponds to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made (a function for executing a process to generate a tenpai presentation even when a first operation winning notice command or the like is not received by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine comprising:

The above configuration allows a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of a start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of a stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. When the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first bonus is awarded and a first advantageous judgment is executed as an advantageous judgment that generates an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, a special result is set in which a second bonus is awarded and a second advantageous judgment is executed as an advantageous judgment, and while the second bonus is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment. Therefore, when a special result is reached, it is possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which the player is left to choose between the advantageous side of the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the advantageous judgment (first operation mode).

Moreover, in the above configuration, in a game in which a special result in which different benefits or advantageous judgments are awarded depending on such operation modes is won, the result of the advantageous judgment when it is executed may be identified before the advantageous judgment is made, and a specific notification corresponding to the identified result may be executed before the timing of the advantageous judgment being executed.

By doing this, it becomes possible to create effects in advance that correspond to the results of an advantageous judgment, making it possible to set up effects that greatly hype up the results of that advantageous judgment in advance.

However, if the result of the advantageous judgment can be known in advance and it becomes possible to determine which operation mode should be used, it becomes difficult to ensure the fairness of the game. In other words, if the result of the first advantageous judgment on the advantageous side does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event even if the first operation mode is used, it is possible to perform an action such as operating in the second operation mode and acquiring the second benefit. In this regard, the above configuration is provided with a restriction means that prevents the result from not corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event even if the first advantageous judgment is made when a specific notification is made, making it difficult to perform the above action. Therefore, it becomes possible to preferably expect the presentation effect of the specific notification while ensuring the fairness of the game.

In the above configuration, "the specific notification by the specific notification means is provided in a notification mode that can be executed even when the specific result by the prior identification means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made, and when the result of the first advantageous judgment is a result that corresponds to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made" may be expressed as "the specific notification means executes the specific notification so that it is not determined that the result of the first advantageous judgment is a result that corresponds to not causing the advantageous event" or "the notification mode of the specific notification is set so that when the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means and the first advantageous judgment is made, the result of the first advantageous judgment may be a result that corresponds to causing the advantageous event, and when the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means and the first advantageous judgment is made, the result of the first advantageous judgment may be a result that corresponds to not causing the advantageous event" or the like.

Feature F2. The gaming machine described in Feature F1, characterized in that the specific notification by the specific notification means is permitted to be executed in a notification mode (confirmed presentation) that is not executed when the result of the first advantageous judgment is a result that corresponds to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made, and when the result of the first advantageous judgment is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made.

According to the above configuration, specific notifications are permitted in notification modes that confirm that an advantageous event will occur if an operation is performed in the first operation mode. Therefore, by restricting notification modes that confirm that an advantageous event will not occur, it is possible not only to eliminate the decrease in reliability of the specific notification itself, but also to improve reliability, thereby making it possible to favorably increase attention to the specific notification.

Feature F3. The specific notification means executes, as the specific notification, a special notification (tenpai effect) being executed by a predetermined notification means;
A gaming machine as described in feature F1 or feature F2, characterized in that the special notification may be executed even if the result determined by the destination determination means is a result that does not correspond to causing the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature F1, and if a special notification can be executed regardless of the result of the identification by the prior identification means, as in the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect of feature F1 with a relatively simple configuration in which the specific notification is determined by whether or not to execute the special notification.

Feature F4: An execution lottery means (a function of executing a tenpai effect lottery process by the display control device 81) for executing an execution lottery for executing the special notification in the special game is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature F3 is characterized in that, when the result of the specified result by the destination specifying means is a result that corresponds to causing the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made, the probability that the execution result in the execution lottery by the execution lottery means will be a result that corresponds to executing the special notification is higher than when the result of the first advantageous judgment is a result that does not correspond to causing the advantageous event, or is configured to execute the special notification without going through the execution lottery.

With the above configuration, it is possible to notify the result determined by the advance determination means simply by adjusting the probability of winning the execution lottery for the special notification or by varying whether or not an execution lottery is held. This makes it possible to achieve the effect of feature F1 with an extremely simple configuration while notifying the result of the advantageous judgment in advance.

Feature F5. When the result of the advantageous judgment is a corresponding result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, a result corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment is notified, and then a predetermined notification is executed, and the corresponding result is executed as the result notification. A first result notification means (a function of executing a bomb effect when the AT is won by the display control device 81) executes a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the result of the advantageous judgment causing the advantageous event as the result notification, and executes the corresponding result as the result notification;
When the result of the advantageous judgment is the non-corresponding result and a result corresponding to the advantageous judgment is to be notified, a second result notifying means (a function of executing a bomb effect when the AT is not won by the display control device 81) executes the non-corresponding result as the result notification, then executes the predetermined notification, and executes the non-corresponding result as the result notification;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that when the result of the determination by the destination determination means is that the result of the advantageous judgment is the corresponding result and the determination notification is made by the determination notification means, the gaming machine is equipped with a means for causing the result notification by the first result notification means (a function for executing a process to generate a bomb effect when a first operation winning prediction command, etc. is received by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when a result is notified in the case where the result of the advantageous judgment is a corresponding result corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event, a so-called revival effect is provided, in which a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event is notified as a result notification, and then a corresponding result is notified as a result notification via a predetermined notification, or the result ends as a non-corresponding result through the predetermined notification, and when a specific notification is made, it is made to become a corresponding result through a predetermined notification after being made as a non-corresponding result. In other words, even if a specific notification is made and a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event is once notified as a result notification, there is a possibility that it will be revived and a corresponding result will be notified as a result notification. Therefore, even if it is possible to predict that the result of the advantageous judgment will be a non-corresponding result from the mode of the specific notification and whether it is executed or not, if the second operation mode is selected based on that alone, the possibility of the above revival will be eliminated by one's own operation. In this way, it is possible to expect the performance effect of the specific notification, while preventing the specific notification from becoming a sign for efficiently acquiring the second benefit.

Feature F6. The gaming machine described in Feature F5, further comprising a means for causing the second result notification means to notify the result when the result determined by the first determination means is that the result of the advantageous judgment is the non-corresponding result and the specific notification is made by the specific notification means (a function for executing a process for generating a bomb effect even if the display control device 81 has not received a first operation winning notice command or the like).

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the advantageous judgment is specified in advance as a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to causing an advantageous event, the result is first notified as a non-corresponding result and then notified as a non-corresponding result via a specified notification. In this way, by performing a so-called revival effect even if the result of the advantageous judgment is a non-corresponding result, it is difficult to distinguish this from the revival effect when the result of the advantageous judgment is a corresponding result, and this makes it possible to prevent the specific notification from being a sign that the second benefit can be efficiently obtained.

Feature F7. The stop operation means is provided in a specific number,
The gaming machine according to feature F5 or feature F6, wherein the first result notification means and the second result notification means execute the predetermined notification when the specific number of the stop operation means are operated.

According to the above configuration, a predetermined notification occurs when all the stop operation means are operated. In other words, after a result is notified by the first result notification means or the second result notification means, the result is switched to (or remains as is) via the predetermined notification to notify the correct result, and the predetermined notification occurs when all the stop operation means are operated, and the correct result is notified after the operation of the stop operation means is completed. In this way, in a configuration in which the content of the advantageous judgment and whether or not it is executed differ depending on the operation mode, it is possible to notify the result in advance as a specific notification, while still allowing the player to enjoy the operation of the stop operation means and the development of the notifications until the very end.

Feature F8. The gaming machine described in Feature F7, characterized in that the specific notification is executed before the specific number of the stop operation means are operated.

By configuring it as described above, it is made clear that the specific notification is executed before the advantageous judgment, and it is possible to preferably expect the dramatic effect of the specific notification.

The invention described in the above features F1 to F8 has been made with a view to solving the problem that the invention aims to solve with respect to the background technology that states, "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to rotate. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features F1 to F8 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a special result (special role) is set in which the bonus awarding means awards a second bonus (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
The game device is provided with an advantage determination means (for example, a function of executing processing related to instruction functions such as a process for a start time AT lottery by the main control device 101 and a process for a stop time AT lottery by the main control device 101) that executes an advantage determination to generate an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (a random number for an AT lottery and a random number for an additional lottery),
the advantage determination means is set to execute a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and to execute a second advantage determination, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage determination, as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or to not execute the advantage determination;
A destination determination means (a function of executing a pre-determination process by the main control device 101) capable of determining the result of the favorable judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the favorable judgment before the favorable judgment is made;
a specific notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a specific notification presentation by a display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the non-corresponding result at a specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means in the special game is executed, when the specific result by the prior specification means is a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made;
A gaming machine comprising:

The above configuration allows a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of a start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of a stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. When the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first bonus is awarded and a first advantageous judgment is executed as an advantageous judgment that generates an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, a special result is set in which a second bonus is awarded and a second advantageous judgment is executed as an advantageous judgment, and while the second bonus is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment. Therefore, when a special result is reached, it is possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which the player is left to choose between the advantageous side of the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the advantageous judgment (first operation mode).

Furthermore, in the above configuration, in a game in which a special result in which the bonus or advantageous judgment granted by such an operation mode differs is won, it is assumed that a first advantageous judgment is executed before the advantageous judgment is executed, and the result of the first advantageous judgment is identified. If the identified result is a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to causing an advantageous event, a specific notification corresponding to the non-corresponding result may be executed before the timing of the advantageous judgment. By doing so, when the special result is won, even if the first operation mode is used, the result of the first advantageous judgment on the advantageous side will not be a result that corresponds to causing an advantageous event, so it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the second operation mode is used to win the second bonus. This can increase the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1, characterized in that the specific notification means is capable of making the specific notification when the start operation means is operated as the specific timing.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is executed when the start operation means is operated before the stop operation means is operated. In this way, it is possible to prevent meaningless effects such as the specific notification being executed after the first operation mode has already been performed, by causing the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode to be performed by the specific notification.

Feature G3: An execution determination means for determining whether or not the specific notification is to be executed (a function for executing a navigation mode lottery process by the display control device 81) is provided;
A gaming machine described in feature G1 or feature G2, characterized in that the specific notification means executes the specific notification when the result of the execution judgment by the execution judgment means is an execution result corresponding to executing the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, even if a special result is won and the result of the first advantageous judgment is a non-corresponding result, the specific notification will not be executed unless the execution judgment is won. In this way, in order to add a game in which the first advantageous judgment is won and an advantageous event occurs, and in which the first advantageous judgment is not won and instead a second benefit is obtained in the second operation mode, the game in which the second benefit is obtained must also win the execution judgment. Therefore, a game that creates expectations in multiple stages, such as aiming to win the first advantageous judgment and hoping that at least the execution judgment will be won if the first advantageous judgment is not won, can be realized, making it possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

Feature G4: A plurality of set values are set that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the benefit granted by the benefit granting means, and a setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided that sets one of the plurality of set values;
A gaming machine as described in feature G3, characterized in that the probability that the result of the first advantageous judgment will be a corresponding result that causes the advantageous event is the same when a first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value is set, while the probability that the result of the execution judgment by the execution judgment means will be the execution result is different when the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value is set.

According to the above configuration, even if the winning probability of the first advantageous judgment is not varied depending on the setting value, by varying the winning probability of the execution judgment depending on the setting value, it is possible to vary the acquisition rate of the second bonus when a special result is won depending on the setting value. In this way, when designing the payout rate, etc., it is possible to vary the number of games that can be played with a unit game value (the so-called base) depending on the setting value without varying the occurrence rate of advantageous events.

Feature G5. As a game state, a specific state (navigation mode) in which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means, and a non-specific state (normal mode) in which the specific notification is less likely to be executed by the specific notification means than the specific state or the specific notification is not executed at all are set;
A means for transitioning from the non-specific state to the specific state when a transition condition (navigation mode selection) is satisfied (a function for executing a process of setting a navigation mode flag by the display control device 81);
A means for transitioning from the specific state to the non-specific state when a termination condition (transition to AT mode) is satisfied (a function for executing a process of clearing a navigation mode flag by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, by transitioning to a specific state, a specific notification is more likely to occur, so that when a special role is won, it is possible to receive an advantageous judgment that efficiently produces an advantageous event while obtaining a second bonus. Setting such a specific state can be very useful in increasing the interest of the game.

The "specific state" may be expressed as the "first state" and the "non-specific state" as the "second state."

Feature G6. The bonus awarding means awards a game value provided for a game as the bonus;
the first benefit being a first number of gaming values;
The second benefit is a second number of gaming values that is greater than the first number;
The average number of games that can be executed per unit game value or the average increase in game value per unit game is greater in the second game mode in which the special game is operated in the second operation mode when the specific notification is made in the special game in the specific state and is operated in the first operation mode when the specific notification is not made in the special game, than in the first game mode in which the special game is operated in the first operation mode in the non-specific state;
Furthermore, the average number of plays that can be executed per unit of game value or the average increase in game value per unit of game is greater in a third game mode in which the special game is operated in the second operation mode in the non-specific state than in a second game mode in which the special game is operated in the second operation mode when the specific notification is made in the special game in the specific state, and is operated in the first operation mode when the specific notification is not made in the special game.

The above configuration specifically expresses the benefit of the specific notification in relation to the benefit granted by the benefit granting means, and as in the above configuration, the specific notification efficiently receives an advantageous judgment that results in a corresponding advantageous event, but in the case of a non-corresponding result, the second game mode in which a second number of game values is acquired without receiving an advantageous judgment has a higher average number of games per unit game value and an average increase in game value per unit game than the first game mode in which the player is always operated in the first operation mode, and has a lower average number of games per unit game value and an average increase in game value per unit game value than the third game mode in which the player is always operated in the second operation mode. Therefore, the player has more options to choose which game to play, and it is possible to appropriately improve the player's interest in the game.

Feature G7. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a special result is set that is more likely to be a corresponding result that causes the advantageous event to occur as a result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means than other results, regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the gaming machine is equipped with a special notification means (a function of executing a special notification presentation based on a special role by a display control device 81) that executes a special notification having a notification mode common to the specific notification by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification and the special notification have the same notification mode, it is not possible to distinguish whether the notification is to operate in the second operation mode when a special result is won, or to notify that a special result has been won that is likely to win an advantageous judgment. In other words, it is possible to make the player expect that an advantageous event will occur based on a special result win, while notifying that the player will be able to obtain the second benefit even if the special result is not won, and it is possible to create a sense of expectation that an advantageous event will occur even if the player does not win the first advantageous judgment and therefore operates in the second operation mode.

The "other result" may be a "special result" or a different result. Furthermore, the "special result" does not have to be the result that is most likely to become the corresponding result when the result of the advantageous judgment is determined, and there may be a result that is more likely to become the corresponding result than the "special result." At the very least, it is sufficient that the result of the advantageous judgment triggered by the "special result" can become the corresponding result.

Feature G8. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result, if a special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the pay position, a bonus corresponding to the special result is awarded by the bonus awarding means;
The special notification is set in a notification mode to notify the player that a third operation mode capable of stopping the special pattern combination at the effective position should be performed,
A gaming machine described in feature G7, characterized in that the third operation mode is included in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, a special notification is issued to notify the player that a special prize should be awarded, and the third operation mode that enables the special prize to be awarded is included in the second operation mode. When a specific notification, which is a similar notification mode, is issued, the player can perform the second operation mode while aiming for the special prize, and the player can obtain the second bonus without being particularly aware of it.

Feature G9. A normal state (normal section) and an advantageous state (advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set;
A termination means (a function for executing a process for terminating an advantageous zone based on reaching an upper limit game number or an upper limit increase number in the second process for displaying a zone by the main control device 101) is provided for terminating the advantageous zone when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous zone,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G8, characterized in that the specific notification means is permitted to execute the specific notification in a situation where the termination means has determined that the advantageous state will be terminated before the termination condition is met.

According to the above configuration, by issuing a specific notification, it is possible to achieve the end condition earlier, or to increase the total number of bonuses acquired when the end condition is achieved. This makes it possible to increase the interest of playing in an advantageous state.

The invention described in the above features G1 to G9 has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as gaming media betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features G1 to G9 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation sequence, a first result (first small win to sixth small win) can be won, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation sequence different from the first operation sequence, a sequence result (push order bell) is set such that a second result (ninth small win to thirty-second small win) in which fewer benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means than the first result can be won.
The apparatus is provided with an advantage determination means for performing an advantage determination for generating an advantageous event that is advantageous to a player based on the lottery result by the lottery means (for example, a function for performing processing related to instruction functions such as a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101, a stop time AT lottery process, and an AT additional lottery process),
The advantage determination means is provided with a transition determination means (a function of executing a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for determining whether a game state is transitioned from a normal state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and for determining whether the game state is transitioned to the advantageous state;
In a first sequence result among the sequence results, the first result or a result corresponding to the first result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation sequence, while the second result or a result corresponding to the second result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the second operation sequence; and in a second sequence result different from the first sequence result among the sequence results, the first result or a result corresponding to the first result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the second operation sequence, while the second result or a result corresponding to the second result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation sequence,
A sequence notification means for notifying the sequence of operation of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (a function for notifying the sequence of operation by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) is provided,
the sequence notification means controls the predetermined notification means so that, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal state is the sequence result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is the first sequence result or the second sequence result, while, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the sequence result, if it is the first sequence result, it executes a sequence notification corresponding to the first operation sequence, and if it is the second sequence result, it executes a sequence notification corresponding to the second operation sequence,
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the winning of the third result (the 33rd minor win) is possible, and a first advantageous judgment is executed as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the winning of the fourth result (the first minor win to the sixth minor win) in which more benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means than the third result is possible, and a second advantageous judgment which is less likely to result in an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event than the first advantageous judgment is executed as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means, or a special result in which the advantageous judgment is not executed is set;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the winning of the fourth result can be established when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation sequence as the second operation mode, and the winning of the fourth result can be established when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation sequence as the second operation mode,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sequence notification means is equipped with a specific sequence notification means (a function of executing a push sequence notification for the 6th minor role in a special role winning game by the main control unit 101) capable of executing a specific sequence notification (a push sequence notification for the 6th minor role) corresponding to a predetermined operation sequence among the sequence notifications of a plurality of operation sequences including the first operation sequence and the second operation sequence when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the special result.

The above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a so-called push order role is provided in which a first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation sequence, while a second result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation sequence, which has a smaller bonus than the first result, and a sequence notification is made as a push order notification for the push order role by transitioning to an advantageous state, thereby realizing excellent playability in which the degree of advantage can be greatly different depending on whether or not the sequence notification is made.

A first sequence result and a second sequence result are set as sequence results, and the operation sequences that result in the first winning result are different from each other. Even if a sequence result is obtained, the sequence is set to be notified in such a way that it is impossible to distinguish between the first sequence result and the second sequence result, so long as it is before the transition to an advantageous state, it is difficult to try to determine the operation sequence that will result in the first winning result from the lottery results of each game. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of the benefit being enjoyed before the transition, when the degree of advantage is greatly different depending on the sequence notification when a transition to an advantageous state occurs.

In addition, as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result can be achieved, and a first advantageous judgment is executed which is likely to result in an advantageous result corresponding to the advantageous judgment result causing an advantageous event, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a special result is set in which a fourth result can be achieved which has more benefits than the third result, but a second advantageous judgment which is less likely to result in an advantageous result is executed, and extremely special gameplay can be added in which the player can choose the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or choose the one with the more benefits.

In this case, when a special result is won, the second operation mode is set to result in the fourth winning result, whether the first operation sequence, which results in the first winning result in the first sequence result, is performed, or the second operation sequence, which results in the first winning result in the second sequence result, is performed.

Here, before the transition to the advantageous state, when a special result is won, it is considered advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode in order to generate as many advantageous events as possible, but in the advantageous state, it is considered that the player should operate in the second operation mode in order to obtain as many bonuses as possible.

In the above configuration, if a special result is won during an advantageous state, sequence notifications such as the first operation sequence and the second operation sequence are issued to encourage the player to win the fourth result. This eliminates the need to provide notifications for the second operation mode dedicated to special results in order to achieve gameplay that allows players to win more prizes when a special result is won, making it possible to reduce memory capacity.

Not only that, in the above configuration, as the second operation mode when a special role is won, a specific sequence notification corresponding to one of the first and second operation sequences that is predetermined is announced as a sequence notification. By doing so, although the fourth result can be won with either operation sequence, there is no need to decide which operation sequence to announce when the special role is won, and the processing configuration can be made extremely simple. Therefore, with an extremely simple configuration, it is possible to realize the fourth result when a special result is won during an advantageous state.

The configuration of "The sequence notification means controls the predetermined notification means so that, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the sequence result in the normal state, it makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first sequence result and the second sequence result, while when the lottery result by the lottery means is the sequence result in the advantageous state, it executes a sequence notification corresponding to the first operation sequence if it is the first sequence result, and executes a sequence notification corresponding to the second operation sequence if it is the second sequence result" may be expressed as "The sequence notification means executes a special notification so that, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the sequence result in the normal state, it makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first sequence result and the second sequence result, while when the lottery result by the lottery means is the sequence result in the advantageous state, it executes a sequence notification corresponding to the first operation sequence if it is the first sequence result, and executes a sequence notification corresponding to the second operation sequence if it is the second sequence result," and such a change in expression can be applied to features or feature groups using similar expressions.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the specific sequence notification is set as a sequence notification corresponding to an operation sequence that does not result in the first operation mode.

The above configuration makes it possible to effectively avoid an event in which the third result is won despite following the specific sequence of notifications when a special result is won.

Feature H3. The first operation mode is to operate a predetermined specific stop operation means in a specific order and to operate the specific stop operation means at a timing when a specific pattern on a specific rotating body corresponding to the specific stop operation means is present in a specific range, and the second operation mode is to operate a predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means in the specific order, and to operate the specific stop operation means in the specific order and to operate the specific stop operation means at a timing when the specific pattern on the specific rotating body is not present in the specific range.
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, wherein the specific order notification is set to be an order notification of an operation order in which the specified stop operation means is operated in the specific order.

According to the above configuration, the first operation mode is determined by the operation sequence and operation timing, and even if the operation sequence is the first operation mode, it is possible to change it to the second operation mode by changing the operation timing. In other words, when a specific sequence is notified, it is possible to configure the system so that the third result or the fourth result is won depending on the operation timing, but in the above configuration, this is not done, and if the stop operation means is operated according to the operation sequence of the specific sequence notification, the fourth result is always won regardless of the operation timing, making it possible to configure the system so that more benefits can be obtained when a special result is won during an advantageous state.

Feature H4. When a first symbol combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, a bonus corresponding to the first result is awarded by the bonus awarding means, and when a fourth symbol combination corresponding to the fourth result stops at the valid position, a bonus corresponding to the fourth result is awarded by the bonus awarding means;
The gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H3, wherein the first picture combination is the same as or corresponds to the fourth picture combination.

According to the above configuration, the stop results are the same when the first result win is achieved based on a sequential result win and when the fourth result win is achieved based on a special result win. Furthermore, since the specific sequence notification notified by the sequence notification means when a special result win is achieved can also be executed when a sequential result win is achieved, it becomes impossible to determine from the results or sequence notification whether the first result win or the fourth result win is due to a sequential result win or a special result win. In this way, it becomes possible to make predictions more difficult in a configuration that allows players to predict information that is useful to them, such as predicting a set value from the probability of winning a special result or the probability of winning a sequential result.

Note that "corresponding symbol combinations" refers to a relationship in which the symbol combinations that stop at the valid positions are different, but the specific symbol combinations stop at positions different from the valid positions. In this case, the positions at which the specific symbol combination stops may be different in both results. This point can also be applied to other features or groups of features that use similar expressions.

Feature H5. When a first symbol combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, a first benefit corresponding to the first result is awarded by the benefit awarding means, and when a fourth symbol combination corresponding to the fourth result stops at the valid position, a fourth benefit corresponding to the fourth result is awarded by the benefit awarding means;
A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H4, wherein the first benefit is the same benefit as the fourth benefit.

According to the above configuration, the bonus awarded is the same when the first result win is achieved based on a sequential result win and when the fourth result win is achieved based on a special result win. Furthermore, since the specific sequential notification announced by the sequential notification means when a special result win is achieved can also be executed when a sequential result win is achieved, it becomes impossible to determine from the bonus awarded or sequential notification whether the first result win or the fourth result win is due to a sequential result win or a special result win. In this way, it becomes possible to make predictions more difficult in a configuration that allows players to predict information that is useful to them, such as predicting a set value from the probability of winning a special result or the probability of winning a sequential result.

Feature H6. A gaming machine according to Feature H4 or Feature H5, wherein the fourth result is the first result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of Features H4 and H5, and by achieving the same results in this way, it is possible to expect the excellent effects of Features H4 and H5 with an extremely simple configuration.

Feature H7. A selection means (a function for executing a notification small role lottery process by the main control device 101) for selecting a sequence notification corresponding to one operation sequence from sequence notifications corresponding to a plurality of operation sequences including the first operation sequence and the second operation sequence based on a predetermined opportunity (transition to an advantageous zone) before the lottery result by at least the lottery means becomes the special result;
The gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H6, wherein the specific order notification means executes the order notification selected by the selection means as the specific order notification by the predetermined notification means.

As in the above configuration, by determining a specific sequence of notifications as a predetermined sequence of notifications based on a specified trigger, it is possible to reduce the processing load when a special result is won while ensuring the randomness of the sequence of notifications announced when a special result is won.

Feature H8. The gaming machine described in Feature H7, wherein the predetermined trigger occurs when the game transitions to the advantageous state.

With the above configuration, the predetermined trigger occurs when the advantageous state is transitioned, so there is no inconvenience of selection not being completed even though a special result is won and a sequence notification should be executed, and the selection frequency can be made higher than with a configuration in which the predetermined trigger is the factory shipment. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load while ensuring the randomness of the sequence notification.

The invention described in the above features H1 to H8 has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as gaming media betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features H1 to H8 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation sequence, a first result (first small win to sixth small win) can be won, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation sequence different from the first operation sequence, a sequence result (push order bell) is set such that a second result (ninth small win to thirty-second small win) in which fewer benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means than the first result can be won.
The apparatus is provided with an advantage determination means for performing an advantage determination for generating an advantageous event that is advantageous to a player based on the lottery result by the lottery means (for example, a function for performing processing related to instruction functions such as a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101, a stop time AT lottery process, and an AT additional lottery process),
The advantage determination means is provided with a transition determination means (a function of executing a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for determining whether a game state is transitioned from a normal state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and for determining whether the game state is transitioned to the advantageous state;
In a first sequence result among the sequence results, the first result or a result corresponding to the first result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation sequence, while the second result or a result corresponding to the second result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the second operation sequence; and in a second sequence result different from the first sequence result among the sequence results, the first result or a result corresponding to the first result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the second operation sequence, while the second result or a result corresponding to the second result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation sequence,
A sequence notification means for notifying the sequence of operation of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (a function for notifying the sequence of operation by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) is provided,
The sequence notification means controls the predetermined notification means so that, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal state is the sequence result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is the first sequence result or the second sequence result, while, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the sequence result, if it is the first sequence result, it executes a sequence notification corresponding to the first operation sequence, and if it is the second sequence result, it executes a sequence notification corresponding to the second operation sequence,
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the winning of the third result (the 33rd minor win) is possible, and a first advantageous judgment is executed as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the winning of the fourth result (the first minor win to the sixth minor win) in which more benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means than the third result is possible, and a second advantageous judgment which is less likely to result in an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event than the first advantageous judgment is executed as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means, or a special result in which the advantageous judgment is not executed is set;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the winning of the fourth result can be established when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation sequence as the second operation mode, and the winning of the fourth result can be established when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation sequence as the second operation mode,
The sequence notification means is a selection means (a function of executing a notification small role lottery process by the main control unit 101) for selecting a sequence notification corresponding to one operation sequence from sequence notifications corresponding to a plurality of operation sequences including the first operation sequence and the second operation sequence when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the special result, and is characterized in that the sequence notification means executes the sequence notification selected by the selection means.

The above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a so-called push order role is provided in which a first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation sequence, while a second result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation sequence, which has a smaller bonus than the first result, and a sequence notification is made as a push order notification for the push order role by transitioning to an advantageous state, thereby realizing excellent playability in which the degree of advantage can be greatly different depending on whether or not the sequence notification is made.

A first sequence result and a second sequence result are set as sequence results, and the operation sequences that result in the first winning result are different from each other. Even if a sequence result is obtained, the sequence is set to be notified in such a way that it is impossible to distinguish between the first sequence result and the second sequence result, so long as it is before the transition to an advantageous state, it is difficult to try to determine the operation sequence that will result in the first winning result from the lottery results of each game. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of the benefit being enjoyed before the transition, when the degree of advantage is greatly different depending on the sequence notification when a transition to an advantageous state occurs.

In addition, as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result can be achieved, and a first advantageous judgment is executed which is likely to result in an advantageous result corresponding to the advantageous judgment result causing an advantageous event, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a special result is set in which a fourth result can be achieved which has more benefits than the third result, but a second advantageous judgment which is less likely to result in an advantageous result is executed, and extremely special gameplay can be added in which the player can choose the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or choose the one with the more benefits.

In this case, when a special result is won, the second operation mode is set to result in the fourth winning result, whether the first operation sequence, which results in the first winning result in the first sequence result, is performed, or the second operation sequence, which results in the first winning result in the second sequence result, is performed.

Here, before the transition to the advantageous state, when a special result is won, it is considered to be more advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode in order to generate as many advantageous events as possible, but in the advantageous state, it is considered that the player should operate in the second operation mode in order to obtain as many bonuses as possible.

In the above configuration, if a special result is won during an advantageous state, sequence notifications such as the first operation sequence and the second operation sequence are issued to encourage the player to win the fourth result. This eliminates the need to provide notifications for the second operation mode dedicated to special results in order to achieve gameplay that allows players to win more prizes when a special result is won, making it possible to reduce memory capacity.

Not only that, in the above configuration, as the second operation mode when a special role is won, a sequence notification corresponding to one of the first and second operation sequences is selected, and the selected sequence notification is performed, so that the execution rate of the sequence notifications can be equalized. In this way, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as a special result win being discovered from the sequence notification.

Feature I2. The gaming machine described in Feature I1, wherein the selection means selects the sequence notification including a sequence notification corresponding to the operation sequence that is the first operation mode.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won, the sequence notification may result in the fourth small win, and the third small win may also occur. In this way, the gameplay can be improved by including the third and fourth small wins, and the sequence notification can be more appropriately equalized.

Feature I3. A plurality of set values are set that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the benefit granted by the benefit granting means, and a setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided that sets one of the plurality of set values;
A gaming machine as described in feature I2, characterized in that the ratio at which the selection means selects a sequence notification corresponding to an operation sequence resulting in the first operation mode differs between when a first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the third result wins instead of the fourth result despite operating according to the sequence notification, if the third result wins, although there is little benefit, it can be used as a basis for predicting the set value, and it can actually be a desirable event for the player. In this way, it is possible to equalize the occurrence rate of each sequence notification by selecting the sequence notification that is the first operation mode, while also effectively addressing the fact that the player may suffer a disadvantage if the sequence notification that is the first operation mode is selected.

Feature I4. The gaming machine described in Feature I3, characterized in that the difference in the rate at which the selection means selects the sequence notification corresponding to the operation sequence resulting in the first operation mode when a first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means is greater than the difference between the rate at which the selection means selects a predetermined sequence notification and the rate at which the selection means selects another sequence notification when the first setting value is set.

With the above configuration, while the occurrence rate of each sequence notification is equalized, the difference in the selection rate of each sequence notification is greater than the set difference in the selection rate of the sequence notification that is the first operation mode, making it easier to play a game in which the set value is predicted from the sequence notification that is the first operation mode. In this way, it is possible to effectively alleviate the disappointment of winning the third small prize and receiving a small bonus by performing the sequence notification that is the first operation mode.

Feature I5. The operation sequence has a specific number of types,
The gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I3, wherein the selection means selects at least one of the operation sequences so that the selection rates of the other operation sequences, excluding a predetermined operation sequence, are equal.

According to the above configuration, even if the operation sequence is not divisible by 100%, the selection rate is equalized for at least the operation sequences other than the predetermined operation sequence. In this way, it is possible to execute the sequence notification more evenly.

Feature I6. A plurality of set values are set that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the benefit granted by the benefit granting means, and a setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided that sets one of the plurality of set values;
A gaming machine as described in feature I5, characterized in that the sequence notification set as the specified sequence notification is different when a first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means.

The above configuration makes it possible to predict the set value by using the remainder of the selection rate that is not divisible by 100%. This makes it possible to realize a novel gameplay that allows the player to predict the set value by making good use of the parts of the sequence notification that cannot be completely equalized while still equalizing the sequence notification.

Feature I7. The specific number of set values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the benefit granted by the benefit granting means are set, and a setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided that sets one of the specific number of set values;
A gaming machine according to feature I5 or I6, characterized in that the sequence notification set as the predetermined sequence notification differs depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

The above configuration makes it possible to predict the set value by using the remainder of the selection rate that is not divisible by 100%. This makes it possible to realize a novel gameplay that allows the player to predict the set value by making good use of the parts of the sequence notification that cannot be completely equalized while still equalizing the sequence notification.

Feature I8. The gaming machine described in Feature I1, characterized in that the selection means selects the sequence notification excluding the sequence notification corresponding to the operation sequence resulting in the first operation mode, or is less likely to select the sequence notification corresponding to the operation sequence resulting in the first operation mode than the sequence notification corresponding to another operation mode.

With the above configuration, if you simply follow the sequence of notifications when a special result is won, the fourth minor prize will be awarded, but the third minor prize will not be awarded. This makes it possible to easily win many bonuses when in an advantageous state.

Feature I9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell), the stop operation means is operated in the operation sequence that is the first operation mode, so that the winning of the result (first small win, second small win) corresponding to the special result can be established, and the stop operation means is operated in the operation sequence that is not the first operation mode, so that the winning of the result (third small win to sixth small win) corresponding to the special result can be established.
The gaming machine described in feature I8 is characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the frequency with which the sequence notification by the sequence notification means is executed is set so that the sequence notification corresponding to an operation sequence that results in the first operation mode is higher than the sequence notification corresponding to an operation sequence that does not result in the first operation mode.

With the above configuration, it is possible to effectively cover the absence of sequence notification corresponding to the operation sequence that results in the first operation mode when a special result is won by the sequence notification when the special result is won. In this way, it is possible to equalize sequence notification throughout the entire game.

Feature I10. The gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I9, characterized in that the first operation mode is set to operate a predetermined specific stop operation means in a specific order and to operate the specific stop operation means at a timing when a specific pattern on a specific rotating body corresponding to the specific stop operation means is present within a specific range, and the second operation mode is set to operate a predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means in the specific order, and to operate the specific stop operation means in the specific order and to operate the specific stop operation means at a timing when the specific pattern on the specific rotating body is not present within the specific range.

According to the above configuration, the first operation mode is determined by the operation sequence and operation timing, and even if the operation sequence is the first operation mode, it can be changed to the second operation mode by changing the operation timing. In other words, in a configuration in which an operation sequence corresponding to the first operation mode is selected, when the operation sequence corresponding to the first operation mode is announced, the third or fourth result may be achieved depending on the operation timing. Therefore, if you want to win more prizes, you need to make full use of the operation timing, and by incorporating such a configuration into the gameplay, the excitement of the game is increased.

Feature I11. The selection means selects a sequence notification corresponding to one operation sequence from sequence notifications corresponding to a plurality of operation sequences including the first operation sequence and the second operation sequence, based on at least a predetermined opportunity (a transition to an advantageous zone) before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result;
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I10, wherein the sequence notification means executes the sequence notification selected at the predetermined trigger when the special result occurs.

The above configuration makes it possible to reduce the processing load significantly compared to a configuration in which the operation sequence is selected each time a special result is won.

Feature I12. The gaming machine described in Feature I11, wherein the predetermined trigger occurs when the game transitions to the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined trigger occurs when the advantageous state is transitioned, so there is no inconvenience such as selection not being completed even though a special result is won and sequence notification should be executed. Although the selection frequency is lower than when it is executed every time a special result is won, the selection frequency can be increased, for example, closer to a configuration in which the predetermined trigger is the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load while ensuring the randomness of sequence notification.

The invention described in Features I1 to I12 above was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features I1 to I12 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group J>
Feature J1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation sequence, a first result (first small win to sixth small win) can be won, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation sequence different from the first operation sequence, a sequence result (push order bell) is set such that a second result (ninth small win to thirty-second small win) in which fewer benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means than the first result can be won.
The apparatus is provided with an advantage determination means for performing an advantage determination for generating an advantageous event that is advantageous to a player based on the lottery result by the lottery means (for example, a function for performing processing related to instruction functions such as a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101, a stop time AT lottery process, and an AT additional lottery process),
The advantage determination means is provided with a transition determination means (a function of executing a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for determining whether a game state is transitioned from a normal state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and for determining whether the game state is transitioned to the advantageous state;
In a first sequence result among the sequence results, the first result or a result corresponding to the first result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation sequence, while the second result or a result corresponding to the second result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the second operation sequence; and in a second sequence result different from the first sequence result among the sequence results, the first result or a result corresponding to the first result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the second operation sequence, while the second result or a result corresponding to the second result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation sequence,
A sequence notification means for notifying the sequence of operation of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (a function for notifying the sequence of operation by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) is provided,
The sequence notification means controls the predetermined notification means so that, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal state is the sequence result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is the first sequence result or the second sequence result, while, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the sequence result, if it is the first sequence result, it executes a sequence notification corresponding to the first operation sequence, and if it is the second sequence result, it executes a sequence notification corresponding to the second operation sequence,
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the winning of the third result (the 33rd minor role) is possible, and a first advantageous judgment is executed as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the winning of the fourth result (the first minor role to the sixth minor role) in which more benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means than the third result is possible, and a second advantageous judgment which is less likely to result in an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event than the first advantageous judgment is executed as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means, or a special result (special role) in which the advantageous judgment is not executed is set;
At least the operation of the stop operation means according to the first operation sequence is included in the second operation mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a specific sequence notification means (a function of executing a push sequence notification by the main control unit 101 when a special role is won) that can execute a sequence notification corresponding to the first operation sequence by the specified notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the special result.

The above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a so-called push order role is provided in which a first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation sequence, while a second result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation sequence, which has a smaller bonus than the first result, and a sequence notification is made as a push order notification for the push order role by transitioning to an advantageous state, thereby realizing excellent playability in which the degree of advantage can be greatly different depending on whether or not the sequence notification is made.

A first sequence result and a second sequence result are set as sequence results, and the operation sequences that result in the first winning result are different from each other. Even if a sequence result is obtained, the sequence is set to be notified in such a way that it is impossible to distinguish between the first sequence result and the second sequence result, so long as it is before the transition to an advantageous state, it is difficult to try to determine the operation sequence that will result in the first winning result from the lottery results of each game. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of the benefit being enjoyed before the transition, when the degree of advantage is greatly different depending on the sequence notification when a transition to an advantageous state occurs.

In addition, as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result can be achieved, and a first advantageous judgment is executed which is likely to result in an advantageous result corresponding to the advantageous judgment result causing an advantageous event, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a special result is set in which a fourth result can be achieved which has more benefits than the third result, but a second advantageous judgment which is less likely to result in an advantageous result is executed, and extremely special gameplay can be added in which the player can choose the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or choose the one with the more benefits.

Moreover, the second operation mode when a special result is won is a mode that includes the first operation sequence, and by utilizing this configuration, during an advantageous state, a sequence notification corresponding to the first operation sequence is made when a special result is won. As a result, when operating in the second operation mode to obtain more benefits when a special result is won, it is no longer necessary to provide a special result-specific notification using an existing configuration such as a sequence notification in a sequence result. Furthermore, since it is possible to successfully blend in the special result win with the first sequence result when a sequence result is won, it is also possible to make it difficult to predict, for example, in a configuration in which a set value can be predicted from the probability of winning a special result or the probability of winning a sequence result. As a result of the above, it is possible to easily increase the interest in the game.

Feature J2: When a first symbol combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, a bonus corresponding to the first result is awarded by the bonus awarding means, and when a fourth symbol combination corresponding to the fourth result stops at the valid position, a bonus corresponding to the fourth result is awarded by the bonus awarding means;
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the first symbol combination is the same as or corresponds to the fourth symbol combination.

According to the above configuration, the stop results are the same when the first result win is achieved based on a sequential result win and when the fourth result win is achieved based on a special result win. Furthermore, since the specific sequence notification notified by the sequence notification means when a special result win is achieved can also be executed when a sequential result win is achieved, it becomes impossible to determine from the results or sequence notification whether the first result win or the fourth result win is due to a sequential result win or a special result win. In this way, it becomes possible to make predictions more difficult in a configuration that allows players to predict information that is useful to them, such as predicting a set value from the probability of winning a special result or the probability of winning a sequential result.

Feature J3. In the first sequence result, the first result associated with the first sequence result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation sequence, while the second result associated with the first sequence result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the second operation sequence; in the second sequence result, the first result associated with the second sequence result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the second operation sequence, while the second result associated with the second sequence result can be won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation sequence;
When a first pattern combination corresponding to the first result associated with the first sequence result is stopped at the valid position among the first pattern combinations corresponding to the first result, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded by the bonus awarding means, and when a fourth pattern combination corresponding to the fourth result is stopped at the valid position, a bonus corresponding to the fourth result is awarded by the bonus awarding means;
The gaming machine described in feature J2, wherein the picture combination corresponding to the first result associated with the first sequence result is the same as or a corresponding picture combination to the fourth picture combination.

The above configuration is a specific configuration in which, in feature J2, when the sequential result is won, the result corresponding to the first result is won for each operation sequence, but strictly speaking, a different result is won for each operation sequence. Even with this configuration, by making the stopping numbers for the fourth result when the special result is won the same as the stopping numbers for the result when the sequential result is won, it is possible to enhance the effect of blending the special result into the sequential result.

Feature J4: When a first symbol combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, a first benefit corresponding to the first result is awarded by the benefit awarding means, and when a fourth symbol combination corresponding to the fourth result stops at the valid position, a fourth benefit corresponding to the fourth result is awarded by the benefit awarding means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the first benefit is the same as the fourth benefit.

According to the above configuration, the bonus awarded is the same when the first result win is achieved based on a sequential result win and when the fourth result win is achieved based on a special result win. Furthermore, since the specific sequential notification announced by the sequential notification means when a special result win is achieved can also be executed when a sequential result win is achieved, it becomes impossible to determine from the bonus awarded or sequential notification whether the first result win or the fourth result win is due to a sequential result win or a special result win. In this way, it becomes possible to make predictions more difficult in a configuration that allows players to predict information that is useful to them, such as predicting a set value from the probability of winning a special result or the probability of winning a sequential result.

Feature J5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features J2 to J4, characterized in that the fourth result is the first result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of Features J2 to J4, and by achieving the same results in this way, it is possible to expect the excellent effects of Features J2 to J4 with an extremely simple configuration.

Feature J6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features J1 to J5, characterized in that the notification mode of the sequence notification corresponding to the first operation sequence executed by the sequence notification means in response to the sequence result and the notification mode of the sequence notification corresponding to the first operation sequence executed by the specific sequence notification means in response to the special result are a common notification mode.

With the above configuration, the sequence notification of the first operation sequence in the sequence result and the sequence notification of the first operation sequence in the special result are performed in the same notification mode, so that it is possible to expect the effect of blending the special result into the sequence result not only from the commonality of the operation sequences but also from the notification mode.

Feature J7. When the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the first sequence result, a first output means (a function for executing a process of outputting and setting a push order command for the sixth minor role when the push order bell is won by the main control unit 101) capable of outputting specific information that is information about the first operation sequence or information that it is the first sequence result to another control unit (display control unit 81);
A second output means (a function for outputting and setting a push order command for a sixth minor role when the push order bell is won by the main control unit 101) capable of outputting the specific information to the other control unit when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the special result;
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which, when a sequence notification of the first operation sequence is made when a sequence result is selected, specific information, which is information about the first operation sequence and information that it is the first sequence result, is output to another control device, even when a sequence notification of the first operation sequence is made when a special result is selected, the specific information is output to the other control device, so not only the sequence notification but also the specific information cannot be determined to be a sequence result or a special result even if the specific information is illegally analyzed. In this way, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform actions such as trying to gain an advantage by illegally determining the result.

Feature J8. The other control device is provided with a specific notification means (a function of executing a push order notification performance by the display control device 81) that executes a specific notification (push order notification) corresponding to the first operation sequence based on the specific information by a specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 or speaker 64);
The gaming machine described in feature J7 is characterized in that the specific notification means executes the specific notification in a common notification manner when the specific information is output as a result of the sequential result and when the specific information is output as a result of the special result.

With the above configuration, it becomes impossible to determine whether a specific notification from the specific notification means is triggered by a sequential result or a special result, making it possible to more effectively achieve the effect of feature J1.

Feature J9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features J1 to J8, characterized in that the probability of the advantageous result being achieved in the advantageous judgment based on the sequence result or the advantageous degree of the advantageous event in the event of the advantageous result being achieved is different from the probability of the advantageous result being achieved in the advantageous judgment based on the special result or the advantageous degree of the advantageous event in the event of the advantageous result being achieved.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability and the degree of advantage of an advantageous judgment based on a sequential result are different from the winning probability and the degree of advantage of an advantageous judgment based on a special result, by utilizing the sequential notification of the sequential result for the sequential notification when a special result is won, it is possible to make the player believe that an advantageous event occurring based on a sequential result is an advantageous event occurring based on a special result, or conversely, to make the player believe that an advantageous event occurring based on a special result is an advantageous event occurring based on a sequential result.

Feature J10. The gaming machine described in Feature J9, characterized in that the probability of the advantageous result being achieved in the advantageous determination based on the special result, or the advantageous degree of the advantageous event in the event of the advantageous result being achieved, is higher than the probability of the advantageous result being achieved in the advantageous determination based on the sequence result, or the advantageous degree of the advantageous event in the event of the advantageous result being achieved.

The above configuration gives the impression that advantageous events occur based on special results, rather than sequential results. In other words, sequential results do not simply have the function of differentiating the benefits granted depending on whether or not a sequential notification is given; they can also give the player the impression that they can be a strong catalyst for advantageous events, greatly increasing the interest of games that use the sequential results.

Feature J11. The gaming machine described in Feature J10, wherein the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the sequential result is higher than the probability that the result of the lottery will be the special result.

As in the above configuration, sequential results are more likely to be winning than special results, and so, normally, using such sequential results as a trigger for advantageous events can lead to problems such as a high ball payout rate. In this regard, by using special results to increase the expectation of advantageous events for sequential results, as in Features J1 and J10 above, it is possible to appropriately increase attention to sequential results that are more likely to be winning while avoiding a high ball payout rate.

The invention described in the above feature J1 to feature J11 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features J1 to J11 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The apparatus is provided with an advantage determination means for performing an advantage determination for generating an advantageous event that is advantageous to a player based on the lottery result by the lottery means (for example, a function for performing processing related to instruction functions such as a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101, a stop time AT lottery process, and an AT additional lottery process),
The advantage determination means is provided with a transition determination means (a function of executing a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for determining whether a game state is transitioned from a normal state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and for determining whether the game state is transitioned to the advantageous state;
a specific transition means (a function of executing a process for setting an AT mode winning flag based on the main control unit 101 counting the ceiling counter to 0) for executing a transition process for transitioning to the advantageous state without going through the transition determination by the transition determination means or even if the result of the transition determination is a result different from the transition result corresponding to transitioning to the advantageous state when the number of plays from a predetermined trigger (transition to an advantageous zone) reaches a specific number of plays;
A grasping means for grasping game number information corresponding to the number of games played from a predetermined trigger (a function for executing a process for grasping the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
An update means for updating the game number information according to the progress of the game from the predetermined trigger (a function of executing a subtraction process from the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
A game number notification means (a function of displaying an advantageous zone game number image AP by the display control device 81) that notifies the number of games played from the predetermined trigger as a game number notification by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) and updates the game number notification according to the progress of the game;
a specific processing means for executing a specific process that restricts the update of the number of plays information by the update means or makes it more difficult for the number of plays information to become specific information (ceiling counter = 0) corresponding to the specific number of plays than when the update is performed by the update means when a specific condition (operation in the second operation mode when a special role is won, limitation of special roles) is established in the game from the predetermined trigger (a function for executing a process not to decrement the ceiling counter when the main control device 101 operates in the second operation mode in the special role winning game);
Equipped with
The specific transition means is configured to execute the transition process when the number-of-plays information becomes the specific information,
The game number notifying means updates the game number notifying means even in a game in which the specific processing is performed by the specific processing means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the number of plays notified by the number of plays notifying means becomes a notification corresponding to the specific number of plays, if the number of plays until the number of plays information becomes the specific information is less than or equal to the specific number, a first specific notification (first premonition mode presentation) is executed by the specified notification means or a different notification means, and if the number of plays until the number of plays information becomes the specific information is more than the specific number, a second specific notification (third premonition mode presentation) different from the first specific notification is executed by the specified notification means or a different notification means.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of a start operation means, a lottery for the game is held, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at a valid position based on the operation of a stop operation means, a transition judgment is made to transition to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as an advantageous judgment according to the result of the lottery, and there are also cases where a transition to an advantageous state occurs when the number of plays from a predetermined trigger reaches a specific number of plays. In other words, in addition to the lottery for each game, in order to add a game feature that aims for an advantageous state, by setting a so-called ceiling that transitions to an advantageous state without going through a transition judgment when the number of plays reaches a specific number of plays, it is possible to make it difficult to stop playing midway and encourage continued play.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met in play from a specified trigger, the update of the play count information corresponding to the number of plays may be restricted. However, the play count notification indicating the number of plays from a specified trigger is updated even if a specific condition is met. Therefore, an event may occur in which the play count notification side has reached a specific play count corresponding to the ceiling, but the play count information side has not reached the specific information corresponding to the ceiling.

When such an event occurs, the player may become anxious that a process for transitioning to an advantageous state will not occur when a specific number of plays is reached, and may end up quitting the game despite having played that far.

In the above configuration, when the number of plays notification reaches a specific number of plays, the number of plays until the number of plays information reaches the specific information is grasped, and if the number of plays is equal to or less than the specific number, a first specific notification is executed, and if it is greater than the specific number, a second specific notification is executed. This allows the player to understand that the plays up to that point have not been wasted, and makes it possible to grasp from the type of specific notification how much longer it will take to reach the ceiling. This makes it possible to ideally increase the interest in the game.

Feature K2: A means for transitioning to the advantageous state after a predetermined number of games are played when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result (a function for executing a process for setting the number of premonition games by the main control device 101);
a special notification means (a function of executing a start time premonition performance setting process by a display control device 81) for executing a special notification by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means during a game until the game transitions to the advantageous state when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means becomes the transition result;
Equipped with
The special notification means executes a first special notification as the special notification when the predetermined number of games is equal to or less than the specific number, and executes a second special notification different from the first special notification as the special notification when the predetermined number of games is greater than the specific number,
A gaming machine described in feature K1, characterized in that the notification mode of the first specific notification executed by the specific notification means is set to be the same as the notification mode of the first special notification executed by the special notification means or to be a notification mode that is difficult for a player to distinguish from the notification mode of the first special notification, and the notification mode of the second specific notification executed by the specific notification means is set to be the same as the notification mode of the second special notification executed by the special notification means or to be a notification mode that is difficult for a player to distinguish from the notification mode of the second special notification.

According to the above configuration, when the play count notification reaches the specific play count and a specific notification is made, the specific notification is made in the same visual manner as the special notification made when a win is made in the transition judgment before the specific play count is reached and a transition to an advantageous state occurs. In this way, there is no need to store separate data on the notification mode as a specific notification for reaching the ceiling, which reduces memory capacity and allows the player to clearly understand how long it will take to transition to an advantageous state.

Feature K3. The advantageous state is set to a first advantageous state (AT mode) and a second advantageous state (CZ mode) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state;
The specific transition means is configured to transition to the first advantageous state,
The gaming machine described in feature K2, characterized in that the special notification means executes the second special notification as the special notification when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a result corresponding to a transition to the first advantageous state and the specified number of plays is greater than the specific number, and executes a third special notification different from the second special notification as the special notification when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a result corresponding to a transition to the second advantageous state and the specified number of plays is greater than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, after the game notification has reached the specific number of plays, the notification mode of the second specific notification that is executed when the number of plays to the ceiling is greater than the specific number is the same as the notification mode of the second special notification that is executed when a transition to the first advantageous state, which is the more advantageous state under normal circumstances, occurs. In this way, the player's impatience and irritation when the transition to the advantageous state is slow to occur despite the display ceiling having been reached can be effectively alleviated by the notification (second specific notification, second special notification) that the transition to the first advantageous state has been confirmed, and the player's feelings can be eased until the transition to the first advantageous state occurs.

Feature K4. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result (the 33rd small win) can be won, and the first advantageous judgment is executed as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the second result (the first small win to the sixth small win) in which more benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means than the first result can be won, and a second advantageous judgment that is less likely to be an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event than the first advantageous judgment is executed as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means, or a special result (special role) in which the advantageous judgment is not executed is set;
The gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that the specific processing means is capable of executing the specific processing by determining that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and that the stop operation means has been operated in the second operation mode as the fulfillment of the specific condition.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result can be won and a first advantageous judgment is executed which is likely to result in an advantageous result corresponding to the advantageous judgment result causing an advantageous event, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a special result is set in which a second result can be won which has more benefits than the first result, but a second advantageous judgment which is less likely to result in an advantageous result is executed, and extremely special gameplay can be added, in which the player can choose the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or choose the one with the more benefits.

Moreover, if the player operates in the second operation mode when a special result is won, a specific process is executed that restricts the update of the number of plays information, so that the second operation mode not only results in a second advantageous judgment on the unfavorable side, but also means that the current play will not contribute to the number of plays up to the ceiling. In other words, even if the player wants to obtain the second special benefit, operating in the second operation mode is disadvantageous to the player in terms of gameplay that transitions to an advantageous state.

However, it is anticipated that there will be players who do not understand the difference between the first and second operation modes, or who are unable to intentionally distinguish between these operation modes, and it is up to the player to choose the game that will give them the second special benefit. If a special result like the one described above is provided, it will inevitably be easy for a discrepancy to occur between the displayed number of plays up to the ceiling and the actual number of plays.

Therefore, if a specific notification is made according to the actual number of plays up to the ceiling when the play count notification reaches a specific number of plays, as in feature K1 above, it is possible to obtain the effect of diversifying the play through such special results, while also making the player understand that the ceiling will soon be reached and being able to grasp the number of plays up to the ceiling from the specific notification.

Feature K5: A means for transitioning to the advantageous state after a predetermined number of games are played when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result (a function for executing a process for setting the number of premonition games by the main control device 101);
a special notification means (a function of executing a start time premonition performance setting process by a display control device 81) for executing a special notification by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means during a game until the game transitions to the advantageous state when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means becomes the transition result;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature K4 is characterized in that the product of the average number of times that the lottery result by the lottery means when the specific number of games is played and the average difference between the update number from the number of games information updated by the update means when the specific processing is not performed based on the special result and the specific processing is performed based on the special result is set to be less than the maximum number of the specified number of games.

According to the above configuration, even if the second operation mode is used every time a special result is won, when the play count notification reaches the specific play count, the actual number of plays up to the ceiling is more likely to be within the specified number of plays for which a special notification is issued in the case of a win in the transition judgment during normal times. By doing this, even in a configuration in which a specific notification is started when the displayed ceiling is reached, it is possible to prevent mid-game stagnation, such as the specific notification being issued for too long, and in a configuration in which the notification mode of a special notification is used for a specific notification as in feature K2, it is also possible to make the use of the notification extremely smooth.

Feature K6. The specific transition means is configured to execute the transition process so as to transition from the game in which the number of games information becomes the specific information to the advantageous state after a specific number of games,
The gaming machine described in feature K5 is characterized in that the number of games obtained by adding the specific number of games to the product of the average number of times that the lottery result by the lottery means when the specific number of games is played becomes the special result, and the average difference between the number of updates from the number of games information updated by the update means when the specific processing is performed based on the special result, and the number of updates when the specific processing is not performed, is set to be less than the maximum number of the predetermined number of games.

According to the above configuration, when the ceiling is reached, a transition to an advantageous state occurs after a specific number of plays. Taking this specific number of plays into consideration, even if the second operation mode is used every time a special result is won, when the play count notification reaches the specific number of plays, the actual number of plays up to the ceiling is more likely to be within the specified number of plays for which a special notification is made in the case of a win in the normal transition judgment. Therefore, after the ceiling is reached, a grace period for performing effects, etc. before the transition to the advantageous zone is set as the specific number of plays, and the above effect can be expected while using the specific number of plays as it is even when the displayed ceiling is exceeded. In this way, it is possible to optimize the effects up to the transition to the advantageous state without incurring complex processing or an increase in the amount of data.

Feature K7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features K4 to K6, characterized in that, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the update means is capable of updating the number of plays information so that the difference between the number of plays information and the difference before and after the update is greater when the lottery result by the lottery means is a result different from the special result.

According to the above configuration, by operating in the first operation mode when a special result is won, it is possible to update the number of plays information to a greater extent than in the case of other lottery results. Therefore, depending on which operation mode is used, extreme results can be obtained, such as operating in the first operation mode when a special result is won speeding up the reaching of the ceiling, whereas operating in the second operation mode slows down the reaching of the ceiling. Therefore, the operation mode can be selected more carefully when a special result is won, which can greatly contribute to improving the enjoyment of the game.

Feature K8. The gaming machine described in Feature K7, characterized in that the second operation mode is an operation mode with a lower degree of difficulty than the first operation mode (the first operation mode requires the use of operation timing in addition to operation sequence).

According to the above configuration, if the operation mode is not used to its full potential, the second operation mode is likely to occur when a special result is won, and the specific processing is likely to cause a discrepancy between the displayed ceiling being reached and the actual ceiling being reached. Therefore, it is considered that there is great significance in adopting a configuration such as feature K1 for such a configuration.

Feature K9. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The apparatus is provided with an advantage determination means for performing an advantage determination for generating an advantageous event that is advantageous to a player based on the lottery result by the lottery means (for example, a function for performing processing related to instruction functions such as a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101, a stop time AT lottery process, and an AT additional lottery process),
The advantage determination means is provided with a transition determination means (a function of executing a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for determining whether a game state is transitioned from a normal state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and for determining whether the game state is transitioned to the advantageous state;
a special notification means (a function of executing a start premonition performance setting process by a display control device 81) for executing a special notification by a predetermined notification means in a game until the game is played in the advantageous state when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition result corresponding to a transition to the advantageous state,
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the winning of the first result (the 33rd minor win) is possible, and a first transition judgment is executed as the transition judgment by the transition judgment means, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the winning of the second result (the first minor win to the sixth minor win) in which more benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means than the first result is possible, and a second transition judgment which is less likely to result in the transition result than the first transition judgment is executed as the transition judgment by the transition judgment means, or a special result (special role) in which the transition judgment is not executed is set;
a specific transition means (a function for executing a process for setting an AT mode winning flag based on the main control unit 101 counting the ceiling counter to 0) for executing a transition process for transitioning to the advantageous state without going through the transition determination means or even if the result of the transition determination is different from the transition result when the number of plays from a predetermined trigger (transition to an advantageous zone) reaches a specific number of plays;
A grasping means for grasping game number information corresponding to the number of games played from a predetermined trigger (a function for executing a process for grasping the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
An update means for updating the game number information according to the progress of the game from the predetermined trigger (a function for executing a subtraction process of the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
A game number notification means (a function of displaying an advantageous zone game number image AP by the display control device 81) that notifies the number of games played from the predetermined trigger as a game number notification by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) and updates the game number notification according to the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The specific transition means is configured to execute the transition process when the game number information becomes specific information corresponding to the specific game number,
The game number notifying means updates the game number notifying means even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the game is a game in which the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode,
The special notification means is configured to execute a first special notification (first precursor mode presentation) and a second special notification (third precursor mode presentation) as the special notification, and the higher the degree of advantage of the advantageous state to be transitioned to, the easier it is to execute the second special notification than the first special notification;
A gaming machine characterized in that, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation mode in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the game number notification by the game number notification means becomes a notification corresponding to the specific game number, the second special notification by the special notification means becomes more likely to be executed.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of a start operation means, a lottery for the game is held, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at a valid position based on the operation of a stop operation means, a transition judgment is made to transition to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as an advantageous judgment according to the result of the lottery, and there are also cases where a transition to an advantageous state occurs when the number of plays from a predetermined trigger reaches a specific number of plays. In other words, in addition to the lottery for each game, in order to add a game feature that aims for an advantageous state, by setting a so-called ceiling that transitions to an advantageous state without going through a transition judgment when the number of plays reaches a specific number of plays, it is possible to make it difficult to stop playing midway and encourage continued play.

Furthermore, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result can be won and a first transition judgment is executed, which is likely to result in a transition to an advantageous state, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a special result is set in which a second result can be won, which has more benefits than the first result, but a second transition judgment is executed, which is less likely to result in a transition, allowing the player to add extremely special gameplay, such as choosing the degree of advantage of the transition judgment or choosing the option with more benefits.

In this case, it is thought that in order to bring about a transition to an advantageous state, the player should operate in the first operation mode when the special result is won, but depending on the player, there is a possibility that they may mistakenly switch to the second operation mode when trying to use the first operation mode, and if a special result is provided in a gameplay that aims to transition to an advantageous state, it is difficult to ensure the fairness of the game.

In the above configuration, if the second operation mode is used when a special result is won, the second special notification corresponding to the transition to a favorable advantageous state when the ceiling is reached is more likely to be executed, making it possible to effectively support players who mistakenly operate in the second operation mode. This makes it possible to ideally increase the interest of the game.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features K1 to K8 to feature K9 individually, or to apply a combination of some or all of the respective technical ideas.

The invention described in the above features K1 to K9 has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features K1 to K9 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result (first small win to sixth small win) can be won, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a mode result (push order bell) is set such that a second result (ninth small win to thirty-second small win) in which a smaller benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means than the first result can be won.
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notifying means (a function of executing a push order notification by the main control device 101) for executing a mode notification for an operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode;
A specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of the status notification by the status notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as a start-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101 or a stop-time AT lottery process),
Equipped with
As game states, a specific state (advantageous zone) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal zone) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executable or is more difficult to execute than the specific state are set,
The specific processing means includes a transition determination means (a function of executing a favorable zone transition lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition determination of transitioning from the normal state to the specific state as the specific process,
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the third result (the 33rd minor win) is possible, and the first transition judgment is executed as the transition judgment by the transition judgment means, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the winning of the fourth result (the first minor win to the sixth minor win) in which more benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means than the third result is possible, and a second transition judgment that is less likely to result in a transition to the specific state than the first transition judgment is executed as the transition judgment by the transition judgment means, or a special result (special role) in which the transition judgment is not executed is set,
The transition determination means is capable of transitioning to a more advantageous specific state (an advantageous zone in which the ceiling is reached in a fewer number of games) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result (specific role) rather than when the lottery result is a specific result (specific role).

The above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a so-called push order role is provided in which a first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, while a second result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, which has a smaller bonus than the first result, and a mode notification is made as a push order notification for the push order role by transitioning to a specific state, thereby realizing excellent playability in which the degree of advantage can be greatly different depending on whether or not the mode notification is made.

Then, as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result can be achieved and the first transition judgment is executed as a transition judgment to the specific state, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result can be achieved which offers more benefits than the third result, but a special result is set in which the second transition judgment is executed as the transition judgment, which is less likely to result in a transition to the specific state than the first transition judgment, or no transition judgment is executed, and extremely special gameplay can be added in which the player can choose to transition to the specific state or choose the option with more benefits.

The specific state in which the status notification can be executed is entered when a transition result is reached in the transition determination made by the transition determination means of the specific process, and the transition to a more favorable specific state is more likely to occur when the transition determination is made in response to a specific result being won than when the transition determination is made in response to a predetermined result being won.

By doing so, it becomes possible to take advantage of the fact that the content of the transition judgment and the benefit obtained differ depending on the operation mode when the special result is won, as described above, and to play in such a way that when the special result is won, the player operates in the second operation mode to obtain the second benefit but not transition to the specific state, and the transition to the specific state does not occur until the lottery result becomes a specific result. By using such a configuration, it is possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature L2. The gaming machine described in Feature L1, characterized in that the transition determination means is more likely to transition to a specific state that is advantageous to the player when transitioning to the specific state based on the specific result than when transitioning to the specific state based on the special result.

The above configuration makes it clearer the significance of waiting for a special result to be won, rather than transitioning to a specific state when a special result is won. This makes it possible to optimally realize the special gameplay of feature L1.

Feature L3. When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, a setting means (a function of executing a setting process of the ceiling game number by the main control device 101) is provided for setting the advantage degree of the specific state to which the transition is to be made;
The gaming machine described in feature L1 or feature L2, wherein the setting means is more likely to set the specific state to which the transition is made based on the specific result to be more advantageous than the specific state to which the transition is made based on the predetermined result.

As in the above configuration, by providing a setting means separate from the transition determination means, the functions can be distributed to each means, and the occurrence of errors due to an increase in the processing load can be suppressed.

Feature L4. The game value required to play a game is set as a specific number (3 coins);
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L3, characterized in that the bonus awarded when the fourth result is won is equivalent to a gaming value (8 coins) equal to or greater than twice the specific number.

According to the above configuration, even if the player operates in the second operation mode in a game in which a special result is won and the result of the transition judgment is ignored, the game value required in that game and game value equal to or greater than the game value required in the next game can be acquired, so that the game is unlikely to be wasted, and rather, the gameplay of waiting for the specific result of feature L1 can be realized without having to consider the loss of game value.

Feature L5. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific state is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a first specific process is executed as the specific process, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is not executed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that the bonus, the first specific process, and the second specific process are set in the event that the third result and the fourth result are won so that operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode is more advantageous to the player than operating it in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, after the transition to the specific state, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode when a special result is won than to operate in the second operation mode. In this way, it is possible to realize an extremely unique gameplay that encourages the player to operate in the opposite manner across the transition to the specific state, such as operating in the second operation mode when a special result is won before the transition to the specific state, and operating in the first operation mode when a special result is won after the transition to the specific state. Therefore, by using such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the game.

Feature L6: As the specific state, a first specific state (AT mode) in which the state notification by the state notification means is more likely to be performed, and a second specific state (normal mode) in which the state notification by the state notification means is less likely to be performed or is not performed at all compared to the first specific state are set;
A specific transition determination means (a function of executing a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing a transition determination of transition from the second specific state to the first specific state,
The first determination process and the second determination process include a transition determination by the specific transition determination means,
A gaming machine as described in feature L5, characterized in that when the first specific process is executed as a transition judgment by the specific transition judgment means, the specific transition result of transitioning to the first specific state is more likely to occur than when the second specific process is executed.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature L5.

Feature L7. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result (first small win to sixth small win) can be won, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a mode result (push order bell) is set such that a second result (ninth small win to thirty-second small win) in which a smaller benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means than the first result can be won.
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notifying means (a function of executing a push order notification by the main control device 101) for executing a mode notification for an operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode;
A specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of the status notification by the status notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
As game states, a specific state (advantageous zone) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executable, and a normal state (normal zone) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executable or is more difficult to execute than the specific state are set,
A transition determination means (a function of executing a lottery process for transitioning to an advantageous zone by the main control device 101) for executing a transition determination of transitioning from the normal state to the specific state,
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the winning of the third result (the 33rd minor role) is possible, and a first specific process is executed as the specific process by the specific process means. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the winning of the fourth result (the first to sixth minor roles) in which more benefits are awarded by the benefit awarding means than the third result is possible, and a special result (special role) in which a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process by the specific process means or in which the specific process is not executed is set.
The transition determination means is capable of transitioning to a more advantageous specific state (an advantageous zone in which a ceiling is reached in a fewer number of games) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result (specific role) rather than when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, and is configured to execute the transition determination regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a so-called push order role is provided in which a first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, while a second result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, which has a smaller bonus than the first result, and a mode notification is made as a push order notification for the push order role by transitioning to a specific state, thereby realizing excellent playability in which the degree of advantage can be greatly different depending on whether or not the mode notification is made.

Then, as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result can be achieved, and the first specific process is executed as a specific process such as determining whether to transition to a specific state or setting the advantage of the specific state, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result can be achieved, which offers more benefits than the third result, but a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or a special result is set in which no specific process is executed, and the player can choose to transition to a specific state or choose the option with more benefits, adding an extremely special gameplay element.

The specific state in which the mode notification can be executed is entered when the transition determination means determines that the transition is a transition result, and the transition to a more favorable specific state is more likely to occur when the transition determination is triggered by the winning of a specific result than when the transition determination is triggered by the winning of a predetermined result.

By doing so, it is possible to take advantage of the fact that the content of the specific process and the benefit obtained differ depending on the operation mode when the special result is won, as described above, and to play in such a way that when the special result is won, the player operates in the second operation mode, obtaining the second benefit but preventing a transition to the specific state, and preventing a transition to the specific state from occurring until the lottery result becomes a specific result.

In the above configuration, the transition judgment based on the special result is executed regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means, so that it is possible to prevent actions such as avoiding the transition to the specific state while obtaining the second benefit as described above. This makes it possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

The invention described in Features L1 to L7 above was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features J1 to J8, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second picture combination different from the first picture combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a special result (special role) is set in which the bonus awarding means awards a second bonus (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
A mode notifying means for notifying the mode of operation of the stop operation means by a predetermined notifying means (for example, a function for notifying the push order by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
A specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of the status notification by the status notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
the specific processing means is set to execute a first specific processing as the specific processing when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and to execute a second specific processing as the specific processing which is more disadvantageous to a player than the first specific processing as the specific processing when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or to not execute the specific processing;
As the special result, a first special result (special role A) and a second special result (special role B) different from the first special result are set,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first operation mode for the first special result (an operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first) is set to be the second operation mode for the second special result, and the first operation mode for the second special result (an operation mode in which the middle stop switch 43 is operated first) is set to be the second operation mode for the first special result.

The above configuration allows a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of a start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at a valid position based on the operation of a stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. When the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first bonus is awarded and a first specific process is executed as a specific process related to the function of the mode notification. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, a second bonus is awarded and a second specific process is executed as a specific process related to the function of the mode notification. Since the second bonus is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus, and the first specific process is more advantageous to the player than the second specific process, when a special result is reached, it is possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which the player is left to choose between the more advantageous side of the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means (second operation mode) and the more advantageous side of the function of the mode notification (first operation mode).

Moreover, in the above configuration, multiple special results are provided, and the first operation mode for the first special result becomes the second operation mode for the second special result, and the first operation mode for the second special result becomes the second operation mode for the first special result. Therefore, even if a player continues playing with the first operation mode for the first special result, it is possible to enjoy not only the benefit of the first operation mode for the first special result, but also the benefit of the second operation mode for the second special result, and even if a player continues playing with the second operation mode for the first special result, it is possible to enjoy not only the benefit of the second operation mode for the first special result, but also the benefit of the first operation mode for the second special result. Therefore, it is possible to create novel gameplay using the above special results while ensuring fairness between players.

Feature M2. The gaming machine according to Feature M1, characterized in that it is provided with a first specific notification means (a function for executing a process for outputting and setting a push order notification command when a special role is won in normal mode or CZ mode in a lottery result response process by the main control device 101 when the AT mode flag is not set, and a function for executing a process for performing a push order notification display by the display control device 81) for executing a first specific notification (a push order notification effect when a special role is won in normal mode or CZ mode) corresponding to the first operation mode for the first special result by a specified notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, and executing a first specific notification (a push order notification effect when a special role is won in normal mode or CZ mode) corresponding to the first operation mode for the second special result by a specified notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result.

According to the above configuration, while assuming a game in which multiple special results are provided and the player is to operate in not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode, it is also possible to allow the player to operate in the first operation mode if the first special result is won, and to operate in the first operation mode if the second special result is won. In this way, multiple playability can be realized with one gaming machine, and since the player is free to decide whether or not to follow the notification by the first specific notification means, the player can select whether to play a game in which the player operates in not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode when a special result is won, or to play a game in which the player operates in the first operation mode corresponding to each special result. This can suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature M3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the first result (first small win to sixth small win) can be won, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the second result (ninth small win to thirty-second small win) in which the bonus given by the bonus giving means is less than the first result can be won (push order bell) is set.
the mode notifying means is capable of executing the mode notifying about an operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode when a lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result;
A gaming machine described in feature M2, characterized in that the notification mode of the first specific notification by the first specific notification means and the notification mode of the mode notification by the mode notification means are different so as to be distinguishable by a player.

According to the above configuration, a so-called push order role is provided in which the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, while the second result can be won, which has fewer benefits than the first result, and a mode notification is made as a push order notification for the push order role, so that it is possible to realize excellent gameplay in which the degree of advantage can be greatly different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification. In such a game, if a first specific notification that notifies the first operation mode of a special result is added to the gameplay, assuming that the first result can be won on the advantageous side when operating according to the mode notification, the player may mistakenly believe that the advantageous side's second benefit can be obtained even when operating according to the first specific notification, due to the relationship between the mode notification that notifies the operation mode of the stop operation means and the first specific notification in the same way. In this regard, as in the above configuration, the notification modes of the mode notification and the first specific notification are different so that they can be distinguished by the player, so that it is possible to make the player feel less uncomfortable even if the first benefit on the unfavorable side is obtained by operating according to the first specific notification. And by having the player operate in the first operation mode as described above, it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the player to perform the first specific process on the favorable side without feeling uncomfortable.

Feature M4. The first operation manner for the first special result includes a plurality of operation manners;
the first operation manner for the second special result includes a plurality of operation manners;
The gaming machine described in feature M2 or feature M3, characterized in that the first specific notification means includes means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to one of the multiple operation modes as the first operation mode for the first special result, means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode among the multiple operation modes as the first operation mode for the first special result, means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to one of the multiple operation modes as the first operation mode for the second special result, and means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode among the multiple operation modes as the first operation mode for the second special result.

According to the above configuration, the first operation mode for the first special result and the first operation mode for the second special result are each set to include multiple operation modes, and the first specific notification that notifies the first operation mode when each of these special results is won is set to have each operation mode executed. Therefore, even if the first operation mode includes multiple operation modes, it is possible to avoid an incident in which the notified operation mode is biased. Therefore, the reliability of the first specific notification can be increased compared to a configuration in which the same operation mode is always notified.

Feature M5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features M1 to M4, characterized in that it is provided with a second specific notification means (a function for executing a process for outputting and setting a push order notification command when special roles A to C are won when the AT mode flag is set in the lottery result response process by the main control device 101, a function for executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81) for executing a second specific notification (a push order notification effect when a special role is won in the AT mode) corresponding to the second operation mode for the second special result by a predetermined notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, and executing a second specific notification (a push order notification effect when a special role is won in the AT mode) corresponding to the second operation mode for the second special result by a predetermined notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result.

According to the above configuration, while assuming a game in which multiple special results are provided and the player is to operate in not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode, it is also possible to allow the player to operate in the second operation mode if the first special result is won, and to operate in the second operation mode if the second special result is won. In this way, multiple playability can be realized with one gaming machine, and since the player is free to decide whether or not to follow the notification by the second specific notification means, the player can select whether to play a game in which the player operates in not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode when a special result is won, or to play a game in which the player operates in the second operation mode corresponding to each special result. This can suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature M6. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the first result (first small win to sixth small win) can be won, while when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the second result (ninth small win to thirty-second small win) in which the bonus given by the bonus giving means is less than the first result can be won (push order bell) is set;
the mode notifying means is capable of executing the mode notifying about an operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode when a lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result;
A gaming machine described in feature M5, characterized in that the notification mode of the second specific notification by the second specific notification means and the notification mode of the mode notification by the mode notification means are set so as to be difficult for a player to distinguish.

According to the above configuration, a so-called push order role is provided in which the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, while the second result can be won, which has fewer benefits than the first result, and a mode notification is made as a push order notification for the push order role, so that it is possible to realize excellent gameplay in which the degree of advantage can be greatly different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification. In such a game, when a second specific notification that notifies the second operation mode of the special result is added to the gameplay, it is assumed that the first result can be won on the advantageous side when operating according to the mode notification, and the second benefit on the advantageous side can be obtained even when operating according to the second specific notification. And, since the notification modes of the mode notification and the second specific notification are set so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between them, the player can operate on the advantageous side by following the notification without being particularly conscious of which notification it is.

Feature M7. The second operation manner for the first special result includes a plurality of operation manners;
the second operation manner for the second special result includes a plurality of operation manners;
The gaming machine described in feature M5 or feature M6, characterized in that the second specific notification means includes means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to one of the multiple operation modes as the second operation mode for the first special result, means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode among the multiple operation modes as the second operation mode for the first special result, means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to one of the multiple operation modes as the second operation mode for the second special result, and means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode among the multiple operation modes as the second operation mode for the second special result.

According to the above configuration, the second operation mode for the first special result and the second operation mode for the second special result are each set to include multiple operation modes, and the second specific notification that notifies the second operation mode when each of these special results is won is set to have each operation mode executed. Therefore, even if the second operation mode includes multiple operation modes, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the notified operation mode is biased. Therefore, the reliability of the second specific notification can be increased compared to a configuration in which the same operation mode is always notified.

Feature M8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features M1 to M7, characterized in that at least one of the following is set to be different processes: the first specific process executed by the specific processing means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the first specific process executed by the specific processing means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the second specific process executed by the specific processing means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the second specific process executed by the specific processing means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode (FIGS. 93 and 94).

According to the above configuration, the content of the specific process executed for the first special result and the second special result is set to be different depending on the operation mode, so that even if the player operates in the same first operation mode or second operation mode, the benefit of the specific process related to the function of the mode notification means to notify the mode will differ depending on the special result that is won. Therefore, while increasing the attention to which special result is obtained, it is possible to draw attention to which first operation mode (second operation mode) is executed for which special result, and it is possible to appropriately increase the interest in the game.

Feature M9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features M1 to M8, characterized in that at least one of the following is set to be different bonuses: the first bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first special result, and the first bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second special result, and the second bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second special result, and the second bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the first special result and the second special result are set so that the bonuses granted differ depending on the operation mode, so that even if the player operates in the same way using the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the bonuses obtained will differ depending on the special result that is won. Therefore, while increasing attention to which special result is obtained, it is possible to draw interest in which first operation mode (second operation mode) is executed for which special result, and it is possible to appropriately increase interest in the game.

Feature M10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features M1 to M9, characterized in that it is provided with a means for making it difficult for a player to distinguish whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first special result or the second special result (a function for notifying an operation sequence rather than a special role when special roles A to C are won during the AT mode by the main control device 101).

The above configuration makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first special result and the second special result, and makes it impossible to distinguish whether the operation mode being operated is the first operation mode when the first special result is won, or the second operation mode when the second special result is won. This allows for a novel gameplay experience in which the player can play while predicting which result their operation will correspond to.

In particular, in configurations such as feature M8 and feature M9, where different special processes or bonuses are executed depending on the special result, the player's profits can vary greatly depending on which result the operation corresponds to, making it possible to enhance the fun of predicting which result the player's own operation corresponds to.

Feature M11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features M1 to M10, characterized in that it is provided with a means for enabling a player to identify whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first special result or the second special result (a function for announcing a special role when special roles A to C are won before the main control device 101 switches to the AT mode).

The above configuration allows the player to distinguish between the first special result and the second special result, and makes it possible for the player to distinguish whether the operation mode he or she is performing is the first operation mode when the first special result is won, or the second operation mode when the second special result is won. This allows the player to play while knowing which result his or her operation corresponds to, and makes it possible for the player to perform the operation more carefully.

In particular, in configurations such as feature M8 and feature M9, where different special processes or bonuses are executed depending on the special result, the player's profits can vary greatly depending on which result the operation corresponds to, so it becomes increasingly important for the player to understand which of the above operations they perform corresponds to, and there is great significance in applying the above configuration.

Feature M12. As the special result, a third special result (special role C) different from the first special result and the second special result is set,
the first operation mode for the first special result (the operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first) is set to be the second operation mode for the second special result and the third special result, the first operation mode for the second special result (the operation mode in which the middle stop switch 43 is operated first) is set to be the second operation mode for the first special result and the third special result, and the first operation mode for the third special result (the operation mode in which the right stop switch 44 is operated first) is set to be the second operation mode for the first special result and the second special result,
The stop operation means is composed of a first stop operation means, a second stop operation means, and a third stop operation means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features M1 to M11, characterized in that the first operation mode for the first special result is operating the first stop operation means in a specific order, the first operation mode for the second special result is operating the second stop operation means in the specific order, and the first operation mode for the third special result is operating the third stop operation means in the specific order.

According to the above configuration, the number of special results is the same as the number of stop operation means, and the specific order in which the stop operation means is operated is set as the first operation mode for each special result. In this way, in the gameplay in which the player predicts which special result has been won and further selects which operation mode to use, the only choice is which stop operation means to operate in a specific order, which lowers the difficulty level of this innovative game and makes it possible for many players to enjoy the game.

The invention described in Features M1 to M12 above was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C12, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features J1 to J8, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a second symbol combination (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first symbol combination is awarded by the bonus awarding means (push order bell, special role) is set.
A mode notifying means for notifying the mode of operation of the stop operation means by a predetermined notifying means (for example, a function for notifying the push order by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
A specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of the status notification by the status notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101);
A specific notification means for executing a specific notification corresponding to the specific processing by the specific processing means (a function for executing a start time CZ performance setting process and a stop time CZ performance setting process by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The specific notification means includes:
A first specific notification means (a function for executing a process for performing a double number effect or a random number effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the specific process executed based on the first trigger (the third stop operation);
A second specific notification means (a function for executing a process for performing a confirmation performance when a cherry is won by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the specific process executed based on a second trigger (operation of the start lever 41) different from the first trigger;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the notification control of the specific notification by the first specific notification means is different from the notification control of the specific notification by the second specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. A special result is set in which a first bonus is awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, while a second bonus is awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, and since the second bonus is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus, when a special result is reached, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage depending on whether or not a mode notification is executed for the operation mode of the stop operation means, which can contribute to increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in a game in which the bonuses granted may differ depending on the operation mode, the notification control of the specific notification corresponding to the specific processing related to the operation mode notification is different when the specific processing is executed based on a first trigger and when it is executed based on a second trigger. This allows the player to predict the result of the specific processing from the specific notification, and also draws attention to which trigger the specific processing is based on. This can be applied to gameplay in which the results or content of the specific processing differ depending on the trigger, and can be very useful in increasing the interest of games that use the mode notification.

Feature N2. The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special role), a first specific processing means (for example, a function of executing a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes the specific process after the operation of the stop operation means as the first trigger;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific role) different from the first result, as the second trigger, a second specific processing means (for example, a function of executing a process for AT lottery at the time of stopping by the main control unit 101) that executes the specific processing before the operation of the stop operation means;
Equipped with
the first specific notification means executes a first specific notification as the specific notification at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means in a first game in which a lottery result by the lottery means is the first result;
The gaming machine described in feature N1 is characterized in that the second specific notification means executes a second specific notification as the specific notification before the specific timing in the second game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (when the first stop ON operation is performed).

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the bonus given may differ depending on the operation mode, the specific processing related to the mode notification for the operation mode is executed after the operation of the stop operation means if the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, and is executed after the operation of the stop operation means if the lottery result is the second result. In the case of the first result, the first specific notification corresponding to the specific processing is executed at a specific timing after the operation, and in the case of the second result, the second specific notification corresponding to the specific processing is executed before the specific timing. Therefore, the lottery result and the execution timing of the specific processing are associated, and an interesting game can be realized in which the execution timing of the specific processing can be predicted and understood from the lottery result, and the player can put effort into operating the stop operation means so that the result of the specific processing is advantageous to the player.

Feature N3. The first result is the aspect result;
the specific processing means is set to execute a first specific processing as the specific processing when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, execute a second specific processing as the specific processing which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific processing or not execute the specific processing when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode;
The gaming machine described in feature N2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing processing for performing a tenpai presentation by the display control device 81) for making an announcement corresponding to the specific processing before the specific timing after the branching timing (first stop ON operation) when each of the stop operation means is operated to determine whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode in the first game.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result is the first result, the first bonus is awarded by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and the first specific process is executed as the specific process related to the mode notification function, while the second bonus is awarded by operating the stop operation means in the second operation mode, and the second specific process is executed as the specific process related to the mode notification function. Therefore, when the first result is obtained, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the player is left to choose between the advantageous side of the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the mode notification function (first operation mode).

In addition, in the first game in which the first specific notification is executed at a specific timing after the operation, the notification corresponding to the specific process may be executed after the branching timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode and before the specific timing. This makes it possible to execute the notification corresponding to the specific process as early as possible, while preventing the player from knowing whether the first operation mode or the second operation mode should be used. In other words, for example, if the result of the specific process can be predicted in advance, if the detected result is not favorable to the player, the player may operate in the second operation mode to obtain the second special benefit, even though the second specific process is performed. However, by generating the notification corresponding to the specific process after the branching timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode as described above, the above action is less likely to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to start the notification corresponding to the specific process in the first game earlier while ensuring the fairness of the game.

Feature N4. The first result is the aspect result;
the specific processing means is set to execute a first specific processing as the specific processing when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and to execute a second specific processing as the specific processing which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific processing as the specific processing when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or to not execute the specific processing;
The gaming machine described in feature N2 or feature N3 is characterized in that, in the second game, at a timing (when the first stop ON operation is performed) that is a branching timing in the operation of each of the stop operation means to determine whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode in the first game, the gaming machine is equipped with a means for executing a notification corresponding to the specific processing (a function for executing a process for performing a confirmation presentation when a cherry is won by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, by generating a notification corresponding to a specific process based on the second result at a branching timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, if the result cannot be known from the notification and the first result can be predicted, when the notification is issued, the player can know whether the selection of the first operation mode and the second operation mode was correct and whether the result of the specific process was favorable to the player from the notification at the branching timing, which realizes a novel gameplay and can also greatly enhance the presentation leading up to the notification at the specific timing.

Feature N5. The first result is the aspect result;
the specific processing means is set to execute a first specific processing as the specific processing when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, execute a second specific processing as the specific processing which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific processing or not execute the specific processing when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a specific pattern stops at a specific position of a specific reel (left reel 32L) among the reels, and the first pattern combination stops at the activated position;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (Cherry A to C), the specific symbols stop at the specific position of the specific rotating body, and a third symbol combination different from the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination stops at the valid position, so that a bonus corresponding to the second result is awarded by the bonus awarding means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features N2 to N4, characterized in that it is equipped with a special notification means (a function of executing processing for performing a confirmation presentation when a cherry is won by the display control device 81) that can execute a special notification when the specific pattern stops at a specific position on the specific rotating body and no other rotating bodies are stopped.

When a specific pattern stops at a specific position on a specific rotating body, it is not possible to determine from the stop result whether this is based on the second result or the first operation mode when the first result is won. In this configuration, a special notification may be issued when a specific pattern stops at a specific position on the specific rotating body, so it is not possible to determine whether the special notification corresponds to a specific process based on the second result or to the subsequent first specific process or second specific process, which increases the options for predicting the outcome when a special notification is issued, making it possible to favorably increase the attention given to the special notification.

Feature N6. The gaming machine described in Feature N5, wherein the special notification means executes a notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing based on the second result as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, a specific process is performed before the stopping operation, and a notification corresponding to the result is executed as a special notification when a specific pattern stops at a specific position on a specific rotating body. By doing this, if the first result is the scene in which the special notification is executed, the situation is still the same as the stop result before the specific process was executed, but there is no inconsistency in the content of the special notification, making it possible to increase the reliability of the special notification.

Feature N7. A gaming machine according to Feature N5 or Feature N6, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first result, the second pattern combination stops at the valid position without the specific pattern stopping at the specific position of the specific rotating body.

According to the above configuration, when the first result is won, if the first operation mode is used, the specific image stops at a specific position on the specific rotating body, but if the second operation mode is used, the specific image does not stop, so it is possible to give a strong impression that the special notification was performed as a result of the selection of the operation mode. In this way, it is possible to preferably increase the attention paid to the special notification.

Feature N8. The specific processing means is
A means for executing a process for generating a specific event (AT mode transition winning, CZ mode transition, AT additional winning, ceiling counter subtraction) that makes it easier to execute the mode notification by the mode notification means as the specific process,
A gaming machine described in any one of features N2 to N7, characterized in that the specific processing in the case of the first result is set to make the specific event more likely to occur than the specific processing in the case of a predetermined second result (e.g., Cherry A).

According to the above configuration, a specific event is more likely to occur when a specific process is performed after an operation based on the first result than when a specific process is performed before an operation based on the second result. Therefore, although it is overwhelmingly easier to execute a notification corresponding to the result of a specific process in a game in which the second result is won, a specific process that leads to a specific event desired by a player is more likely to be executed in a game in which the first result is won. Therefore, by deliberately executing a notification corresponding to the result of a specific process at a special timing in a game in which a specific process is performed even in a game with a first result, it is possible to build anticipation for a notification corresponding to the result of a specific process even in a game with a second result.

Feature N9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features N2 to N8, characterized in that the probability that the lottery result selected by the lottery means will be the second result (normal lip A-C, chance eye A-C, cherry A-C, watermelon) is set to be higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the first result.

According to the above configuration, since the first result occurs less frequently than the second result, if the timing of the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is adjusted to the first result, inconveniences such as the notification not being made for a long time after the specific process is executed in the case of the second result are likely to occur. In this regard, by making the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process be made at a special timing within the game regardless of the result, it is possible to make the first result blend in with the second result, preventing the content of the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process from being discerned from the notification timing, and making it possible to appropriately increase the attention to the notification.

Feature N10. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second picture combination different from the first picture combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a special result (special role) is set in which the bonus awarding means awards a second bonus (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
A mode notifying means for notifying the mode of operation of the stop operation means by a predetermined notifying means (for example, a function for notifying the push order by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
A specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of the status notification by the status notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special role), a first specific processing means (for example, a function of executing a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes the specific processing after the operation of the stop operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific role) different from the first result, a second specific processing means (for example, a function of executing a process for AT lottery at the time of stopping by the main control unit 101) that executes the specific processing before operating the stop operation means;
Equipped with
A first specific notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a double number effect or a random number effect by a display control device 81) capable of executing a first specific notification corresponding to the specific process at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means in a first game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a second specific notification means (a function of executing processing to perform a confirmation presentation when a cherry is won by the display control device 81) capable of executing a second specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing prior to the specific timing in the second game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (when the first stop ON operation is performed).

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. A special result is set in which a first bonus is awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, while a second bonus is awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, and since the second bonus is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus, when a special result is reached, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage depending on whether or not a notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means is executed, which can contribute to increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in a game in which the bonuses granted may differ depending on the operation mode, the specific process for notifying the operation mode is executed after the stop operation means is operated if the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first result, and is executed after the stop operation means is operated if the result is the second result. This associates the lottery result with the timing of execution of the specific process, realizing an exciting game in which the player predicts the lottery result and, based on that prediction, understands the timing of execution of the specific process, and then exerts force in operating the stop operation means so that the result of the specific process is advantageous to the player.

In addition, if the first result is obtained, a second specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is executed at a specific timing after the operation, and if the second result is obtained, a third specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is executed before the specific timing. This makes it possible to predict which result will be obtained from the second and third specific notifications, favorably increasing the attention paid to each specific notification and favorably realizing gameplay that allows the player to predict the result and then operate the stop operation means.

For feature N10 above, the configurations defined in features N1 to N9 may be applied individually, or each configuration may be applied in combination.

Feature N11. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a start drive control to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the first benefit (payout of one medal) is awarded by the benefit awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second picture combination different from the first picture combination can be stopped at the valid position, and a special result (special role) is set in which the bonus awarding means awards a second bonus (payout of eight medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
A mode notifying means for notifying the mode of operation of the stop operation means by a predetermined notifying means (for example, a function for notifying the push order by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
A specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of the status notification by the status notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as a start-time AT lottery process or a stop-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special role), a first specific processing means (for example, a function of executing a start time AT lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes the specific process after the operation of the stop operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific role) different from the first result, a second specific processing means (for example, a function of executing a process for AT lottery at the time of stopping by the main control unit 101) that executes the specific processing before operating the stop operation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a first specific notification means (a function of executing a process for generating a tenpai presentation by a display control device 81) capable of executing a first specific notification corresponding to the specific processing at a special timing (when the second stop ON operation is performed) in a first game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, and capable of executing the first specific notification corresponding to the specific processing at the special timing (when the second stop ON operation is performed) in a second game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held for the game, and when a picture combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. A special result is set in which a first bonus is awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, while a second bonus is awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, and since the second bonus is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus, when a special result is reached, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage depending on whether or not a notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means is executed, which can contribute to increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in a game in which the bonuses granted may differ depending on the operation mode, the specific process for notifying the operation mode is executed after the stop operation means is operated if the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first result, and is executed after the stop operation means is operated if the result is the second result. This associates the lottery result with the timing of execution of the specific process, realizing an exciting game in which the player predicts the lottery result and, based on that prediction, understands the timing of execution of the specific process, and then exerts force in operating the stop operation means so that the result of the specific process is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the case of the first result in which a specific process is executed after an operation, and the second result in which a specific process is executed before an operation, a first specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process may be executed at a special timing in either case, making it difficult to understand the lottery result and making the game even more interesting.

For feature N11 above, the configurations defined in features N1 to N10 may be applied individually, or each configuration may be applied in combination.

The invention described in Features N1 to N11 above was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features A1 to A22, Features B1 to B8, Features C1 to C8, Features D1 to D10, Features E1 to E11, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K9, Features L1 to L7, Features M1 to M12, and Features N1 to N11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features N1 to N10 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

To each of the configurations of Feature Group A to Feature Group N described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A to N individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern sequence, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operating means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... reels as a rotating body, 41... start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... stop switches as a stop operation means, 64... speaker constituting the auxiliary performance section, 65... auxiliary display section constituting the auxiliary performance section, 68... indication monitor, N8... eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81... display control device as a sub-control board, 101... main control device as a main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

The present invention relates to
A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means for executing a start drive control to start rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means for holding a lottery for awarding a special prize to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
an awarding means for awarding a number of game values corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a first symbol combination can be stopped at a predetermined position that is visible through the display unit, and a first number of game values is awarded by the awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a specific result is set in which a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at a predetermined position visible through the display unit, and a second number of game values greater than the first number is awarded by the awarding means;
A mode notifying means capable of notifying a mode of an operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notifying means;
A means for executing a specific determination of whether a specific event occurs that makes it easier for the mode notification means to execute the mode notification;
a means for performing a process for making the specific determination executable when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a specific game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and for performing a process for making the specific determination inexecutable when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the specific game;
a specific notification means for executing a specific notification corresponding to the response result when the result of the specific determination is a response result corresponding to causing the specific event;
Equipped with
the specific notification means is capable of executing the specific notification when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the specific game subsequent to the game in which the specific judgment results in the corresponding result, and is also capable of executing the specific notification when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode;
The specific determination is also performed in a game in which a lottery result by the lottery means is a result different from the specific result,
The configuration is characterized in that the result of the specific judgment executed in the game having the different result can be the corresponding result .

Claims (2)

A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for performing a stop operation for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means for executing a start drive control to start rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means for holding a lottery for awarding a special prize to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
an awarding means for awarding a number of game values corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a first symbol combination can be stopped at a predetermined position that is visible through the display unit, and a first number of game values is awarded by the awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a specific result is set in which a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at a predetermined position visible through the display unit, and a second number of game values greater than the first number is awarded by the awarding means;
A mode notifying means capable of notifying a mode of an operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notifying means;
A specific processing means capable of executing a specific process related to the function of the status notification means;
a means for performing a process for making the specific process executable when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a specific game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and for performing a process for making the specific process unexecutable when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the specific game;
a means for executing a notification corresponding to the specific process at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means is executed in the specific game;
a means for notifying a player of a predetermined content of the specific process at a timing prior to the specific timing in the specific game and at a timing subsequent to a branch timing in which the operation of each of the stop operation means is performed to determine whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode;
A gaming machine comprising: A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means for executing a start drive control to start rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for executing a stop drive control to stop the rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means for holding a lottery for awarding a special prize to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
an awarding means for awarding a number of game values corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a first symbol combination can be stopped at a predetermined position that is visible through the display unit, and a first number of game values is awarded by the awarding means.
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a specific result is set in which a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination can be stopped at a predetermined position visible through the display unit, and a second number of game values greater than the first number is awarded by the awarding means;
A mode notifying means capable of notifying a mode of an operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notifying means;
A means for executing a specific determination of whether a specific event occurs that makes it easier for the mode notification means to execute the mode notification;
a means for performing a process for making the specific determination executable when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a specific game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and for performing a process for making the specific determination inexecutable when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the specific game;
a specific notification means for executing a specific notification corresponding to the response result when the result of the specific determination is a response result corresponding to causing the specific event;
Equipped with
The specific notification means is capable of executing the specific notification when the result of the specific judgment becomes the corresponding result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the specific game after the game which resulted in the corresponding result, and is also capable of executing the specific notification when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

Images